Samsung Galaxy S4 SGH M919 User Manual

4 G  
L T E  
S M A R T P H O N E  
User Manual  
Please read this manual before operating your  
phone and keep it for future reference.  
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF  
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS  
OR BENEFITS.  
Modification of Software  
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,  
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.  
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY. YOUR  
CARRIER MAY NOT PERMIT USERS TO DOWNLOAD CERTAIN SOFTWARE, SUCH AS CUSTOM OS.  
SAFE™ (Samsung Approved For Enterprise)  
SAFE™: "SAFE™" (Samsung for Enterprise) is a mark for a Samsung device which has been tested against Samsung's own  
internal criteria for interoperability with certain third party security-related solutions for MDM and VPN. The testing includes field  
testing with local network connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the  
Samsung device. During the testing, the device is tested with the security solutions to see if the solutions work with the device as  
described by the third party security solution providers. The testing, for example, includes field testing with local network  
connection and menu tree testing which tests functionality of the solutions in conjunction with the Samsung device. For more  
information about Samsung's SAFE™ program, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe  
.
Disclaimer of Warranties: EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE PROVIDED IN THEIR STANDARD END USER LICENSE AND WARRANTY, TO THE  
FULL EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS CO., LTD., SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC, AND  
THEIR AFFILIATES (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO HEREIN AS THE "SAMSUNG ENTITIES") EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY AND ALL  
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,  
INTEROPERABILITY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, WITH RESPECT TO INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™  
DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SAMSUNG ENTITIES BE LIABLE FOR ANY  
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO  
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY SECURITY PROTECTION, SAFE™ DEVICES OR APPLICATIONS TESTED WITH SAFE™ DEVICES. In  
addition, information technology security protection will be affected by features or functionality associated with, among other  
things the e-mail platform, master data management, and virtual private network solutions selected by the software provider,  
solution provider or user. Choice of an e-mail, master data management, and virtual private network solution is at the sole  
discretion of the software provider, solution provider or user and any associated effect on information technology security  
protection is solely the responsibility of the software provider, solution provider or user. For complete statement of limited  
warranty, please refer to www.samsung.com/us/safe, available on the web and where Samsung smartphone and Galaxy Tab™  
devices are sold. [101212]  
Samsung Telecommunications America (STA), LLC  
Headquarters:  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, TX 75082  
Customer Care Center:  
1000 Klein Rd.  
Plano, TX 75074  
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)  
Internet Address:  
©2013 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. Samsung is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.  
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device?  
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:  
Nuance®, VSuite™, T9® Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications,  
Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
ACCESS® and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.  
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are  
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.  
Openwave® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Music, Google Talk,  
Picasa, YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.  
LTE is a trademark of ETSI  
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. © 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.  
, DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under  
license.  
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium content.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX  
Certified® device that has passed rigorous testing to verify that it plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and  
software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX  
Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (tap  
Apps > Settings > More tab > About device > Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register). Go to vod.divx.com for  
more information on how to complete your registration.  
Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience  
Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise,  
intermittent sounds (like a siren or nearby conversation), and echoes, allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere.  
How Does It Work?  
Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system, the technology:  
Captures, evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone, and the person you're speaking with.  
Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise - so the person you're calling hears only your voice,  
without disturbing background noise.  
Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience, so you can hear clearly and don't need to speak louder to  
overcome surrounding noise.  
The noise suppression technology is built-in and already enabled in your new mobile phone. So it's ready to provide unsurpassed  
voice clarity with every call.  
Table of Contents  
Confirming the Default Image and Video  
Storage Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Section 3: Call Functions and  
Contacts List ..............................................62  
1
Adding more Contacts via Accounts  
and Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
2
Section 8: Applications and  
Development ............................................199  
3
4
5
Section 11: Health and Safety  
Information ...............................................335  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification  
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices . . . . . . . .355  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356  
6
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section explains how to get started with your phone by  
installing and charging the battery, installing the micro SIM  
card and optional memory card, and setting up your voice  
mail.  
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual  
assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the  
available keys.  
Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings,  
and may vary from your device, depending on the  
software version on your device, and any changes to the  
device’s Settings.  
Before using your device for the first time, you’ll need to  
install and charge the battery and install the micro SIM card.  
The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details,  
such as your PIN, available optional services, and many other  
features. If desired, you can also install an SD card to store  
media for use with your phone.  
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual  
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.  
Understanding this User Manual  
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of  
your phone. A robust index for features begins on page 372.  
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual  
displays may vary, depending on the software version of  
your device and any changes to the device’s Settings.  
Also included is important safety information that you should  
know before using your phone. This information is available  
near the back of the guide, beginning on page 335.  
This manual provides navigation instructions according to  
the default display settings. If you select other settings,  
navigation may be different.  
Getting Started  
7
       
Special Text  
Example: From the Home screen, press  
Connections tab Bluetooth.  
(
Menu  
)
Settings  
Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from  
the rest. These are intended to point out important  
information, share quick methods for activating features, to  
define terms, and more. The definitions for these methods  
are as follows:  
Battery Cover  
The battery, micro SIM card and SD card are installed under  
the battery cover.  
Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu,  
or sub-menu.  
Important! Before removing or replacing the battery cover,  
Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.  
Important: Points out important information about the current  
feature that could affect performance.  
make sure the device is switched off. To turn the  
device off, hold down the  
power-off image displays, then tap Power off  
key until the  
.
Warning: Brings to your attention important information to  
prevent loss of data or functionality, or even prevent damage to  
your phone.  
Caution! Do not bend or twist the back cover excessively  
during installation or removal. Doing so may damage  
the cover.  
Text Conventions  
This manual provides condensed information about how to  
use your phone. To make this possible, the following text  
conventions are used to represent often-used steps:  
To remove the battery cover:  
1. Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release  
latch (1).  
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of  
selecting successive options in longer, or  
repetitive, procedures.  
2. Place your fingernail in the opening (2) and firmly  
“pop” the cover off the device (similar to a soda can).  
8
     
SIM Card Overview  
Important! Before removing or replacing the micro SIM card,  
make sure the device is switched off. To turn the  
phone off, hold down the  
key until the  
power-off image displays, then tap Power off  
.
Release Latch  
The micro SIM card is loaded with your subscription details  
such as your telephone number, PIN, available optional  
services, and many other features.  
Important! The micro SIM card and its information can be  
easily damaged by scratching or bending, so be  
careful when handling, inserting, or removing the  
card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small  
children.  
To replace the battery cover:  
Some features on your device (such as Wi-Fi Calling) can be  
unlocked by using the new micro SIM card.  
Position the battery cover over the battery  
compartment and press down until you hear a click.  
To use this new micro SIM card, call or contact T-Mobile  
customer service for more information.  
This card contains the necessary information for identifying  
and authenticating the user to the IMS (IP Multimedia  
Subsystem).  
Getting Started  
9
     
To remove the micro SIM card:  
1. Remove the battery cover.  
Installing and Removing the SIM card  
This device uses a different type of SIM card called a “micro  
SIM”. Other larger SIM cards will not function or fit within this  
slot.  
2. Carefully place your fingernail into the end of the micro  
SIM slot and push the card slightly out.  
3. Carefully slide the card out of the micro SIM card  
socket.  
To install the SIM card:  
1. Carefully slide the micro SIM card into the SIM card  
socket until it clicks into place.  
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the device will not  
detect it and no service will be available. If this happens,  
turn off the device, remove the card, and reinstall the  
card in the correct orientation.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Micro SIM card  
2. Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the  
phone and that the upper-left angled corner of the card  
is positioned as shown.  
10  
         
Installing the microSD Memory Card  
Important! Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card  
Your device supports an optional (external) microSD™  
memory cards for storage of media such as music, pictures,  
video and other files. The SD card is designed for use with  
this mobile device and other devices.  
with the phone’s contact pins.  
Correct  
Note: microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB.  
microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB  
to up to 32GB.  
Incorrect  
microSDXC™ memory card types can include  
capacities greater than 32GB.  
Note: This device supports a memory card of up to a 64GB.  
The device comes in a 16GB model.  
Removing the microSD Memory Card  
1. Remove the battery cover.  
1. Remove the battery cover.  
2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The  
card should pop partially out of the slot.  
3. Remove the card from the slot.  
2. Locate the microSD card slot on the inside of the  
device.  
3. Orient the card with the gold strips facing down.  
4. Carefully slide the microSD card into the card socket  
until it clicks into place.  
4. Replace the battery cover.  
Getting Started  
11  
       
Removing the Battery  
Grip the battery at the top end (3) and lift it up and out  
of the battery compartment (4).  
Battery  
Before using your device for the first time, install the battery  
and charge it fully.  
Installing Battery  
Important! Before removing or replacing the battery, make  
sure the device is switched off. To turn the device  
off, hold down the  
key until the power-off  
image displays, then tap Power off  
.
Installing the Battery  
1. Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the  
tabs on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the  
phone, making sure the connectors align.  
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).  
Removing Battery  
12  
       
Charging the Battery  
Note: Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the  
wall charger. If both the wall charger is connected and  
the battery is not installed, the handset will power cycle  
continuously and prevent proper operation. Failure to  
unplug the wall charger before you remove the battery,  
can cause the device to become damaged.  
Your device is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A  
wall charger, which is used for charging the battery, is  
included with your device. Use only approved batteries and  
chargers. Ask your local Samsung dealer for further details.  
Before using your device for the first time, you must fully  
charge the battery. A discharged battery recharges fully in  
approximately 4 hours.  
Important! It is recommended you fully charge the battery  
before using your device for the first time.  
1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.  
2. Locate the Charger/Accessory jack.  
Correct  
Charging Head  
3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/  
Accessory jack.  
Incorrect  
4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power  
outlet. The device turns on with the screen locked and  
indicates both its charge state and percent of charge.  
USB Cable  
Getting Started  
13  
   
5. When charging is finished, first unplug the charger’s  
power plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect  
the charger’s connector from the phone.  
Warning! While the device is charging, if the touch screen  
does not function due to an unstable power supply  
unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet  
or unplug the USB cable from the device.  
Important! If your handset has a touch screen display, please  
note that a touch screen responds best to a light  
touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic  
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object  
when pressing on the touch screen may damage  
the tempered glass surface and void the warranty.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Note: This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect  
orientation for connecting the charger. If the charger is  
incorrectly connected, damage to the accessory port will  
occur therefore voiding the phone’s warranty.  
14  
Low Battery Indicator  
Extending Your Battery Life  
When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk  
time remain (~15% charge), a warning tone sounds and the  
“Battery low” message repeats at regular intervals on the  
display. In this condition, your device conserves its remaining  
battery power, by dimming the backlight.  
Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS  
functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a  
list of helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:  
Reduce your backlight on time.  
Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.  
When the battery level becomes too low, the device  
automatically turns off.  
Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.  
Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using  
this function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your  
current location; each query drains your battery.  
Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before  
charging your device. Repeating this process of a complete  
discharge and recharge can over time reduce the storage  
capacity of any battery.  
The on-screen battery charge is represented (by default) as a  
colored battery icon. You can also choose to display a  
percentage value. Having a percentage value on-screen can  
provide a better idea of the remaining charge on the battery.  
Press  
and then tap Settings  
My device tab Display  
Display battery percentage.  
Turn off Automatic application sync.  
Use the Power Saving feature to deactivate some hardware and  
interface functions.  
Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions  
have been consuming your battery resources.  
Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary  
applications.  
Getting Started  
15  
         
Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background  
applications that are still running. These minimized applications  
can, over time, cause your device to “slow down”.  
4. If prompted, assign the Date and time settings. Enable  
the Automatic date and time field, select a time zone,  
and tap Next  
If you disable the Automatic date and time feature, you can  
then manually assign this information.  
.
Turn off any streaming services after use (see Running Services).  
Animated wallpapers use processing power, memory, and more  
power. Change your Live Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper  
gallery or Gallery image.  
Note: The Date and time menu may not appear if  
automatically detected via your internal microSIM card.  
Initial Device Configuration  
1. Select a language from the associated field.  
English is the default language.  
5. At the Samsung account screen, select one of the  
following options:  
If this is your first time, tap Create new account  
.
Note: If you are visually impaired or have difficulty hearing, tap  
If you have previously created a Samsung account, tap Sign in  
.
Accessibility to configure the accessibility settings.  
– or –  
Tap Skip to continue with the setup process and create  
2. Tap Next  
.
Note: You may be prompted with a notification that your  
activation is completed.  
3. At the Wi-Fi screen, move the slider to activate the  
feature and connect to either an existing Wireless  
Access Point (WAP) or tap Next to continue.  
16  
     
6. At the Got Google? screen, choose either Yes to log into  
9. When prompted, enter a First and Last name then tap  
your existing Google account or No to continue.  
(Next). This will help to identify this as your  
If you selected Yes, on the Sign in screen, enter your current  
device.  
Google Email and Password information and tap (  
)
Next.  
10. When prompted with the Dropbox activation screen,  
Tap OK to agree to the Google legal agreements.  
you can choose to either: Create account Sign in,  
,
If prompted to enable purchases, tap Set up credit card and  
enter your credit card information and click Save  
Click Skip to continue without entering this information.  
Disclaimer, or tap Skip to continue.  
.
7. If you indicated that you did not have a current Google  
account, then at the Make it Google screen, choose  
either Get an account to create a new account or  
Not now to continue.  
11. From the Learn about key features screen:  
Tap an available field to display an on-screen tutorial.  
Turn on a feature by sliding the activation slider to the ON  
ON  
position (  
12. Tap Next  
).  
8. Select/deselect the desired Google & location services  
.
and tap  
(Next).  
Note: Enabling Google location services can drain battery  
power.  
Getting Started  
17  
13. Accept the current device name.  
Important! Selecting Close only closes the current description  
– or –  
screen and does not disable data collection.  
Tap the Device name field and use the on-screen  
To disable data collection, go to Settings  
Accounts tab Backup and reset Collect  
keyboard to rename your device.  
diagnostics and turn off the Allow diagnostics to be  
Important! The device name is also used to provide an  
identification for your device’s Bluetooth and Wi-Fi  
Direct names.  
Switching the Device On or Off  
Once the device has been configured, you will not be  
prompted with setup screens again.  
14. Tap Finish to complete the setup process.  
15. Read the on-screen Collect diagnostics information.  
To turn the device on:  
Note: This software collects only diagnostic data from your  
device so that T-Mobile technicians can better  
troubleshoot issues with your device.  
Press and hold  
switches on.  
(Power/End) until the device  
The device searches for your network and after finding  
it, you can make or receive calls.  
16. Select either More Info (to read additional information)  
or Close to close the message screen.  
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory.  
To change the language, use the Language menu. For  
18  
               
To turn the device off:  
1. Press and hold  
Creating a New Google Account  
You should create a GoogleAccount when you first use  
your device in order to fully utilize the functionality. This  
account provides access to several device features such as  
Gmail, Talk, and the Google Play Storeapplications.  
Before you are able to access Google applications, you must  
enter your account information. These applications sync  
between your device and your online Google account.  
(Power/End) until the Device  
options screen appears.  
2. Tap Power off ).  
(
Restarting the Device  
1. Press and hold  
options screen appears.  
2. Tap Restart ).  
(Power/End) until the Device  
(
To create a new Google Account from your device:  
Locking and Unlocking the Device  
By default, the device screen locks when the backlight turns  
off.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Play Store).  
2. Read the introduction and tap New to begin.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Google  
Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in  
any of the directions shown unlock the device.  
Account.  
– or –  
If this is not the first time you are starting the device,  
Note: You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent  
unauthorized use of your device. For more information,  
tap  
(Gmail).  
Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to  
sign in.  
Getting Started  
19  
             
To create a new Google Account from the Web:  
1. From a computer, launch a Web browser and navigate  
Retrieving your Google Account  
Password  
A Google account password is required for Google  
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account  
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:  
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and  
2. On the main page, click Sign-in  
for free  
.
Create an account  
.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to create your free  
account.  
4. Look for an email from Google in the email box you  
provided, and respond to the email to confirm and  
activate your new account.  
2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link.  
3. Follow the on-screen password recovery procedure.  
Signing into Your Google Account  
1. Launch an application that requires a Google account  
(such as Play Store or Gmail).  
2. Click Existing  
.
3. Tap the Email and Password fields and enter your  
information.  
4. Tap  
(Sign in). Your device communicates with the  
Google servers to confirm your information.  
5. If prompted, you can enable the option to stay up to  
date on news and offers, then tap OK  
.
20  
         
4. Press  
to return to the Home screen.  
Confirming the Default Image and  
Video Storage Location  
Creating a Samsung Account  
Although the device is configured to store new pictures and  
videos to the Memory card, it is a very good idea to confirm  
this location before using your device.  
Just as important as setting up and activating a Google  
account to help provide access to Play Store, etc.. An active  
Samsung account is required to begin accessing applications  
such as Media Hub.  
Important! Too many users can overlook this storage  
destination until something goes wrong. It is  
recommended that you verify this location or  
change it before initiating the use of the camera or  
camcorder features.  
Note: The Samsung account application will manage your  
access to the previously mentioned applications, and  
there is no longer a need to remember different  
passwords for each application.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Camera).  
2. Press  
and scroll up to the Storage entry.  
(
Apps) ➔  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings Accounts tab).  
2. Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap  
Add account Samsung account  
3. If you have previously created a Samsung account, tap  
and then tap  
(
(
and then tap Settings  
(Settings)  
.
3. Tap this entry and select the desired default storage  
location for newly taken pictures or videos. Choose  
Sign in.  
from: Device or Memory card  
.
– or –  
If this is your first time, tap Create new account  
.
Note: It is recommended that you set the option to Memory  
card  
.
Getting Started  
21  
           
4. Enter your the required information and tap Sign up  
.
Voice Mail  
5. Tap Terms and conditions Special terms, and Privacy  
,
Setting Up Your Voice Mail  
policy to read the legal disclaimers and related  
information.  
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to  
voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon  
as your battery is charged and the micro SIM card inserted,  
activate your voicemail account.  
6. If you agree to the terms, place a green check mark in  
the I accept all the terms above field and tap Agree  
7. Enter your the required information and tap Sign up  
.
.
Important! Always use a password to protect against  
unauthorized access.  
Note: You may be prompted to confirm your credentials via  
email.  
For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voice  
mail:  
8. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to verify  
your account via the provided email address.  
Note: Voicemail setup may be different depending on your  
network.  
Note: Without confirming your email address and following the  
documented procedures, related applications will not  
function properly since it is Samsung account that is  
managing their username and password access.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and then touch and  
hold the key until the device dials voicemail.  
You may be prompted to enter a password.  
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting,  
and a display name.  
22  
     
Accessing Your Voice Mail  
You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and  
Visual Voicemail  
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who  
left a voicemail message, and listen to the any message they  
want without being limited to chronological order.  
holding  
on the keypad, or by using the phone’s  
Application icon, then tapping the Voice Mail application. To  
access Voice Mail using the menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Visual Voicemail).  
(Apps) ➔  
and then touch and  
(
hold  
until the device dials voicemail.  
2. Read the on-screen information and tap Next.  
Note: Touching and holding  
will launch the voicemail  
Note: You must subscribe to the Visual Voicemail service to  
use this feature. Charges may apply. Please contact your  
service provider for further details.  
application.  
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the  
voicemail center.  
3. Tap an on-screen voicemail message to play it back.  
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone  
1. Dial your wireless phone number.  
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the  
asterisk key on the phone you are using.  
3. Enter your passcode.  
Getting Started  
23  
       
To check Visual Voicemail messages:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Task Manager  
(Apps) ➔  
Your device can run applications simultaneously, with some  
applications running in the background.  
(
Visual Voicemail).  
2. Tap the voicemail message you want to play.  
3. Tap Play).  
Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time,  
and the biggest reason for this are background applications.  
These are applications that were not properly closed or  
shutdown and are still active but minimized. The Task  
Manager not only lets you see which of these applications  
are still active in the background but also easily lets you  
choose which applications are left running and which are  
closed.  
(
To delete Visual Voicemail messages:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(Visual Voicemail).  
2. Tap the voicemail message you want to delete.  
3. Tap  
(Delete) OK.  
Note: The larger the number of applications running on your  
phone, the larger the energy drain on your battery.  
24  
 
Task Manger Overview  
Press and hold Home) and then tap  
Task manager). This screen contains the following  
tabs:  
Shutting Down an Currently Active Application  
Press and hold Home) and then tap  
End all  
– or –  
1. Press and hold  
Task manager).  
(
(
(
(
)
• Active applications display those currently active applications  
running on your phone.  
(
Home) and then tap  
(
• Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications  
from the Play Store that are taking up memory space. Tap  
Uninstall to remove them from your phone.  
2. From the Active applications tab, tap End to close  
selected applications.  
– or –  
• RAM, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random  
Access Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear  
Tap End all to close all background running  
applications.  
Memory  
.
• Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and  
used space within the System storage and external SD card.  
Getting Started  
25  
   
To configure the Google Now settings:  
1. Press and hold and then tap  
2. Press and select Settings  
Google Now  
Google Now® recognizes a users’ repeated actions  
performed on the device (including access of common  
locations, repeated calendar appointments, search queries,  
etc.). This information is then used to display more relevant  
information to the user in the form of “cards”. These  
scrollable on-screen cards are displayed when the Google  
Now application is launched.  
(
Google Now).  
.
3. Access each desired Settings page and configure it as  
desired.  
When these condition are met, new card information will  
begin to appear in the Google Now list of cards.  
These cards are not manually added.  
The service uses your GPS, Google Search, and usage  
information to generate these cards automatically.  
To initially set up Google Now:  
1. Press and hold  
Google Now).  
(Home) and then tap  
(
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to review the  
available information.  
3. When prompted, agree to launch the application. Some  
initial on-screen “cards” are shown. A default is the  
Weather card that provides updated weather  
information in your area.  
26  
     
Section 2: Understanding Your Device  
This section outlines key features of your device. It also  
describes the device’s keys, screen and the icons that  
display when the device is in use.  
Over 700,000 Apps available to download from the Google Play™  
Store and Samsung Apps  
Access Movies, TV Shows, Music, Games, and Books with  
Samsung Hub™  
Features of Your Device  
Your device is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many  
significant features. The following list outlines a few of the  
features included in your device.  
Samsung Link™ to share your media content across connected  
devices. Cloud connectivity is enabled via the use of an external  
Web storage service  
Touch screen with virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard  
®
Compliant with AllShare Cast Hub  
®
Brilliant 4.99” HD Super AMOLED screen (1920 x 1080)  
13 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus and digital  
zoom  
1.9 gigahertz quad-core processor  
Delivering data speeds faster than the current 3G network  
technology by using 4G LTE and High Speed Packet Access Plus  
(HSPA+).  
2 Megapixel Front Facing camera for Video Chat  
Share Shot picture sharing functionality  
S-Beam file transfer technology  
Android 4.2.2, Jelly Bean Platform  
Share Shot camera sharing-capable via multi-connect Wi-Fi  
Direct connection  
Smart Switch™ compliant. For more information, see  
Bluetooth enabled  
®
®
Support for Air View and Air Gestures  
.
NFC-compatible  
®
Wi-Fi Capability  
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube,  
Google Maps, Google Voice Search)  
®
WatchON – Rich TV experience with Infrared (IR) remote  
Understanding Your Device  
27  
           
Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging and  
Google Talk™  
Video Player support for PIP (Picture in Picture) viewing  
®
®
DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p, including  
premium content  
Corporate and Personal Email  
Music Player with multitasking features  
Pre-loaded e-reader applications such as: Play Books™ and Play  
Magazines™  
Front View  
The following illustrations show the main elements of your  
device. The following list correlates to the illustrations.  
1. Indicator light illuminates with a series of distinct  
colors and flashing patterns to indicate different  
notifications and statuses. Events include Charging,  
Low battery, and Missed event:  
Assisted GPS (Google Navigation)  
Webkit-based browser  
Expandable memory slot - supports up to 64GB microSD  
Mobile HotSpot and USB Tethering-capability  
Powering on - blue blinks/animates  
®
T-Mobile TV  
Battery Charging - red remains on  
Video Chat via Google Talk  
Battery Fully Charged - green remains on.  
Low Battery or Charging Error- red blinks/animates  
Missed Notification (Call or Messaging) - blue blinks/animates  
Google Play™ Music  
®
Wi-Fi Calling via the use of a micro SIM card  
HD Video Player 1080p  
– Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, VC-1, WMV7/8, VP8, MP43  
– Format: 3GP (MP4), WMV (ASF), AVI, and DivX  
28  
   
2. Light (RGB) Sensor lets you use the ambient light level  
to adjust the screen brightness/contrast. This sensor  
decreases screen brightness in dim light.  
5
12 11  
10  
9
1
2
In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the  
device to increase the brightness and contrast for better  
viewing.  
In dim light conditions, the device decreases the screen  
brightness to compensate.  
3. Menu key displays a list of options available for the  
current screen. From the Home screen it displays  
Add apps and widgets, Create folder, Set wallpaper,  
Edit page, Search, and Settings options.  
8
7
4. Home key displays the Home screen when pressed.  
Press and hold to display your recent apps, Task  
manager, and Remove all option.  
Double-press to activate S Voice.  
3
4
5
6
Understanding Your Device  
29  
5. Microphones are used during phone calls and allow  
other callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking  
to them. There are two microphones on the device:  
11. Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the  
surface of the screen. This is typically used to detect  
when your face is pressed up against the screen, such  
as during a phone call.  
Bottom microphone: used during handset mode.  
Top microphone: used while an active call is in the  
speakerphone mode and assists in noise cancellation  
(2 microphone solution).  
While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and  
locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses.  
12. Receiver allows you to hear the other caller.  
6. USB Power/Accessory connector allows you to connect  
a power cable or optional accessories such as a USB/  
data cable.  
Back View  
The following illustration shows the external elements of your  
Device:  
7. Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears  
entries.  
1. microSD Card Slot (internal) allows you use a microSD  
card to expand the memory of your device.  
8. Display shows all the information needed to operate  
your phone, such as the connection status, received  
signal strength, phone battery level, and time.  
9. Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while  
facing the screen and allows you to video conference.  
10. Gestures Sensor used to detect Air View and Air Gesture  
motions.  
2. External speaker allows you to hear ringers, music, and  
other sounds offered by your phone.  
30  
   
3. micro SIM Card Slot (internal) Installation location for  
Side Views  
The following illustration shows the side elements of your  
device:  
SIM card.  
2
1
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
4. Flash is used to take photos in low-light conditions.  
5. Headset jack allows you to connect a hands-free  
headset so you can listen to music.  
1.  
Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in  
standby mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice  
6. Camera lens is used to take photos.  
When receiving an incoming call:  
volume during a call.  
7. IR Transmitter used to emit infrared signals used for  
controlling external devices. For more information,  
Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone.  
2. Power/End key  
ends a call or switches the  
phone off and on. Press and hold for two seconds to  
turn toggle the Silent mode or Airplane mode states,  
turn the device on or off, or Restart.  
Understanding Your Device  
31  
   
Device Display  
Status Bar  
Your display provides information about the device’s status,  
and is the interface to manage features. The display  
indicates your connection status, signal strength, battery  
status and time. Icons display at the top of the device when  
an incoming call or message is received and also alerts you  
at a specified time when an alarm was set. The screen also  
displays notifications, and Application (or shortcut) bar with  
five primary shortcuts: Phone, Contacts, Messaging, Internet,  
and Apps.  
The Status Bar shows information about the connection  
status, signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and  
displays notifications about incoming messages, calls and  
other actions.  
This list identifies the icons you see on your phone’s display  
screen:  
Indicator Icons  
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your device’s  
display and Indicator area:  
Display settings  
In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the  
wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight.  
Note: Some Notification icons can be hidden manually by  
toggling the status of the Notification panel function. For  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings) ➔  
(
Apps) ➔  
(
(
My device tab) Display.  
My device  
Displays your current signal strength. The greater  
the number of bars, the stronger the signal.  
Indicates that the Airplane Mode is active. You  
cannot send or receive any calls or access online  
information.  
32  
                 
Indicates there is no signal available.  
Displays when you device is set to automatically  
reject all incoming calls. The All numbers option  
isenabledfromwithinCallsettings  
Auto reject mode menu.  
Callrejection  
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.  
Displays when there is a system error or alert.  
Displays when the speakerphone is on. Icon is  
displayed in the Status bar area.  
Displays when the microphone is muted. Icon is  
displayed in the Status bar area.  
Displays to indicate a security warning. You are  
prompted to set a screen lock password.  
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always  
forward. Displayed in the Status bar when the  
current call is minimized. For more information,  
Displays when a call is in progress. Icon is  
displayed in the Status bar area.  
Displays when a call is on hold. Icon is displayed in  
the Status bar area.  
Displays when an active call is routed through a  
Bluetooth headset. Icon is displayed in the Status  
bar area.  
Displays your current battery charge level. Icon  
shown is fully charged.  
Displays when the current battery is 100 percent  
chargedandtheDisplaybatterypercentageoption  
Displays when you have missed an incoming call.  
100%  
is enabled within the Settings  
My device tab ➔  
Display menu.  
Displays your battery is currently charging.  
Understanding Your Device  
33  
Displays your current battery charge level is  
low (Charge: ~28% - 15%).  
Displays when your phone is communicating  
with the 4G LTE network.  
Displays your current battery charge level is  
very low (Charge: ~15% - 5%).  
Displays when the phone has detected an active  
USB connection and is in a USB Debugging mode.  
Shows your current battery only has up to 4%  
power remaining and will soon shutdown.  
(Charge: ~4% - 1%).  
Displays when there is a new text message.  
Displays when an outgoing text message has  
failed to be delivered.  
Displays when connected to the EDGE network.  
Displays when an incoming text message  
content has failed to be downloaded.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the EDGE network.  
Displays when there is a new voicemail message.  
Displays when connected to the 3G network. 3G  
indicator is only seen when roaming.  
Displays when there is a new visual voicemail  
message.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the 3G network. 3G indicator is only seen when  
roaming.  
Displays in the notifications window when there  
is a new Email message.  
Displays when connected to the HSPA+ network.  
Displays in the notifications window when there  
is a new Gmail message.  
Displays when your phone is communicating with  
the HSPA+ network.  
Displays when the user is prompted to set up a  
new Dropbox account.  
34  
DisplayswhentheuserispromptedwithaLookout  
Security notification.  
Displays when data synchronization and  
application sync is active and synchronization is in  
progress for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.  
Displays when the T-Mobile Name ID  
Displays when the Blocking mode feature is  
application did not recognize a recent number  
and would like to know whether you wish to  
Not add, or add as a New or Existing number.  
Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and  
enabled.  
DisplayswhenthetimeanddateforaCalendarEvent  
Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active  
and communicating with an external device.  
Displays when an alarm is set.  
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in  
progress.  
Displays when the device is in Silent mode.  
All sounds except media and alarms are silenced,  
and Silent mode is set to Vibrate. For more  
Displays when a file or application download is in  
progress.  
Displays when the Share shot option is enabled  
from within the Camera Shooting mode menu and  
images and being shared via Wi-Fi Direct.  
Displays when the device is in Silent mode.  
All sounds are silenced, and Silent mode is set to  
Mute  
.
Understanding Your Device  
35  
Displayswhenascreencapturehasbeentakenand  
stored in the clipboard.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an  
available open wireless network.  
Displays when your device is connected being  
used to control streaming media and is connected  
to a Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA)  
certified devices.  
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and  
configured for a direct connection to another  
compatible device in the same direct  
communication mode.  
Displays when your device is currently sharing/  
streaming media to paired device using the  
Samsung Link application.  
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is communicating  
with another compatible device.  
Displays when AllShare Cast Hub is active,  
connected to your device, and communicating.  
Displays to alert you to disable an active Wi-Fi  
Direct connection if not in use - to conserve  
battery power.  
Displays when the USB Tethering mode is active  
Displays when updates are available for download.  
Displays when a Play Store download has  
completed.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is being used as a Mobile  
HotSpot feature is active and communicating.  
36  
 
Displays when a share shot has been established  
with other users via a Wi-Fi Direct connection.  
Displays in the notifications window when a  
song is currently playing within the Music  
application.  
Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active.  
MinutesusedwhileconnectedtotheWi-Finetwork  
count against available rate plan minutes.  
Displaysinthenotificationswindowwhenasongis  
currently playing within the Play Music application.  
DisplayswhentheWi-Ficallingfeatureisactiveand  
you are using it with within your current active call.  
Displays when your device’s GPS is on and  
communicating.  
Displays when there is an error in the use or 911  
registration of the Wi-Fi Calling feature.  
Displays when the external SD card (internal  
microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted)  
fromthephoneandisnowreadyforeither removal  
or formatting.  
Displays when you are currently in Emergency  
calling mode. You must exit this mode to resume  
normal calling function.  
Displays when the External SD card is being  
prepared for mounting to the device. This is  
required for communication with the External SD  
card.  
Displays in the notifications window when  
a new T-Mobile account information is available.  
Displaysinthenotificationswindowwhenthereare  
too many on-screen notification icons to display.  
Tap to show more notifications.  
Displays when the microSD card has been  
improperly removed or unexpectedly.  
Displays when storage within either the internal  
location or the external SD card has reached its  
capacity. It is recommended you either move  
files off or delete them to make additional room.  
Tap to select a text input method.  
Understanding Your Device  
37  
2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated  
Displays when Power saving mode is enabled.  
application (2).  
Displays when the Power saving alert notification  
has been activated. You are then prompted to view  
your current battery level.  
Displays when TTY device has been inserted.  
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see  
Notification Bar  
The Notification area indicates new message events (data  
sync status, new messages, calendar events, call status,  
etc). You can expand this area to display the Notification  
screen that provides more detailed information about the  
current on-screen notification icons.  
1. Touch the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and  
then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open  
the Notifications panel (1).  
38  
   
Clearing Notifications  
To minimize the Grid view:  
1. In a single motion, touch and drag the Status bar down  
to the bottom of the screen to open the Notifications  
panel.  
From the Notification panel, tap  
to show only your primary functions.  
(Close Grid view)  
To customize the functions displayed:  
1. From the Notification screen, tap  
view) to display additional functions.  
2. Tap Clear. The notifications are cleared from the panel.  
(
Open Grid  
Accessing Additional Screen Functions  
In addition to notifications, this screen also provides quick  
and ready access to device functions. These can be quickly  
activated or deactivated.  
2. Tap  
(Edit) then locate the Notifications panel area  
located at the bottom of the Notifications panel screen.  
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired function  
then drag it to the top row.  
Scrolling across a horizontal list of functions has been  
enhanced with an accessible Grid view.  
Note: You can select the function buttons you see at the top of  
the Notifications panel.  
Only 5 buttons are shown at any one time.  
The Grid view is the only way to view all functions.  
To activate the Grid view:  
From the Notification panel, tap  
to display additional functions.  
(Open Grid view)  
Understanding Your Device  
39  
 
Function Keys  
Home Screen  
Your device comes equipped with three main function keys  
The Home screen is the starting point for using the  
applications on your phone. There are initially seven  
available panels, each populated with default shortcuts or  
applications. You can customize each of these panels.  
that can be used on any screen: Home Menu, and Back.  
,
Home Key  
The Home key (  
) takes you back to your Home screen  
(indicated by a white Home icon).  
Signal strength  
Connection Status  
Press and hold to launch the Recent apps/Task  
Battery status  
Status Bar  
Time  
Menu Key  
The Menu key (  
the current screen or application.  
Widget  
Notification  
area  
) activates an available menu function for  
Status  
area  
Back Key  
The Back key (  
screen. If the on-screen keyboard is currently open, this key  
closes the keyboard.  
Google Search  
Home Screen  
) returns you to the previously active  
Shortcuts  
Primary  
Shortcuts  
40  
             
Notification area displays those icons associated with end-user  
notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in  
progress), new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection,  
Emails, and Text/MMS messages.  
Note: Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible  
across all screens.  
Google search is an on-screen Internet search engine powered  
by Google™. Tap to access the Voice Actions feature where you  
can verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search.  
These notifications appear at the top-left of the screen (within  
the Status bar area) and display important user information.  
This information can be accessed by swiping down from the  
Status bar (page 38).  
Tap  
(Voice Actions) to launch the function from within  
this Google widget.  
Status area displays those icons associated with the status of  
the device such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 4G/3G,  
Wi-Fi communication, battery levels, GPS, etc.  
Widgets are self-contained on-screen applications (not  
shortcuts). These can be placed onto any of the available screens  
(Home or extended).  
Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information  
about notifications and device status, and allows access to  
application Widgets.  
Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications  
such as Camera, YouTube, Contacts, Phone, Email, Play Store,  
etc. These function the same as shortcuts on your computer.  
Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible  
screen width to provide more space for adding icons, widgets,  
and other customization features.  
Although some may already be found on the Extended Home  
screens, the majority can also be found within the Applications  
screens.  
There are six available extended screens (panels) each of  
which may be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets.  
These screens share the use of the five Primary Shortcuts.  
The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a white  
square. Up to seven (7) total screens are available.  
The Application screens can be accessed by tapping  
(
Apps) from the Primary shortcuts area.  
Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any  
number of times.  
Understanding Your Device  
41  
Primary Shortcuts: are four shortcuts present throughout all of  
the available screens and can be used to both navigate within the  
device or launch any of the following functions:  
Home Screen Menu Settings  
When on the Home screen, press  
the following menu options:  
and then select any of  
Phone  
(Keypad, Logs, Favorites, and Contacts).  
Contacts ) launches the Contacts-related screens  
(Phone, Groups, Favorites, and Contacts).  
Messaging ) launches the Messaging menu (create new  
messages or open an existing message string).  
Internet ) launches the built-in Web browser.  
Apps launches the Applications page.  
(
) launches the phone-related screen functions  
Add apps and widgets allows you to quickly access the Widget  
tab where you can then drag a selected widget to an available  
area on a selected screen.  
(
Create folder allows you to create on-screen folders to help  
organize files of application shortcuts.  
(
Set wallpaper allows you to assign the current wallpaper for the  
Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens. Choose  
from Gallery, Live wallpapers, or Wallpapers.  
(
Edit page allows you to add or remove extended screens from  
your device. You can have up to six extended screens (one Home  
screen and six Extended screens).  
Tap  
(Apps) to access the Applications screens.  
While in the Applications screens, tap  
return to the Home screen.  
(Back) to easily  
Search displays the Google Search box that you can use to  
search for a key term online.  
As you transition from screen to screen, a screen indicator  
(located at the bottom) displays the currently active panel.  
Settings provides quick access to the device’s settings menu.  
The Settings menu can also be accessed by pressing  
and then tapping Settings  
.
42  
             
• Uninstall: allows you to uninstall a user-downloaded  
application. Only those applications that are not default to the  
Applications  
The Application menu provides quick access to the most  
frequently used applications. Applications display on each of  
the three panels on the Applications screens.  
device can be downloaded. Tap  
app.  
to remove the selected  
• Downloaded applications: allows you to filter the view of apps  
to only those applications that you have downloaded.  
• View type: allows you to customize the way the Apps menu  
listing is shown (page 58).  
Important! Once you log into your Google account. All  
previously downloaded apps should now be  
populated within the Application screens.  
• Share apps: allows you to share information about selected  
applications with external users (page 56).  
Application Screen Menu Settings  
When on the Apps screen, the following menu options are  
• Hide applications: allows you to specify which current  
applications are hidden from view in this menu. Once you have  
available:  
1. Press  
and then tap  
(Apps).  
selected the apps, tap Done  
.
2. Press  
and then select from the following options:  
• Show hidden applications: allows you to specify which  
previously hidden applications are can be made visible again  
for viewing in this menu. Once you have selected the apps, tap  
• Play Store: provides quick access to the Play Store (page 225).  
• Edit: allows you to organize your current applications by moving  
them around the screen, edit or delete existing Apps folders.  
• Create folder: allows you to create an application folder where  
you can better organize and group desired apps.  
Done  
.
3. Press  
to return to the Home screen.  
Understanding Your Device  
43  
               
Flick: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping.  
This finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as  
when flicking through contacts or a message list.  
Swipe or slide: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally  
across the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to  
scroll through a list. For example: slide your finger left or right on  
the Home screen to scroll among the seven panels.  
Drag: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you  
start to move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached  
the target position.  
Screen Navigation  
Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can  
navigate the features of your device and enter characters.  
The following conventions are used in this manual to  
describe the navigation action in the procedures.  
Navigating Through the Screens  
The following terms describe the most common hardware  
and on-screen actions.  
Press and hold: Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and  
buttons to select or activate an item. For example: press the  
Navigation key to scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys  
require you to press and hold them to activate a feature, for  
example, you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the device.  
Tap: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter  
text on the virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an  
Application icon to open the application. A light touch works best.  
Touch and hold: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the  
available options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example:  
touch and hold from the Home screen to access a menu of  
customization options.  
Rotate: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait  
to landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate  
to landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger  
keyboard, or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling.  
Pinch: “Pinch” the screen using your  
thumb and forefinger to zoom out when  
viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move  
fingers inward to zoom out.)  
Spread: “Spread” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to  
zoom in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers  
outward to zoom in.)  
44  
       
– or –  
Tap  
applications.  
Note: These screens can be re-arranged in any desired order.  
to delete the record of all recently used  
Using Motions and Gestures  
By activating the various motion and gesture features within  
this menu (page 311), you can access a variety of time  
saving functions.  
Motion Navigation and Activation: The device comes equipped  
with the ability to assign specific functions to certain device  
actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and  
gyroscope.  
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause  
Note: Motion must be enabled for this feature to be active. For  
unintended results. To learn how to properly control  
motions, tap  
(
Apps) Settings  
My device tab  
Motions and gestures. When tapped, each entry  
comes with an on-screen tutorial.  
Accessing Recently-Used Apps  
From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
1. Press and hold  
from any screen to open the  
Settings  
gestures  
(My device tab) Motions and  
recently-used applications window.  
2. Tap an icon to open the selected application.  
– or –  
My device  
.
• Air gesture: Allows you to control your device by performing  
motions above the sensor (without touching the device).  
• Motion: Allows you to control your device using natural  
movements (on the screen).  
Tap  
to go to the Task manager.  
– or –  
Tap  
to go to Google Search.  
Understanding Your Device  
45  
       
• Palm motion: Allows you to control your device by touching the  
screen with your entire hand.  
To activate Motion:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
• Gyroscope calibration: Allows you to properly calibrate your  
device’s touch screen.  
Motions and gestures  
.
To activate Air gesture:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Motions and gestures  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Motion slider to  
the right to turn it on.  
.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Air gesture slider  
to the right to turn it on.  
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Motion can  
If the feature is available for your selected action, an  
be activated.  
Air gesture icon  
will appear in the status bar.  
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
.
4. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to  
the on position.  
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Air gesture  
can be activated.  
4. Tap Learn about sensor and icon field to review  
on-screen information about the Air gestures sensor  
and related icon.  
5. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to  
the on position.  
46  
         
To activate Palm Motion:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Gyroscope Calibration  
Calibrate your device by using the built-in gyroscope.  
Motions and gestures  
.
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Palm motion  
Motions and gestures  
Gyroscope calibration.  
slider to the right to turn it on.  
2. Place the device on a level surface and tap Calibrate  
.
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
.
The device adjusts the level of the accelerometer.  
During the calibration process a green circle appears  
on-screen and the center circle adjusts to the center  
position.  
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Palm  
motion can be activated.  
4. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to  
the on position.  
Understanding Your Device  
47  
         
3. Tap the MultiWindow entry to activate the feature (2).  
Using the Multi Window  
This feature allows you to run multiple applications on the  
current screen at the same time.  
The icon turns green when active.  
Note: Although the MultiWindow feature is now active  
(as shown via the Notifications screen), the user must  
enable/display the MultiWindow list is shown only by  
using the Back button. This action is a one time event  
during the initial access. After that, the MultiWindow list  
is displayed whenever the feature in active via the  
Notifications screen (2).  
Note: Only applications found within the Multi window panel  
can be active atop another current application on the  
screen.  
When launching applications that contain multimedia  
files (music/video), audio from both files will be played  
simultaneously.  
Activating and Deactivating Multi window  
To activate Multi window via the Notification screen:  
1. In a single motion, touch the Status bar to reveal the  
Notifications tab, and then drag it to the bottom of the  
screen to open the Notifications screen (1).  
2. From the Notification screen, tap  
(Open Grid  
view) to display additional functions.  
48  
     
To display the Multi window tab:  
1. Press and hold the Back key (  
Repositioning the Multi Window  
).  
The Multi window contains two components: tab and apps  
panel. The tab can be manually moved across the screen.  
The apps panel (containing the scrollable apps) can be  
relocated to lock onto the different sides of the screen.  
The Multi window tab appears (by default) on the left  
side of the screen.  
Note: Initially open activation, the entire apps panel is briefly  
To move the tab Up or Down:  
1. Activate the Multi window feature (page 48).  
displayed, then minimized to only show the tab.  
2. Press and hold the Back key (  
) to view the tab.  
2. Tap the tab to open the application panel showing all  
3. In a single motion, touch and hold the tab for  
approximately one-second, then slowly drag it to its  
new location along the current screen edge.  
the available Multi window apps.  
To hide the Multi window tab:  
Press and hold the Back key (  
). This action hides  
the Multi window tab from view.  
Note: This is a quick way to get the tab out of the way if you  
can’t get to a button or option behind it.  
Understanding Your Device  
49  
 
To relocate the Multi window apps panel:  
1. Activate the Multi window feature.  
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the  
scrollable apps).  
Customizing the Multi Window apps  
The applications found within the apps panel of the Multi  
window can be organized by either being rearranged or  
removed.  
To rearrange the Multi window applications:  
1. Activate the Multi window feature.  
Note: Its only when the tab is detached that the entire panel  
can be relocated.  
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the  
scrollable apps).  
3. In a single motion, touch and hold for approximately  
one-second to detach it from the screen (1), then  
slowly drag it to its new location along any other  
available screen edge (2).  
3. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it  
detaches from the panel, then carefully drag it to a new  
location in the list of apps. Lift your finger or stylus off  
the screen to let go of the app and drop it into its new  
location.  
To remove a Multi window application:  
1. Activate the Multi window feature.  
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the  
scrollable apps).  
3. Tap the Edit button (located at the bottom of the list) to  
reveal a staging area that can house any removed  
applications from the Multi window panel.  
50  
       
4. Tap Done once you have completed the removal  
Using Multi Window to run multiple apps on the  
same screen  
process.  
To restore a Multi window application:  
Any of the apps found within the Multi window panel can be  
run at the same time as a current on-screen app.  
1. Activate the Multi window feature.  
2. Tap the tab to display the apps panel (containing the  
scrollable apps).  
Once multiple apps are running on the same screen, you can  
then choose to either swap their positions or maximize a  
desired app.  
3. Tap the Edit button (located at the bottom of the list) to  
reveal the staging area containing any previously  
removed apps.  
Note: Only applications found within the Multi-window panel  
can be active atop another current application on the  
screen.  
4. Locate the desired application.  
When launching applications that contain multimedia  
files (music/video), audio from both files will be played  
simultaneously.  
5. In a single motion, touch and hold a desired app until it  
detaches from the staging area, then carefully drag it  
to a new location in the current list of apps.  
Understanding Your Device  
51  
   
In this example we will be launching both the Internet and  
Maps applications.  
1. Launch an application.  
To switch the arrangement of the applications:  
1. With the two  
applications shown in a  
App #1 Split/Maximize  
Exit  
From the Home screen, tap  
Internet).  
2. Activate the Multi window feature.  
3. Tap the tab to display the apps panel.  
(
Apps  
)
split screen, tap the  
Border bar to show the  
on-screen icons.  
(
2. Tap the desired  
application area (top or  
bottom).  
4. Touch and hold the desired app, such as Maps, until it  
detaches from the panel.  
3. Locate and tap  
5. In a single motion, drag it over the current app and  
drop the new Multi window app over either the top or  
bottom area of the current on-screen app.  
(Switch app location).  
The current apps are  
switched.  
Note: Once two applications are running, the device displays a  
split screen view containing both the initial app and the  
new Multi window app.  
To increase the size of a  
desired application window:  
1. With the two  
Each application is still independent of the other.  
applications shown in a  
split screen, locate the  
Border bar indicating  
App #2 Border Switch  
Positions  
Bar  
the edge of the app window.  
52  
   
2. In a single motion, touch and hold the Border bar then  
Menu Navigation  
drag it to resize the desired window.  
You can tailor the device’s range of functions to fit your needs  
using both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and  
features are accessed by scrolling through the available  
on-screen menus. Your device defaults with seven screens.  
To split the current applications:  
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap  
the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.  
2. Tap the desired application area (top or bottom).  
Navigating Through the Application Menus  
There are three default Application Menu screens available.  
As you add more applications from the Play Store, more  
screens are created to house these new apps.  
3. Locate and tap  
(Maximize the app). The current  
apps are the both maximized.  
To close a selected application:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Application Menu screen displays.  
To close the Applications screen, press  
(
Apps). The first  
1. With the two applications shown in a split screen, tap  
one of the two on-screen apps to select it.  
2. Tap the Border bar to show the on-screen icons.  
(Home  
).  
2. Sweep the screen to access the other menus.  
3. Tap any of the on-screen icons to launch the  
associated application.  
3. Locate and tap  
(Close the app). The current app is  
close and the remaining app is maximized.  
Understanding Your Device  
53  
       
Using Sub-Menus  
Sub-menus are available from within most screen and  
applications.  
Using Context Menus  
Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options  
that apply to a specific item on the screen. They function  
similarly to menu options that appear when you right click  
your mouse on your desktop computer.  
1. Press  
screen.  
2. Tap an available on-screen option.  
. A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the  
Touch and hold an item on-screen to open its context  
menu.  
Context  
Menu  
Sub-Menu items  
54  
     
Accessing Recently-Used Applications  
Customizing the Screens  
1. Press and hold  
to open the recently-used  
You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the  
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one  
screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other  
forms of media, while another screen might contain  
communication apps such as Gmail.  
applications window.  
Note: This recent applications screen also provides access to  
the Task manager  
.
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:  
2. A pop-up displays the six most recently used  
applications.  
Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens  
Assigning a New Home screen  
3. Tap an icon to open the recent application.  
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts  
Sharing Application Information  
Managing Shortcuts  
Adding and Removing Widgets  
Changing the Background (Wallpapers)  
Understanding Your Device  
55  
         
Adding and Deleting Screens  
Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these  
Rearranging the Screens  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
screens and then add them back later.  
Edit page  
.
2. Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new  
location. Upper-left is screen position #1 and  
bottom-right is screen last screen.  
Note: These screens can be deleted and re-arranged.  
Important! Your phone can only contain at most seven screens  
Assigning a New Home Screen  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and at least one screen.  
and then tap  
Edit page  
.
To delete a screen:  
2. Tap  
. The new Home screen then indicates this  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Edit page  
2. Touch and hold, then drag the undesired screen up to  
the Remove tab ( ).  
to return to the main Home screen.  
and then tap  
.
(Home screen) icon at the top of the selected  
screen.  
Sharing an App  
The device’s Applications menu now comes with a feature  
that allows you to share information about your selected  
applications with external users.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Share apps  
3. Place a check mark alongside those applications you  
wish to share information about and tap Done  
3. Press  
To add a screen:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Edit page  
2. Tap  
and then tap  
.
(Apps).  
(
Add screen). The newly added screen  
.
appears as the last page.  
3. Press to return to the main Home screen.  
.
56  
             
To add a shortcut from the Applications screen:  
1. From the Home screen, select a screen location for  
your new shortcut by scrolling across your available  
screens until you reach the desired one.  
Note: Shared applications consist of those that have  
previously been downloaded from the Play Store.  
4. Select a sharing method. Choose from: Bluetooth,  
ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google,  
Google+, Messaging, S Memo, and Wi-Fi Direct.  
5. The recipient will be notified about the receipt of the  
new information.  
2. Tap Apps  
(
) to reveal all your current available  
applications. By default, applications are displayed as  
an Alphabetical grid.  
3. Scroll across the screens and locate your desired  
application.  
Managing Shortcuts  
4. Touch and hold the on-screen icon. The new shortcut  
then appears to hover over the current screen.  
5. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the  
current screen. Once complete, release the screen to  
lock the shortcut into its new position.  
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you  
must carefully touch and hold the shortcut and slowly  
drag it to the edge of the screen. As the shortcut turns  
light blue, you can begin to move it to the adjacent  
screen.If this does not work, delete it from its current  
screen. Activate the new screen and then add the  
selected shortcut.  
To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:  
1. From the Home screen, navigate to a screen with an  
empty area.  
2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.  
3. From the Home screen window, tap Apps and widgets  
Apps.  
Understanding Your Device  
57  
       
4. Scroll across the pages and in a single motion, touch  
and hold an application to place a copy on the current  
screen.  
To insert a new primary shortcut:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps).  
2. Locate your desired application, then touch and hold  
the on-screen icon to position it on a desired screen.  
To delete a shortcut:  
1. From the Home screen, touch and hold the desired  
shortcut. This unlocks it from its location on the current  
screen.  
3. Locate the screen with the desired shortcut you want  
to add as the new primary shortcut.  
2. Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab (  
) and  
release it.  
4. Touch and hold the shortcut until it detaches from the  
screen.  
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts  
5. In a single motion, touch and hold the new shortcut,  
then drag it into the empty space within the row of  
primary shortcuts. The new primary shortcut will now  
appear on both the Home and Extended screens.  
Note: You can change any of your primary shortcuts with the  
exception of the Apps shortcut.  
To remove a primary shortcut:  
From the Home screen, touch and hold the primary  
shortcut you want to replace, then drag it to an empty  
space on any available screen. The primary shortcuts  
are now updated to show an empty slot.  
58  
         
To remove a Widget:  
Adding and Removing Widgets  
1. Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the  
current screen.  
Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed  
on any screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets appear as  
applications.  
2. Drag the widget over the Remove tab (  
) and  
To add a Widget:  
release it.  
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn red.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) Widgets  
This action doesn’t delete the Widget, it just removes it from the  
current screen.  
tab.  
2. Scroll across the Widget pages and locate a desired  
Widget.  
To place a widget onto a different screen:  
1. Touch and hold the widget until it becomes  
transparent.  
3. Touch and hold an available Widget until it detaches  
from the screen.  
2. Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the  
adjacent page appears highlighted and it then snaps  
onto the new page.  
4. While still holding the Widget, scroll left or right across  
the available screens and let go of the Widget to place  
it on your current screen.  
3. Drag the widget to its desired position on the new  
screen.  
4. Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other  
screens.  
Understanding Your Device  
59  
   
Managing Wallpapers  
Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live  
wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery  
(default phone wallpapers).  
Note: Wallpapers supports the following image types: JPEG,  
PNG, GIF, BMP, and WBMP.  
To change Wallpapers from Settings Menu:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Note: Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require  
Display  
Wallpaper.  
additional battery power.  
– or –  
To change the current Home screen wallpaper:  
1. Navigate to any screen.  
– or –  
Touch and hold an empty area of the screen and select  
Set wallpaper  
2. Choose from Home screen  
lock screen  
.
,
Lock screen, or Home and  
Press  
to go to the Home screen.  
.
2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.  
Note: The Home and lock screens is an additional option that  
3. From the Home screen window tap Set wallpaper  
allows you to change both screens at the same time.  
Home screen  
.
4. Select a Wallpaper type:  
3. Select a wallpaper type (Gallery  
Wallpapers).  
4. Choose an image and tap Done or Set wallpaper  
,
Live wallpaper, or  
Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera  
image gallery, crop the image, and tap Done  
Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated  
backgrounds, once done tap Set wallpaper  
Tap Wallpapers, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper  
image, then tap Set wallpaper  
.
.
.
.
60  
               
To change the current Lock screen wallpaper:  
1. Navigate to any screen, touch and hold an empty area  
of the screen, and tap Set wallpaper  
Lock screen.  
– or –  
From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Display Wallpaper Lock screen  
2. Select a Wallpaper type:  
.
Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera  
image gallery, crop the image, and tap Done  
.
Tap Travel wallpaper to display recommended destination  
images on your lock screen. Select a slideshow interval.  
Tap Wallpaper, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper  
image, then tap Set wallpaper  
.
Understanding Your Device  
61  
       
Section 3: Call Functions and Contacts List  
This section describes features and functionality associated  
with making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which  
is used to store contact information.  
Making a Call  
You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the  
SIM card or to the device’s memory. These entries are  
Displaying Your Phone Number  
referred to as the Contacts list  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Enter the phone number and then tap  
.
(Phone).  
From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings More tab) About device  
(
.
Status. Your phone number displays in the  
My phone number field.  
If you make a mistake while dialing, tap  
clear the last digit. Touch and hold  
entire sequence.  
to  
to clear the  
Note: The device’s Settings menu can also be activated  
by pressing and then tapping Apps) ➔  
Settings).  
(
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the  
Call settings Additional settings menu, the device  
(
automatically redials up to 10 times when the person  
does not answer the call or is already on the phone,  
provided your call is not sent to voicemail.  
Note: If your screen goes black during your interaction with  
the device (launching Keypad, etc.), you might be  
accidentally swiping over the front sensors.  
62  
             
Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List  
Ending a Call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Contacts).  
Briefly tap  
key to end the call.  
2. Locate a contact from the list.  
Note: To redial a recent number, tap  
or locate the number from the Logs list, tap the entry  
and tap Call  
at the end of the call  
3. In a single motion, touch and drag your finger over the  
number by going to the right. This action places a call  
to the recipient.  
Call  
.
Running a Call in the Background  
If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home  
screen, you are visually notified that you are still on an active  
call by the green phone icon within the Status bar.  
Ending a Call from the Status Bar  
1. From an active call, you can launch a separate  
application or return to the Home screen. The current  
call is kept active in the background.  
This is the best way to stay on your current call and do  
something else (multi-task) such as access the Contacts list,  
view a recent email, locate a picture, etc..  
2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and  
then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open  
the Notifications panel (1).  
In Call Notification  
3. Tap End to end the currently active call (2).  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
63  
             
Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed  
Making Emergency Calls  
The Emergency calling mode makes redialing an emergency  
number a 1-tap process. Before you can resume normal  
calling operations, you should first exit this mode.  
1. Swipe the Lock screen to unlock the device.  
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn  
on the phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message  
displays and an animated tutorial shows you how to install  
the SIM card.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call  
with the phone; normal cell phone service is not available.  
Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card  
installed  
3. Enter the emergency number (ex: 911) and then tap  
.
4. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will  
have access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End  
Call features.  
1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make  
an emergency call.  
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap  
. Complete your call.  
During this type of call, you will have access to the  
Speaker mode, Keypad, and End Call features.  
Note: This mode can drain your battery power more rapidly  
than a normal calling mode.  
Note: Selecting Location consent may drain battery power. For  
5. At the Emergency Callback screen, follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
3. Tap  
to exit this calling mode.  
64  
         
Dialing Options  
When you enter numbers on the Keypad, you will see three  
on-screen options.  
Tip: You can create pauses longer than two seconds by  
entering multiple 2 second pauses.  
From the keypad screen, use one of the following options:  
• Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string (the  
phone waits for your input). A wait requires that any  
Voicemail  
Call  
Delete  
(
) to access your Voicemail service.  
) to call the entered number.  
consecutive numbers be manually sent by tapping Yes  
.
(
• Call settings to provide you access to the Call settings screen.  
(
) to delete digits from the current number.  
Answering a Call  
When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the  
incoming call image. The caller's phone number, picture, or  
name if stored in Contacts List, displays.  
To view additional dialing options:  
After entering a number, tap  
:
• Send message to send the current caller a text message while  
still maintaining the current call active.  
At the incoming call screen:  
Touch and slide  
Touch and slide  
in any direction to answer the call.  
in any direction to reject the call.  
• Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a new or  
existing Contacts entry.  
• Speed dial setting to access the Speed dialing setting menu  
where you can assign a speed dial location to a current  
Contacts entry.  
Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward  
and tap a predefined rejection message or tap Create new  
message to create a new custom outgoing response.  
• Add 2-sec pause to insert a two-second pause to enter a  
2-second delay within a number string (the phone continues  
dialing after 2 seconds without any additional keys being  
pressed.  
Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
65  
           
If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts,  
the entry’s name is displayed. You may also see the caller’s  
phone number, if available.  
Answering a call with Air Gesture  
1. Verify the Air Gestures feature is on and Air call-accept  
2. At the incoming call screen, wave your hand over the  
screen to accept the incoming call.  
If active, the Air call-accept icon  
the incoming call screen.  
appears at the top of  
Touch and drag  
upward to reject  
with a message  
Managing Reject Calls  
This feature allows you to categorize both known and  
unknown callers as rejected contacts. These Contacts are  
then added to you Rejection list which can be managed for  
individual entries from within the Contacts list or as a whole  
from the Call rejection screen.  
Touch and  
slide in any  
direction to  
answer the  
call  
Touch and slide  
in any direction  
to reject the call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Press and then tap Call settings  
Call rejection.  
66  
             
3. Tap the Auto reject mode field to configure your  
automatic rejection settings. Rejected calls are routed  
automatically to your voicemail. Choose from:  
• Off: disables the auto rejection feature.  
To assign single number as rejected via Auto reject list:  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Call rejection  
Auto reject list  
.
2. Tap Create) and either enter the phone number  
(
• All numbers: enables the features for all known and unknown  
numbers, including those contacts that are not assigned to the  
rejection list.  
or select a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list.  
3. Tap Save to complete the assignment.  
International Calls  
• Auto reject numbers: automatically rejects all entries assigned  
to the Reject list/Blacklist.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and then touch and  
hold  
until the device shows “+” on-screen.  
Adding numbers to the rejection list  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code,  
Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu  
or via the Auto reject list menu. The Contacts menu option  
assigns all numbers for an individual as rejected. The Auto  
reject list allows to assign individual numbers.  
area code, and phone number.  
3. If you make a mistake, tap  
once to delete a  
single digit.  
– or –  
To assign multiple numbers as rejected via Contacts:  
Touch and hold  
4. Tap  
to delete all digits.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Contacts).  
.
2. Locate an entry and tap it to open the Contact  
Overview Screen (page 104).  
3. Press  
and then tap Add to reject list. All phone  
numbers associated with this entry are then added to  
the reject list.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
67  
               
Pause Dialing  
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with  
automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone  
numbers.  
Wait Dialing  
Inserting a Wait into your dialing sequence means that the  
phone waits until it hears a dial tone before proceeding with  
the next sequence of numbers.  
2-Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers  
after a two-second pause. This is indicated in the number string  
Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping Yes. This is  
indicated in the number string as a semicolon ( ).  
;
as a comma (  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
on-screen keypad to enter the phone number.  
2. Press and then tap Add 2-sec pause. This feature  
adds an automatic two-second pause.  
,).  
Note: Do not add multiple Waits (;) to a number string as this  
and use the  
will continue to prompt you after each sequence.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the  
on-screen keypad to enter the phone number.  
3. Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that  
2. Press  
and then tap Add wait. This feature causes  
the phone to require your acceptance before sending  
the next set of entered digits.  
will be dialed automatically after the second pause.  
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by  
3. Tap  
.
entering multiple 2 second pauses.  
4. Once prompted to Send the following tones?, tap Yes to  
dial the remaining digits.  
4. Tap  
.
68  
               
Setting Up Speed Dial Entries  
Redialing the Last Number  
The device stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,  
received, or missed if the caller is identified.  
Important! Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No  
other number can be assigned to this slot.  
To recall any of these numbers:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Keypad  
2. Tap the  
(Logs tab) to display the list of recent  
tab).  
calls.  
2. Press  
and then tap Speed dial setting. The Speed  
3. Tap the name/number and tap  
.
dial setting screen displays a virtual list of locations  
Speed Dialing  
with the numbers 2 through 100.  
Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts  
List, you can set up to 99 speed dial entries (2-100) and then  
dial them easily whenever you want, simply by touching the  
associated numeric key.  
3. Tap an unassigned number slot. The Select contact  
screen displays.  
4. Tap a contact and select a number to assign it to the  
speed dial location. The selected contact number/  
image is displayed in the speed dial number box.  
Note: Speed dial location #1 must be reserved for Voicemail  
use.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
69  
       
Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order  
1. From the Home screen, tap Keypad tab.  
2. Press and then tap Speed dial setting  
Removing a Speed Dial Entry  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Keypad tab.  
.
2. Press  
and then tap Speed dial setting.  
3. Touch and hold a existing on-screen speed dial  
location and select Remove from the context menu.  
– or –  
Important! The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and  
another number cannot be assigned to this slot.  
Press  
select  
and then tap Remove. Tap an entry and  
Remove entry). Select either Done  
3. Press  
and then tap Change order.  
(
4. Tap the current entry then tap the new target speed  
(to complete the deletion) or Cancel (to exit).  
4. Press to return to the previous screen.  
Making a Call Using Speed Dial  
dial location.  
Note: Tapping 2 existing speed dial locations causes the  
entries to switch positions.  
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the  
5. Tap Done. to store the change.  
Contacts List for speed dialing.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
6. Press  
to return to the previous screen.  
2. Touch and hold a previously created speed dial location  
(numbers 2-100, or 1 if you are dialing voice mail) until  
the number begins to dial.  
3. If you are not certain of the speed dial location, tap  
Speed dial setting and tap a speed  
dial number to view the assigned phone number.  
70  
     
Activating Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi Calling  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Wi-Fi Calling is a free feature for T-Mobile customers using  
this device with the new SIM card. Wi-Fi Calling is an  
excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the  
home or wherever cellular coverage is limited. Minutes used  
while connected to the Wi-Fi network count against available  
rate plan minutes.  
Settings  
2. Locate the Wi-Fi field (and in a single motion touch and  
slide OFF to the right to turn it on.  
(Connections tab).  
The slider color indicates the activation status.  
3. Select a Wi-Fi network from the list of available  
networks. Follow the on-screen instructions to  
complete connection.  
The benefits of Wi-Fi Calling include the following:  
Wi-Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your  
current in-home coverage experience  
Wi-Fi Calling works anywhere there is a Wi-Fi signal available  
Wi-Fi Connected  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
Important! A new micro SIM card must be installed within the  
device prior to using this feature. Wi-Fi must first  
be active and communicating prior to launching  
Wi-Fi Calling.  
Wi-Fi Communication Issue  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an  
available open wireless network.  
Note: This feature is active by default. If you are in an active  
Wi-Fi call and go out of range of your Wi-Fi, the call will  
be dropped.  
Note: To avoid international data roaming fees when using  
Wi-Fi calling when outside the United States, the Data  
Roaming feature on your device must be turned off.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
71  
     
4. If  
(Missing 911 Address) displays in the Status  
Note: With certain rate plans, minutes used while connected  
to the Wi-Fi network count against available rate plan  
minutes.  
Bar, follow these steps to provide 911 an address for  
emergency situations:  
.
Click on Profile and edit the Edit customer information  
.
Important! If you are not using a new ISIM card, you will  
receive an Error: ERxx Invalid SIM message. You  
must be using a new ISIM card to use this feature.  
Enter your emergency location information and complete the  
online registration.  
5. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks Wi-Fi Calling  
.
Activating Wi-Fi Calling  
1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon  
6. Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for  
use by the Wi-Fi Calling feature:  
displays on  
the Status Bar.  
• Wi-Fi Preferred: Wi-Fi network is preferred over cellular  
network when making calls. Calling requires you to stay in the  
Wi-Fi range.  
If prompted with an on-screen “Did you know your phone can  
make calls over Wi-Fi” popup, tap Learn and follow the  
remaining on-screen instructions. Tap Next Done  
2. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks  
3. Locate the Wi-Fi Calling field and in a single motion  
touch and slide OFF to the right to turn it on.  
.
• Cellular Network Preferred: The cellular network is preferred  
over a Wi-Fi network when making calls.  
.
• Never use Cellular Network: Use only Wi-Fi for calls.  
Do not use Cellular Network, even if available.  
72  
       
7. Tap OK to save the setting.  
When Action  
Then  
8. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks.  
Displays on the You are connected to the  
screen status T-Mobile network and can  
bar.  
9. Tap Wi-Fi Calling slider to toggle off the feature, then  
tap it again to reactivate the feature and re-register  
your device with the T-Mobile Network.  
make Wi-Fi calls.  
Displays on the The Wi-Fi calling feature is  
screen status active and in use within an  
bar.  
10. Confirm  
Status Bar.  
(Wi-Fi Calling Ready) displays in the  
active call.  
Doesnotdisplay You are charged normal  
on the screen callingrateminutes.Formore  
Launching Wi-Fi Calling  
status bar.  
information, refer to  
“Activating Wi-Fi Calling” on  
Note: Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access  
Point.  
1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon displays on the  
Displays on the There is an error in the use or  
screen status 911 registration of the Wi-Fi  
status bar.  
bar.  
Calling feature.  
2. Confirm  
Status Bar.  
(Wi-Fi Calling Ready) displays in the  
While Wi-Fi Calling mode is active, the call button shows a  
3. Use the phone Dialer, Logs, or Contacts list to make a  
call.  
Wi-Fi indicator  
.
4. Go to the dialer and make a call. Make sure  
When Wi-Fi Calling is disabled, the call button goes back to  
show normal operation  
.
(Wi-Fi Calling in use) appears during the call.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
73  
   
Adjusting the Call Volume  
During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the  
device, to adjust the earpiece volume.  
In Call Options  
Your device provides a number of features that are available  
for use during a call.  
During a call, press the Up volume key to increase the  
volume level and the Down volume key to decrease the  
level.  
– or –  
Call duration  
Personalized  
call sound  
Places a  
call on hold  
Adjust the audio by enabling selecting an audio preset.  
Tap the on-screen Personalize call sound button select  
an equalizer setting for the incoming call.  
Dialer  
Noise  
Reduction  
Extra volume  
Ends the  
call  
Enabled/disabled via the Call settings menu (Call settings  
Adds a  
new call  
Activates or  
Deactivates  
Bluetooth  
Headset  
Activates or  
Deactivates  
speakerphone  
– or –  
Mutes or Unmutes  
the call  
Quickly add more volume to the incoming audio by  
tapping the on-screen Extra volume button  
Note: Noise reduction and Extra volume features are disabled  
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume  
using these keys.  
while using Wi-Fi Calling.  
74  
               
Adjusting Noise Reduction  
Placing a Call on Hold  
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the noise  
reduction feature. Activating this feature can improve the  
quality of your conversation by reducing ambient noise.  
You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If  
your network supports this service, you can also make  
another call while a call is in progress.  
1. Tap  
(Noise reduction off) to toggle the status  
To place a call on hold:  
1. Tap Hold to place the current call on hold.  
2. Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold.  
and activate the feature.  
2. Tap  
(Noise reduction on) to toggle the status  
and deactivate the feature.  
To make a new call while a call is in progress:  
1. Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or  
look it up in Call history.  
Personalizing the Call Sound Setting  
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the sound of the  
incoming call by selecting an audio equalizer setting for the  
current call.  
2. Once connected, tap Add call to dial the second call.  
3. Dial the new phone number and tap  
.
1. Tap  
(Personalize call sound).  
To switch between the two calls:  
2. Confirm the option is enabled  
.
Tap Swap.  
Note: If prompted to enable the feature via the Call settings  
menu, go to Call settings Personalize call sound  
The previous In call number turns gray and displays  
On hold. The new active call displays a green  
background behind the number.  
.
3. Select an available option.  
Choose from: Adapt Sound, Soft sound, Clear sound,  
and Off.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
75  
       
Turning the Speakerphone on and off  
While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following  
these steps:  
Switching to Bluetooth Headset  
1. Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call.  
2. While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead  
1. Tap  
(
Speaker off) to toggle the speakerphone on.  
Speaker  
Speaker  
of speaker by tapping  
(Headset off).  
Headset  
3. At the prompt, tap OK to enable Bluetooth if it is not  
already activated.  
2. Tap  
(Speaker on) to toggle the speakerphone off.  
Tip: When the speaker is turned On, the color of the speaker is  
green. When the speaker is turned Off, the color of the  
speaker is white.  
4. While on a call, switch back to the device speaker by  
tapping  
(Headset on).  
Headset  
More In-call Options  
During a call you can save the current caller’s information to  
the Contacts list, or create a Memo.  
Muting a Call  
1. Tap  
cannot hear you speaking.  
2. Tap Mute on) to turn mute off and resume your  
conversation.  
(Mute off) to turn mute on so the other caller  
Mute  
Viewing the Contacts List  
During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list.  
(
Mute  
1. Press  
2. Browse the Contacts list for the information you need.  
3. Press to return to the active call.  
and then tap Contacts.  
76  
         
Creating a Message During a Call  
During a call you can create a message.  
Multi-Party calls  
Making a Multi-Party Call  
1. Press  
and then tap Message  
(
Compose).  
A multi-party call is a network service that multiple people to  
participate in a multi-party or conference call.  
2. Address and create the message.  
3. Review your message and tap  
Creating a Memo During a Call  
During a call it may be necessary to record information (a  
Note).  
For further details about subscribing to this service, contact  
T-Mobile customer service.  
(
Send).  
Setting up a Multi-Party Call  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Dial the number for the first participant and tap  
1. Press  
and then tap Memo.  
.
2. Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save  
.
3. Once connected, tap Add call, enter the second phone  
number and tap  
hold.  
. The first caller is placed on  
4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call  
and tap Merge. The two calls are now joined into a  
multi-party call and display in the order in which they  
were called.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
77  
         
Important! Multiple callers can be joined to a single  
multi-party line. Additional callers participate in a  
new Multiparty session and are held in conjunction  
with the previous multiparty call. You can swap or  
place each multi-party call on hold.  
Note: The Manage conference call option is not available for  
multi-party calls created while using the Wi-Fi Calling  
feature. You must be on the cellular network to use the  
manage feature.  
3. Tap the participant to which you want to speak  
privately.  
Having a Private Conversation With One Participant  
You can now talk privately to that person while the  
other participants can continue to converse with each  
other. If there is only one other participant, that person  
is placed on hold.  
Note: The Manage conference call option is not available for  
multi-party calls created while using the Wi-Fi Calling  
feature. You must be on the cellular network to use the  
manage feature.  
4. To return to the multi-party call, tap the Merge icon. All  
of the multi-party call participants can now hear each  
other.  
When you have two participants in a multi-party session, it  
might be necessary to place one of those participants on  
hold so that a private conversation can be held with a single  
caller. While you are in a multi-party call:  
1. Press  
and then tap Manage conference call  
.
2. Tap  
(Split Caller) adjacent to the participants you  
would like to split from the current multi-line call. The  
list displays the callers in the order they were dialed.  
78  
 
Dropping One Participant  
2. Tap an option from the Accept call after menu:  
• Putting xxx on hold to place the previous caller on hold while  
you answer the new incoming call.  
1. Press  
and then tap Manage conference call  
to the right of the number to drop.  
End  
The participant is disconnected and you can continue  
the call with the other participant.  
• Ending call with xxx to end the previous call and answer the  
new call.  
2. Tap  
to end your conversation with the remaining  
Note: The new caller appears at the top of the list. The  
previous caller is placed on hold and appears at the  
bottom of the list.  
caller.  
Call Waiting  
You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in  
progress, if this service is supported by the network and you  
have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate.  
3. Tap Swap to switch between the two calls. This places  
the new caller on hold and activates the previous call.  
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone. For  
Important! The currently active call is displayed with a green  
background.  
To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:  
4. Tap Swap again to switch back.  
1. In a single motion, touch  
and slide it in any  
direction to answer the new incoming call.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
79  
   
6. Tap  
to give it a command.  
Example 1:  
I want to find the best pizza online.  
Tap and say “Find me the best Pizza”. This launches  
an Internet search.  
Example 2:  
(Speak) if the device does not hear you or  
Using S Voice  
This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide  
variety of functions on your device. This is a natural language  
recognition application.  
This goes beyond the Google Search Voice Actions feature  
that simply recognizes Google commands and search terms.  
You can ask it questions (Is it raining in Dallas?) or give it  
commands (Show my where to find cheap gas).  
I want to go to Cambridge.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
S Voice).  
(Apps) ➔  
Tap and say “Navigate to Cambridge”. This launches  
(
the Map application and indicates where these are in relation to  
your current position.  
2. Read the on-screen disclaimer information and tap  
Confirm to continue.  
3. Review the Terms of Service and tap Agree to continue.  
4. Navigate through the following on-screen tutorial  
screens by reading the information and tapping Next  
,
or tap Skip to continue without reading the information.  
5. Wake up the application by repeating the phrase  
Hi Galaxy  
.
Note: The wake-up command/phrase can be changed from  
“Hi Galaxy” to anything else.  
80  
     
Accessing the Logs Tab  
Logs Tab  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Logs tab).  
The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts  
entries) for calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Logs  
tab makes redialing a number fast and easy. It is continually  
updated as your device automatically adds new numbers to  
the beginning of the list and removes the oldest entries from  
the bottom of the list.  
2. Tap an entry to view available options.  
Note: The Logs tab only records calls that occur while the  
phone is turned on. If a call is received while it is turned  
off, it will not be included in your calling history.  
The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left) displays  
phone notifications, status, or alerts such as:  
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and  
Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts).  
Displays when a call is in progress.  
Displays when a call was missed.  
Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.  
Indicates any received calls that were answered.  
Indicates a missed call.  
Indicates any received calls that were rejected.  
Indicates auto rejected calls.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
81  
       
• Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration.  
• Copy to dialing screen press to pass the current  
Accessing Call log from The Notifications Area  
1. Locate  
from the Notifications area of the Status  
number to your dialer and then edit the selected number before  
you place your next outbound call.  
bar.  
2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and  
then drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open  
the Notifications panel.  
• Delete press  
to delete the Contacts entry.  
to send the current Contacts entry  
• Send number press  
information to an external recipient.  
3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen.  
• Add to reject list press  
to add the current phone  
This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can  
also choose to access two types of history entry lists  
depending on how they are touched.  
number to an automatic rejection list. Similar to a block list, the  
selected caller will be blocked from making an incoming calls  
to your phone.  
Call logs - Caller Overview  
Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific context  
menu:  
Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the Call options  
screen:  
• Copy to dialing screen to make alterations to the current  
phone number prior to redial.  
• Create contact to save the number if it is not already in your  
Contacts.  
• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your  
Contacts.  
• View contact to view the Contact details for the current entry.  
• Update existing to update an existing Contacts entry with the  
current number.  
• View contact to view the information for the currently stored  
Contacts entry.  
• Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number.  
• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the  
selected entry.  
• Send number to send the current Contacts entry information to  
an external recipient.  
82  
   
• Add to reject list to add the current phone number to an  
automatic rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller  
will be blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.  
• Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list.  
Erasing the Call logs List  
You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current  
entries from the Logs list.  
To clear a single entry from the list:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs tab.  
Altering Numbers from the Logs List  
If you need to make a call from the Logs screen and you  
need to alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the  
appropriate prefix by prepending the number.  
2. Touch and hold an entry and select Delete  
Delete.  
To clear all entries from the list:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Delete.  
3. Tap Select all  
Logs tab.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs tab.  
2. Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific  
.
context menu.  
4. Tap Delete  
Delete to continue with the erasure.  
3. Tap Copy to dialing screen  
4. Edit the number using the on-screen keypad or delete  
digits by pressing to erase the numbers.  
5. Tap once the number has been changed.  
.
– or –  
Tap Cancel to stop the current process.  
Call Functions and Contacts List  
83  
     
Call Duration  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Logs tab.  
2. Press  
and then tap Call duration.  
3. The following times are displayed for Voice and Data:  
• Last call: shows the length of time for the last call.  
• Dialed calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made.  
• Received calls: shows the total length of time for all calls  
received.  
• All calls: shows the total length of time for all calls made and  
received.  
You may reset these times to zero by pressing  
then tapping Reset  
.
Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen  
When you are unable to answer a call for any reason and  
your screen is locked, the number of missed calls are  
displayed on the Lock screen immediately after a call is  
missed.  
1. Press  
(Power/End) to reactivate the screen.  
2. Touch and drag the button (with the number of missed  
calls on it) anywhere on the screen. The Logs tab is  
then displayed.  
84  
       
Section 4: Entering Text  
This section describes how to select the desired text input  
method when entering characters into your device. This  
section also describes the predictive text entry system that  
reduces the amount of key strokes associated with entering  
text.  
The on-screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both  
portrait and landscape mode.  
Selecting the Text Input Method  
The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of  
two locations:  
Your device comes equipped with an orientation detector that  
can tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or  
sideways (Landscape) orientation. This is useful when  
entering text.  
Settings Menu:  
From the Home screen, press  
Settings My device tab) Language and  
input Default and select an input method.  
Text Input field:  
and then tap  
(
My device  
Your device also provides several on-screen keypad text  
entry options to make the task of text entry that much easier.  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single  
motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the  
bottom of the screen to open the Notifications screen.  
Text Input Methods  
There are three text input methods available:  
Google voice typing: provides a voice to text interface.  
Samsung keyboard (default): an on-screen QWERTY  
keyboard that can be used in both portrait and landscape  
orientation.  
2. Tap  
(Select input method) and select an available  
input method.  
Swype: is enabled so as you can enter text as you swipe  
across the on-screen keyboard. Instead of tapping each  
key, use your finger to trace over each letter of a word.  
Entering Text  
85  
                   
When Swype is enabled there can also be normal keyboard  
functionality.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Entering Text Using Swype  
Swype™ is the default text input method that allows you to  
enter a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to  
letter, lifting your finger between words. Swype uses error  
correcting algorithms and a language model to predict the  
next word. Swype also includes a touch predictive text  
system.  
Language and input  
.
2. Tap Default Swype  
.
Swype Text Entry Tips  
You can access the SwypeTips application and watch a video  
or tutorial on using Swype. You can also use the following  
Swype text entry tips.  
The on-screen keyboard options are different between the  
Android keyboard and Swype on-screen input methods.  
Create a squiggle (like an S shape) to create a double letter (such  
as pp in apple).  
Note: During its initial use, you may be prompted by a series of  
Swype Connect set up screens. Follow the initial  
on-screen set up instructions.  
Touch and hold a key to view the punctuation menu then make a  
selection.  
Move your finger or stylus over the apostrophe to enter  
contractions.  
Enabling and Configuring Swype  
If you configure another text input method (Samsung  
keyboard) you must re-enable Swype before using the  
Swype keyboard.  
Double-touch on the word you want to change to correct a  
misspelled word, then touch the delete key to erase one  
character. Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.  
For more detailed information on configuring Swype settings,  
86  
     
Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text  
input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.  
Swype Keyboard Overview  
• Recipients: a field where you can enter the recipients of the  
current message. You can choose from Groups  
,
Favorites,  
Contacts, or Logs  
.
2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one of  
Text Input field: a field where text, number, or other characters  
can be entered.  
the following text mode options:  
Edit  
• ABC  
to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from  
ABC  
• CAPS/ALT key: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes the  
capitalization of the subsequent entered characters. When in  
SYM mode, this key can show additional symbol characters.  
• SWYPE settings: Touch and hold this button to access the  
Swype settings screen.  
the on-screen keyboard.  
123  
+!=  
• SYM (Symbol)  
to enter numbers and symbols from the  
on-screen keyboard.  
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the  
key  
Text Input mode: There are two available modes: 123ABC and  
SYM.  
changes to  
case.  
and all letters that follow are in lower  
123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few  
common punctuation marks. Text mode button indicates SYM  
.
SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers. Text mode  
button indicates 123ABC  
.
Entering Text  
87  
       
Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE  
In 123ABC mode, you can enter only letters and a few  
common punctuation marks from the on-screen keyboard.  
Recipients  
Text input field  
Suggestions  
123  
The text mode key shows  
.
+!=  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text  
input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.  
Edit  
Current  
Mode  
2. Tap  
to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode  
ABC  
(showing letters and numbers on the on-screen keys).  
123  
+!=  
Once in this mode, the text input type shows  
.
CAPS/ALT  
key  
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the  
key  
changes to  
case.  
and all letters that follow are in lower  
Delete  
SWYPE Settings  
3. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form  
Text Input mode  
a word.  
If you make a mistake, tap  
Touch and hold to erase an entire word.  
Send) to deliver the message.  
to erase a single character.  
4. Tap  
(
88  
 
Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE  
By using the on-screen keyboard in portrait mode, some  
symbols are not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys).  
In SYM mode using Swype, you can only enter symbols and  
All lowercase  
Displays when the next character is entered in  
lowercase. Pressing this while in 123SYM mode,  
reveals additional numeric-symbols keys.  
numbers from the on-screen keyboard.  
Once in SYM mode, the text mode key shows  
Edit  
.
Initial Uppercase  
ABC  
Displays when the first character of each word is  
entered as uppercase but all subsequent  
characters are lowercase.  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text  
input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.  
123  
+!=  
2. Tap  
to configure the keyboard for SYM mode.  
Edit  
All Uppercase  
Once in this mode, the text input type shows  
.
ABC  
Displays when all characters will be entered as  
uppercase characters.  
3. Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you  
want to enter.  
2
4. Tap  
to select from additional symbols.  
1
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the  
following letters are lower case. After a word is entered and  
you lift your finger, the cursor automatically adds a space  
after the word.  
For example:  
To enter  
123  
+!=  
2
®: tap  
1
and select the  
®
key.  
Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an  
on-screen popup appears to provide additional word  
choices.  
Entering Text  
89  
   
2. The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung  
Using the Samsung Keyboard  
This QWERTY keyboard can be used to enter text in either a  
Portrait or landscape orientation. The only difference  
between the two orientations are the sizes of the keys.  
keyboard configuration for all subsequent text input.  
Text input field  
Shift key  
From a screen where you enter text, rotate your phone  
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation. The on-screen  
QWERTY keyboard displays.  
The Samsung Keyboard  
This device has a built-in, QWERTY keypad (portrait mode) or  
keyboard (landscape mode). Using the QWERTY keypad/  
keyboard, you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and  
other characters.  
To use the Samsung keyboard you must first configure the  
settings to default to the Samsung keyboard.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings My device tab) Language and  
input Samsung keyboard  
– or –  
and then tap  
Input Mode  
Indicator  
Current Mode  
Input Options  
/Settings  
Send  
Delete  
(
My device  
Default  
.
For more detailed information on configuring Samsung  
From a screen where you can enter text, in a single  
motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the  
bottom of the screen, then select  
method) Samsung keyboard  
(Select input  
.
90  
     
• Optical Reader to the camera and have the built-in Optical  
Reader application recognize text.  
Entering Text using Different Input Options  
Although the default text input method with the Samsung  
keyboard is to use the on-screen keys you have other  
options.  
• Settings to access the Samsung keyboard settings menu.  
• Keyboard alignment to detach the on-screen keyboard so that  
you can manually dock it anywhere on the current text entry  
screen. Selecting the feature again redocks the keyboard into  
its original location using the original size.  
Note: To access settings, touch and hold the Input Methods  
button  
, then tap  
(Settings) then select it from  
the available options.  
Changing the Text Input Mode in Keyboard  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text  
input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.  
1. From within an active message, tap the text input field  
to reveal the on-screen keyboard.  
2. With Samsung keyboard as your text entry method,  
select one of the following text mode options:  
2. Tap  
(Input Methods) to use the default Voice  
typing input method to convert your spoken words to  
• Abc ABC : to use alphabetic characters from the on-screen  
on-screen text.  
– or –  
keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays Sym  
• Symbol/Numeric Sym : to enter numbers by pressing the  
numbers selecting them on the on-screen keyboard. In this  
.
Touch and hold  
methods such as:  
to select from other input  
mode, the text mode button displays ABC  
There are up to 2 available pages of numeric symbols available  
by tapping  
.
• Handwriting to launch an on-screen handwriting area that can  
be used to convert on-screen patterns (text) to text.  
• Clipboard to launch the device’s clipboard area from where  
you can select a current clipboard item to place in your current  
message.  
.
1/2  
Entering Text  
91  
     
Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keyboard  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text  
input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.  
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, tap  
to  
toggle capitalization.  
2. Tap ABC to configure the keyboard for ABC mode.  
All lowercase  
Once in this mode, the text input type shows Sym  
.
Displays when the next character is entered in  
lowercase.  
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the  
key  
changes to  
case.  
and all letters that follow are in lower  
Initial Uppercase  
Displays when the first character of each word is  
entered as uppercase but all subsequent  
characters are lowercase.  
3. Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.  
If you make a mistake, tap  
Touch and hold to erase an entire word.  
Send) to deliver the message.  
to erase a single character.  
All Uppercase  
Displays when all characters will be entered as  
uppercase characters.  
4. Tap  
(
By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the  
following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered,  
the cursor automatically advances to the next space.  
92  
 
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode  
Use the Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols,  
or emoticons. While in this mode, the text mode key  
Using the Google Voice Typing  
This feature uses Google voice recognition to convert your  
spoken words into on-screen text.  
displays  
.
ABC  
You can use your voice to enter text using the Google Voice  
typing feature.  
1. From the keyboard, touch the top of the screen and  
drag it down to display your notification panel.  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text  
input field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. Rotate the  
phone counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if  
desired.  
2. Tap  
(
Select input method) Google voice typing  
.
2. Tap Sym to configure the keyboard for Symbol  
mode. Once in this mode, the text input type shows  
3. At the Listening prompt  
(
Speak now), speak  
clearly and distinctly into the microphone.  
The text is displayed in the message as you are  
speaking.  
ABC  
.
3. Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.  
4. Tap ABC to return to ABC mode.  
To enter symbols:  
For more detailed information on configuring Google Voice  
1. Tap Sym to configure the keyboard for Symbol  
4. Tap  
– or –  
Tap  
(
Done) when you are finished.  
mode.  
2. Tap the appropriate symbol key.  
(
Resume) to resume recognition.  
– or –  
Tap  
button to cycle through additional pages.  
1/2  
Note: The feature works best when you break your message  
The first number on this key indicates which page (1 or 2) of  
additional characters is active.  
down into smaller segments.  
Entering Text  
93  
     
Using Google Voice Typing  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, in a single  
motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the  
bottom of the screen, then select  
(Select input  
method) Google voice typing. The virtual keyboard is  
then removed and all subsequent input to done via the  
microphone as text to speech.  
2. Speak into the device’s microphone and watch your  
text being entered on-screen.  
3. If the text is incorrect, tap DELETE  
.
94  
   
Section 5: Contacts  
This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts  
List. You can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory.  
Contacts List  
Creating a Contact  
Accounts  
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to  
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications  
to synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if  
you want the applications to synchronize automatically. After  
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize,  
indicate which account to synchronize with your Contacts  
list.  
your Contacts List is your device’s built-in memory.  
If existing Google and Corporate email accounts have been  
synchronized to your phone, these will be made available to  
your device during the creation of new entries. These new  
Contacts entries can be assigned or saved to synced  
accounts such as Phone, SIM, Google, or Corporate.  
1. Sign in to your Google account.  
Your device automatically sorts the Contacts entries  
2. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
alphabetically. You can create either a Device  
,
SIM, Samsung  
Settings Accounts tab) and then navigate  
(
account Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync contact.  
,
to the My accounts area.  
– or –  
Important! The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync  
account types are only visible after creating an  
email account of those types on your phone.  
From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab and  
then navigate to the My accounts area.  
Device contacts are stored locally on the device.  
Note: The Accounts area lists those accounts that have been  
added to the device and provides an Add account button  
to quickly and easily add new ones.  
Contacts  
95  
           
Note: If the phone is ever reset to its factory default  
Note: When storing an entry into your micro SIM card, note  
that only the Name, and Number are saved. To save  
additional information for a particular contact, such as  
notes, email, dates, etc., it is important to save that  
Contact into your phone’s onboard memory.  
parameters, contacts stored on the phone can be lost.  
SIM contacts are stored within the micro SIM Card.  
Note: SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for  
an entry.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap to create a contact.  
(Contacts).  
Samsung account contacts are shared with your existing  
Samsung account.  
Note: You can also add a new contact by entering a number  
from the keypad and pressing and then tap  
Add to Contacts Create contact. Continue with step 3.  
Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account  
and can also be imported to your phone after you have created a  
Google Mail account.  
3. Tap a destination type (Device SIM, Samsung account,  
,
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (also known as Work or  
Outlook) contacts are those contacts that are intended to be  
Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync) (depending  
on where you want to save the new contact  
information).  
®
shared with either an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft  
®
Outlook  
.
Add new account lets you create a new account type. Choose  
from Samsung account, Google, or Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync.  
96  
 
4. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this contact  
8. Enter additional information such as: Groups  
,
Ringtone,  
using the displayed keypad.  
Message alert Vibration pattern or tap Add another field  
,
Tap  
prefix, First name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix.  
5. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.  
Selections are: Image Pictures by people Take picture  
or S Memo  
to access additional name entries such as: Name  
to input additional category information.  
• Add another field contains the following options: Phonetic  
name, Organization, Email, IM, Address, Notes, Nickname,  
Website, Internet call, Events, or Relationship.  
,
,
,
.
Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional  
fields and categories.  
Note: The label entries below can change and are dependant  
9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.  
on the selected destination type (ex: the Other and  
Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync  
account destination type).  
– or –  
Tap Cancel to delete the current entry.  
To save a Number from your Keypad:  
6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone field) and  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad.  
3. Tap Add to Contacts Create contact or select the  
(Phone).  
scroll through the list to select a category such as  
Mobile  
Custom, or Callback  
7. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.  
,
Home, Work, Work Fax, Home Fax, Pager, Other,  
.
Contact entry from the on-screen list.  
– or –  
Tap  
on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously  
Press  
and then tap Add to Contacts  
Create  
entered phone number.  
contact or select the Contact entry from the on-screen  
list.  
Tap  
Tap  
to enter an additional phone number  
to remove a previously entered phone number.  
Contacts  
97  
   
If you're updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list  
and proceed to step 5.  
7. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone field) and  
scroll through the list to select a category such as  
Mobile  
Custom, or Callback  
8. Enter additional fields as desired.  
,
Home, Work, Work Fax, Home Fax, Pager, Other,  
4. Tap a destination type (Device SIM, Samsung account,  
,
.
Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync) (depending  
on where you want to save the new contact  
information).  
9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.  
5. Tap the Name and enter a name for this contact using  
the displayed keypad.  
– or –  
Tap Cancel to delete the current entry.  
Tap  
prefix, First name, Middle name, Last name, and Name suffix.  
6. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.  
Selections are: Image Pictures by people Take picture  
or S Memo  
to access additional name entries such as: Name  
Note: For further details about how to enter characters, see  
,
,
,
.
Note: The label entries below can change and are dependant  
on the selected destination type (ex: the Other and  
Custom might not appear with an Exchange ActiveSync  
account destination type).  
98  
Finding a Contact  
Tabs  
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding  
names onto either your SIM card, your phone’s built-in  
memory, or an external location (such as Google, Exchange,  
or T-Mobile Backup). They are all physically separate but are  
used as a single entity, called Contacts.  
Search  
Contacts  
field  
Create  
Contacts  
Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the  
maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may  
differ.  
Tabbed  
Navigation  
Contacts  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Contacts).  
2. Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed.  
– or –  
Tap the Search field and begin entering the entry’s  
name. Matching entries are then displayed. This  
process filters through all of your current account  
Contact entries to only show you the matching entries.  
– or –  
In a single motion, touch and hold the letter tab area  
(on the right) until on-screen letters appear, then scroll  
through the list. You are then taken to that section of  
the Contacts list. Touch the contact entry.  
Contacts  
99  
 
3. Edit the contact information then:  
Editing Contact Information  
Tap Save to complete and store the new entry or  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Tap Cancel to delete the current entry.  
2. Tap a contact name from the list and tap  
(
Edit).  
– or –  
Adding a Number to an Existing Contact  
Select a contact name and press  
Edit  
– or –  
Touch and hold a Contacts entry from the main  
Contacts list and then tap Edit  
and then tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Touch and hold an entry  
and select Edit to reveal  
the Contact entry’s  
.
.
details screen.  
.
3. Tap a phone number  
field and enter a phone  
number.  
Tap  
on the  
QWERTY keyboard to  
remove a previously  
entered phone number.  
Context  
Menu  
Tap  
additional phone number  
Tap  
to enter an  
Contact Details Screen  
to remove a previously entered phone number.  
100  
   
4. Enter additional information such as: Groups  
,
Ringtone  
,
4. Scroll through the available list of existing entries and  
Message alert Vibration pattern or tap Add another field  
,
select the desired target.  
to input additional category information.  
Note: This new phone number is then added as a new number  
• Add another field contains the following options: Phonetic  
name, Organization, Email, IM, Address, Notes, Nickname,  
Website, Internet call, Events, or Relationship.  
to the selected entry.  
5. Tap the label button (to the left of the new phone  
number) and scroll through the list to select a category  
type.  
Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional  
fields and categories.  
5. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.  
6. Tap Save to store and update the entry.  
– or –  
Deleting Contacts  
Tap Cancel to delete the current entry.  
Important! Once Contacts list entries are deleted, they cannot  
Adding a Pause or Wait to an Existing Contact  
be recovered.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and use the  
on-screen keypad to enter a new phone number.  
2. Press and then tap Add 2-sec pause. This feature  
adds an automatic two-second pause.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select  
Delete OK  
.
.
– or –  
Press  
and then tap Add wait. This feature causes  
the phone to require your acceptance before sending  
the next set of entered digits.  
3. Tap Add to Contacts  
Update existing.  
Contacts  
101  
           
• Send message/email: allows you to send a text /picture  
message or an email using your Google account.  
• Contacts to display: allows you to choose to display All  
contacts, those on your Phone, SIM card, Samsung account,  
Gmail, or only display contacts that are part of a Customized  
list.  
Contact List Options  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Press  
. The following options display:  
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.  
• Import/Export: imports or exports contacts to or from the USB  
storage location, SIM card or SD card, you can also send  
namecards via methods such as Bluetooth, ChatON, Email,  
Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Settings: allows you to configure where you save new contacts  
to, or view your service numbers, or send contact information.  
Options include: Only contacts with phones, List by, Display  
contacts by, Service numbers, and Contact sharing settings.  
• Help: provides an on-screen Help file that covers most high  
level topics for Contacts.  
• Merge accounts: allows you to merge all of your current  
Contact entries with either your active Google or Samsung  
account. If several of your contacts are from other external  
sources, this allows you to “back them up” or copy them to  
your Samsung account. Tap OK to continue or Cancel to exit.  
• Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on  
Samsung account, ChatON, Google, LDAP, or Microsoft  
Exchange ActiveSync. This option also allows you to manually  
synchronize all of your current contacts with their respective  
• Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing.  
102  
             
• Add to reject list/ Remove from reject list: allows you to add  
or remove the current Contacts entry to a list of automatically  
rejected incoming phone numbers.  
Contact Menu Options  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu.  
The following options display:  
Note: If an entry does not have a phone number, the reject list  
• Edit: allows you to edit the currently selected Contacts entry.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts  
entry.  
option will not appear.  
• Share namecard via: allows you to send the current Contact  
• Join contact: allows you to link the current contact to another  
current contact. Similar to a “see also” feature. If you can’t  
remember a contact’s information, linking entries can help you  
find the person you are looking for.  
entry’s information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth  
ChatON Dropbox (if enabled), Email (Exchange or Internet),  
Gmail Messaging, or Wi-Fi Direct  
,
,
,
.
• Print contact info: allows you to print selected information on  
a compatible Samsung printer.  
• Share contact via message: allows you to send the current  
entry info via text message.  
• Add shortcut to home: adds a shortcut to the current Contacts  
entry to an available screen location.  
• Add to favorites: allows you to copy the current Contacts entry  
to the list within the Favorites tab.  
• Remove from favorites: allows you to remove the current  
Contacts entry from the Favorites tab.  
• Add to group: allows you to add the current Contacts entry to  
an existing group.  
Contacts  
103  
             
Contact Entry Options  
Joining Contact Information  
1. From the Home screen,  
Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social  
networking logins, and other similar account information. For  
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a  
corporate email account login because they are maintained  
separately and for different groups of people.  
tap  
.
2. Tap an entry to reveal the  
Contact entry’s Overview  
Screen. This screen  
contains Name, contact  
numbers, email, and  
linked contact  
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts. When  
you synchronize your phone with those accounts, each  
account creates a separate contact entry in the Contacts list.  
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email  
account that you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook  
account under her maiden and married name, as well as a  
Video! chat account, when you merge those accounts into  
your Contacts list you can join all of her entries and view the  
information in one record.  
information.  
3. Press  
to reveal the  
context menu specific to  
this entry.  
4. Tap an available option.  
Contact Overview Screen  
Joining contact information makes sending messages easy.  
You can select any account email address or information all  
from one screen, versus searching multiple, individual  
screens to locate the desired account information.  
Next time you synchronize your device with your accounts,  
any updates contacts make to email account names, email  
addresses, etc. automatically update in your contacts list.  
104  
       
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Important! It is the first contact image that is displayed for  
both, and the first contact’s name that is used.  
For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with  
Julie (second entry). Julie seems to disappear and  
only Amy remains. Tap the Amy entry (showing the  
Amy image) to view both.  
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to  
another entry) to reveal the Contact entry’s Overview  
Screen  
.
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name  
or account information.  
5. Tap the main linked contact to view the contact  
information you linked. The contacts and information  
displays with an icon next to the contact name to  
indicate what type of account information is contained  
in the entry.  
3. Press  
and then tap Join contact.  
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to  
link). The second contact is now linked with the first  
and the account information is merged into one screen.  
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but  
displays in one record for easier viewing when you link  
the contacts.  
Contacts  
105  
Unjoining a Contact  
Marking a Contact as Default  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other  
messaging type applications, the application needs to know  
which information is primary (default) in a contact entry list.  
For example, when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have  
three phone records for John Smith, the Voice dialer is  
looking for the “default” number or entry.  
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you  
want to unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for  
entry.  
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name  
The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact  
record to use as the default. This comes in handy when you  
have multiple entries for the same person.  
or account information.  
3. Tap the Connection area.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
– or –  
2. Tap a Contact entry.  
Press  
and then tap Separate contact  
.
3. Press  
and then tap Mark as default. The Mark as  
4. Tap  
next to the entry you want to unjoin and  
default screen displays radio buttons next to the  
contact name, phone number, or other contact  
information.  
select OK. The contacts are “unjoined” or separated  
and no longer display in the merged record screen.  
Both contacts now go back to being separately  
displayed.  
4. Tap the radio button next to the entry information you  
want to be the primary information (such as name,  
phone number, or email) and select Done  
.
106  
 
Sending All Current Namecards  
Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can  
send all of your current entries at once.  
Note: If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an  
entry, assigning one as the default will automatically dial  
that number when the contact is selected for dialing.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Import/Export  
namecard via  
.
Share  
Sending a Namecard  
A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to  
recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment  
using Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message.  
.
3. Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all  
currently displayed Contact entries.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
4. Tap Done and select a delivery method:  
• Bluetooth to transmit the contacts to another Bluetooth-  
compatible device.  
2. Tap a Contact entry.  
3. Press  
a delivery method: Bluetooth  
Email (Exchange or Internet), Gmail  
Direct  
and then tap Share namecard via and select  
ChatON Dropbox (if enabled),  
Messaging, or Wi-Fi  
• ChatON to send the contacts to selected buddies.  
• Dropbox, if activated, is used to upload the entries to your  
remote Dropbox Web storage location.  
,
,
,
.
The Namecard attaches to the selected message type  
and is delivered when you send the message.  
Note: The Web storage Upload feature requires that you be  
logged into your Samsung account prior to upload.  
Note: Email appears as an option only after an Internet or  
• Email to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing email  
(Exchange or Internet).  
Exchange email account has been created.  
• Gmail to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing Internet-  
based email.  
Contacts  
107  
           
• Messaging to attach the contact cards to a new outgoing text  
message.  
Copying Contact Information  
Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card  
• Wi-Fi Direct to transmit the entries to another Wi-Fi Direct  
enabled device.  
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to  
your Contacts list is your phone’s built-in memory. This  
procedure allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone’s  
memory, onto the SIM card.  
Sending a namecard using Bluetooth  
You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. From the Contacts List, press  
and then tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Import/Export  
Export to SIM card.  
2. Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen  
3. Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact  
context menu.  
entries.  
– or –  
3. Tap Share namecard via  
Bluetooth.  
Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check  
mark indicates a selection.  
Important! You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature.  
4. Tap Done. The name and phone number for the  
4. Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name  
selected contact is then copied to the SIM.  
card. Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient.  
108  
       
Copying Contact Information to the microSD  
Card  
This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved  
on the phone’s memory, onto the SIM card.  
Synchronizing Contacts  
Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add  
and manage a new or existing contact from your online or  
remote accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must  
first have an active Google or Microsoft Exchange account  
with current Contact entries, and be signed into your account  
via the phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. From the Contacts List, press  
and then tap  
Import/Export  
Export to SD card.  
With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers,  
email addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with  
your device.  
3. Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings Accounts tab) and then navigate  
(
to the My accounts area.  
2. Select the email account containing the contacts you  
wish to synchronize.  
3. Tap  
within the adjacent account field to reveal the  
account’s synchronization settings screen.  
4. To synchronize only Contacts, toggle the active state of  
the Sync Contacts field. A green check mark indicates  
the feature is enabled.  
Contacts  
109  
   
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take  
several minutes. If after 10-20 minutes, your list has not  
been updated, repeat step 2-3.  
2. Press and then tap Contacts to display. Select any  
of the following to filter according to the selection:  
• All contacts allows you to display all available Contacts.  
• Device lists those Contacts currently found only on your Phone.  
• SIM lists those Contacts currently found only on your SIM card.  
• Samsung account lists those Contacts currently found and  
sync’d within the Samsung account.  
5. Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact  
information.  
Note: Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your  
Gmail and Corporate accounts via the device.  
• Google lists those Contacts currently found within the Google  
account.  
Display Options  
The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose  
which contacts to display. You can also choose to display  
only contacts that have phone numbers.  
• Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync lists those Contacts currently  
found within the Exchange account.  
• Customized list allows you to enable which account  
categories are displayed. For example, on Google contacts, you  
can filter which Contact categories are shown (Friends, Family,  
etc..)  
Note: Once a display filter has been selected, only those  
Contact entries are shown until the All contacts option is  
re-selected.  
110  
   
To add Facebook content to your Contacts list:  
Adding more Contacts via Accounts  
and Sync  
When you synchronize applications such as Facebook,  
Twitter, MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google,  
using the Accounts and sync option synchronizes the data  
from the selected account type with your Contacts list.  
You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as  
pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts  
list. All of their current contact information is then migrated  
over to your phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a  
slightly different name, separate entries are created and can  
later be linked (joined) together into a single entry.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings Accounts tab) and then navigate  
to the My accounts area.  
2. Tap Add account  
and then tap  
(
Important! This process not only synchronizes your contact  
information but also your status, events, and more.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Play Store).  
3. Determine which type of account information you want  
to synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:  
Samsung account, ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Google,  
LDAP, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, or Sync apps with  
2. Search for and select the Facebook app.  
3. When you are prompted to download the Facebook  
application from the Play Store.  
Tap Install  
Accept & download to complete the process.  
Facebook  
.
Tap Open to launch the application.  
4. Tap an account type to add.  
4. Log into your Facebook account:  
Enter your account’s access Email and Password information  
and tap Log in  
5. If prompted, configure any requested optional  
permissions and tap Log in  
5. Follow the prompts. The selected account type  
synchronizes with your Contacts list.  
.
6. After synchronizing accounts you may want to link  
.
Contacts  
111  
           
6. If prompted, select a Contacts Sync option. Choose  
from: Sync all, Sync with existing contacts, or Don’t  
sync.  
Additional Contact Options  
Sending an Email to a Contact  
Note: Contacts must contain and email account and address  
7. Tap Done to complete the login and sync process.  
before you can use the Send email feature.  
To resync Social Network Contacts:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Settings Accounts tab and then navigate to the  
2. Press and then tap Send message/email  
Send  
Accounts area.  
email. Contacts that contain an email address display.  
3. Tap the contact(s) to which you want to send an email.  
A check mark displays next to the selection.  
2. Tap Facebook and toggle the checkmark alongside the  
desired fields.  
3. Choose the parameters to sync (ex: Sync Calendar,  
Sync Contacts, or Sync Gallery) and tap Sync now  
.
Note: The select contact must have an email as part of their  
details screen.  
Note: From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap  
Sync all to resync all accounts.  
4. Tap Done  
.
5. Select an email account type.  
6. Compose the email and tap Send  
.
112  
       
• Contact sharing settings allows you configure how your  
Contacts entries are sent: individually or as a single file  
containing all available entries.  
Export/Import  
Tap Settings to select a share setting.  
Contact List Settings  
From this menu you can determine the default storage  
location for Contacts, display your phone’s primary number,  
and view service numbers listed in your Contact list.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Settings. Configure any of the  
following options:  
Send all namecards allows you to set your Contact sharing  
option to all so that your entire Contacts entries are sent as a  
group and not as multiple single files. If all your entries are  
selected only a single file is sent.  
.
Note: Your destination device must support this feature or no  
entries will be received by the external device.  
• Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those  
contacts containing phone numbers.  
Send individual namecards allows you to set your default to  
send individual contacts one at a time. Even if you select all your  
entries, each is sent individually.  
• List by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted:  
First name or Last name  
.
• Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts  
are listed: First name (ex: Steve Smith) or Last name first  
(Smith, Steve).  
• Service numbers lists the currently available service numbers.  
Contacts  
113  
               
8. From the available list of contacts, tap the contact(s)  
Groups  
you want to add. A check mark displays next to contact  
This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a  
call group. This group can be one of the already present  
groups (Family, Friends, or Work) or a user-created group.  
entry. Then tap Done  
.
– or –  
Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all  
current entries. Then tap Done  
Creating a New Caller Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
(Groups  
tab).  
9. Tap Save to store the newly created group.  
2. Press  
and then tap Create.  
Note: Some externally maintained group types (such as  
Google) can only be managed or updated remotely  
online vs via the device. These external types will not  
allow editing or deleting members locally via the phone.  
3. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter a new group name. For more  
4. Tap Group ringtone and select a ringtone for the group.  
Selections are: Default ringtone, Ringtones (select from  
available ringtones) or Add (to navigate your device and  
select an existing audio file).  
Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller  
Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
5. Tap Message alert and select a message alert ringtone  
to be associated with this group.  
2. Tap a group entry ➔  
(Add group member).  
3. From the available list of contacts, tap the contact(s)  
6. Tap Vibration pattern and select a unique vibration  
pattern either from an available list or Create your own.  
This pattern is then associated with this group.  
7. Tap Add member to add Contacts to the new group.  
you want to add. A check mark displays next to contact  
entry.  
4. Tap Done. The selected contacts are added to the  
group.  
114  
       
Removing an Entry From a Caller Group  
Deleting a Caller Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Press  
3. Select either Select all or tap the desired group.  
4. Tap Delete  
5. Select either the Group only or Group and group  
members  
6. Tap OK  
and then tap Delete groups.  
2. Tap a group entry.  
3. Press  
and then tap Remove member.  
.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this  
group. A check mark displays next to contact entry.  
5. Tap Done.The contacts are removed from the group.  
.
.
Editing a Caller Group  
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as  
part of the selected group.  
Sending a Message to a Group  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Touch and hold a group entry then select Edit group  
3. Make modifications to the Group name Group ringtone  
Message alert Vibration pattern fields, or Add member  
4. Tap Save  
.
2. Tap an existing group, and press  
and then tap  
.
Send message  
.
,
,
.
– or –  
,
Touch and hold a group entry and select Send message  
.
.
3. Select the recipients of the new message (indicated by  
a green check mark). If an entry contains multiple  
phone numbers, each must be selected individually.  
4. Tap Done  
.
5. Type your message, and tap  
(
Send).  
Contacts  
115  
         
The Favorites Tab  
The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have  
been designated as favorite contacts. For more information,  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Tap Favorites tab).  
Adding a contact to your favorites list:  
1. From within the Favorites tab, press  
Add to favorites  
.
(
and select  
.
2. Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts  
entries you wish to assign as favorites.  
3. Tap Done to complete the process.  
116  
     
Section 6: Messages  
This section describes how to send or receive different types  
of messages. It also explains the features and functionality  
associated with messaging.  
Important! During the creation of a text message, adding an  
image, sound file, or video clip automatically  
changes it from a text message (SMS) to a  
multimedia message (MMS).  
Types of Messages  
Your phone provides the following message types:  
Text Messages  
Message Icons on the Status Bar  
Messaging icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of  
the display when new messages are received. For more  
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages  
Email and Gmail Messages  
Google Talk  
Messenger  
Note: The Messaging application can also be accessed by  
ChatON  
pressing  
Messaging).  
and then tapping  
(Apps) ➔  
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive  
text messages to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to  
your service provider’s message service.  
(
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and  
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and  
audio messages) to and from other mobile phones or email  
addresses. To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to  
your service provider’s multimedia message service.  
Messages  
117  
         
4. Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter  
recipient field or and selecting recipients.  
Creating and Sending Messages  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Compose).  
(Messaging) ➔  
5. Tap the Enter message field and use the on-screen  
keypad to enter a message. For more information, refer  
(
2. Tap the Enter recipient field to manually enter a  
recipient.  
– or –  
6. Review your message and tap  
(Send).  
7. If you have more than one recipient, the same text  
message is sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients  
field.  
Tap  
to select from one of the following:  
• Groups: to select a recipient from the Group list.  
• Favorites: to select a recipient from the Favorites list.  
• Contacts: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid  
entries must have a wireless phone number or email address).  
• Logs: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent  
messages.  
Note: If you exit a message before you send it, it will be  
automatically saved as a draft.  
3. If adding a recipient from either Logs, Contacts, or  
Group, tap the contact to place a check mark then tap  
Done. The contact displays in the recipient field.  
Note: Delete any unnecessary members by tapping their  
name/number in the recipient area and selecting Delete  
.
118  
     
• Delete threads: allows you to delete any message thread.  
Select the messages to delete and a green check mark will  
appear next to the message. Tap Delete. For more information,  
Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts  
List  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Contacts).  
2. Locate an entry from the Contacts list.  
3. In a single motion, touch and drag your finger over the  
number by going to the left. This action addresses a  
new text message to the selected recipient.  
• Draft messages: displays the draft messages folder and its  
contents.  
• Locked messages: displays the locked messages folder and  
its contents.  
Message Options  
Options before composing a message  
• Scheduled messages: displays the scheduled messages  
folder and its contents.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Messaging).  
2. Before composing a message, from the main Message  
screen press from the main Messaging screen to  
• Spam messages: displays the spam messages folder and its  
contents.  
display additional messaging options:  
• Search: allows you to search through all of your messages for  
a certain word or string of words. Use the on-screen keypad to  
Text templates: displays your available text message reply  
enter a word or phrase in which to search, then tap  
.
• Settings: allows you to access Messaging settings. For more  
Messages  
119  
                       
3. From the Messaging screen list, touch and hold an  
on-screen message and select an option:  
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the sender to either a new  
or existing Contacts entry.  
Options while in a current message  
1. From the Home screen, tap Messaging).  
(
2. From within an open message, press  
to display  
additional messaging options:  
• Insert smiley: allows you to add insert smiley icons  
images (emoticons).  
• View contact: allows you to view the current entry information  
for the sender.  
• Delete thread: deletes the entire message and its bubbles.  
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to tag a number as spam  
so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam  
folder.  
• Preview (only in MMS): allows you to add preview the  
MMS message prior to delivery.  
• Add text: allows you to add text items from sources  
such as: S Memo, Calendar, Location, Contacts, and  
Text templates.  
• Add to Contacts: allows you to add the sender to either a new  
or existing Contacts entry.  
• View contact: reveals the current Contact’s overview screen.  
• Add slide: converts an SMS message into an MMS  
(Multimedia) message and allows you to attach an existing  
slideshow.  
• Remove slide: allows you to remove a previously attached  
slideshow.  
• Add subject: allows you to enter a subject.  
120  
       
• Duration (5 sec) (only in MMS): allows you to change the  
duration of the image slideshow.  
Translate: launches a Translate popup menu. Here you can  
both assign the sender’s original language and assign a target  
language for the recipient (they will receive your message in the  
designated language).  
• Layout (bottom) (only in MMS): allows you to change the  
layout.  
Enable the translate feature then configure the available options  
• Add recipients: allows you to enter additional recipients to the  
message.  
as desired. Tap OK to store the new settings.  
• Delete message: allows you to erase either select specific  
message bubbles or all current messages bubbles.  
• Scheduled message: allows you to schedule a time for the  
current message to be delivered.  
Adding attachments to a message  
To add an attachment to your message, tap  
and select one of the following options:  
(Attach)  
Images: allows you to tap an existing image from your Pictures  
list to add it to your message.  
• Add to spam numbers: allows you to tag a number as spam  
so that these messages can be directly delivered to your spam  
folder.  
Take a picture: allows you to temporarily exit the message, take  
a photo with phone’s camera, and then add it to your message by  
tapping Save  
Video: allows you to choose an existing video from the Videos list,  
then add it to your message  
.
• Discard: closes the current open message.  
Note: You must be logged into your Samsung account prior to  
.
using the S Translator feature.  
Record video: allows you to temporarily exit the message,  
record a video clip using the phone’s camera, and then add it  
to your message by tapping Save  
.
Messages  
121  
       
Audio: allows you to choose an existing audio file from the  
Audio list, then add it to your message by tapping the circle to  
the right of the audio so that it turns green, then tapping Done  
Record audio: allows you to temporarily exit the message and  
record an audio clip using the phone’s microphone. It is then  
automatically attached to the message.  
Adding Additional Text  
You can copy text such as names, phone numbers, and  
events from your Contacts, Calendar, or a Memo.  
1. While composing a message, press  
.
Add text.  
2. At the Add text screen, select one of the following:  
• S Memo: allows you to insert text from an existing S Memo.  
• Calendar: allows you to add the name, date, and time of a  
calendar event to your message.  
S Memo: allows you to add an S Memo that you have created.  
Calendar: allows you to add an event from your calendar.  
Location: allows you to attach a thumbnail of a map showing  
your location.  
• Location: allows you to add an address and the link to the  
location on Google Maps.  
Contacts: allows you to tap on an existing Address Book entry,  
• Contacts: allows you to add the name and phone number of  
any of your contacts to your message.  
then add it to your message by tapping Done  
.
Text templates: allows you to add pre-defined phrases and  
The information is added to your message.  
122  
 
Message Threads  
Viewing Newly Received Messages  
Sent and received text and  
picture messages are  
grouped into message  
threads. Threaded messages  
allow you to see all the  
messages exchanged (similar  
to a chat program) and  
displays a contact on the  
screen.  
When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by  
Current Recipient  
My Text  
displaying  
within the Notification area at the top left of  
your Home screen.  
To read a message:  
1. Open the Notification Bar and select the message. For  
– or –  
Message threads are listed in  
the order in which they were  
received, with the latest  
message displayed at the  
top.  
From the Home screen, tap  
message to view its contents. The selected message  
displays on the screen.  
then tap the new  
2. Tap  
to play a multimedia message.  
To pause playback of the multimedia message, tap  
.
To reply to a text message:  
3. In a single motion, touch and drag up or down the page  
to scroll through the message (if additional pages were  
added).  
1. From the Home screen,  
Reply Bubble  
Text Message Thread  
tap  
.
2. While the message is  
open, tap the Enter message field and then type your  
reply message.  
Messages  
123  
         
3. Compose your reply.  
To access additional Bubble options:  
Your texts are colored Blue and your caller’s replies are  
Yellow.  
Touch and hold the message bubble within an active  
message conversation to display the following options:  
• Delete message: deletes the currently selected message  
bubble from the thread.  
4. Tap  
– or –  
Press  
(
Send) to deliver your reply.  
and then select one of the available  
• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message  
bubble from the thread.  
• Lock/Unlock message: locks or unlocks the currently selected  
message bubble from being accidentally deleted.  
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message  
bubble to an external recipient.  
To access message thread options:  
From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the  
message to display the following options:  
• View contact: displays the Contact’s Overview page.  
• Add to contact: begins the process of adding the new number  
to your Contacts list.  
• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as  
a single text message within the SIM card.  
• View message details: displays details for the currently  
selected message bubble.  
• Delete thread: deletes the currently selected message thread.  
• Add to spam numbers: adds the current sender to a spam list.  
ny new texts from this sender are automatically blocked.  
Translate: translates the text from the currently selected  
bubble into a desired language.  
124  
         
Deleting a single message bubble  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Deleting Messages  
.
Deleting a single message thread  
2. Open a message to reveal the message string.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
3. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select Delete  
2. Touch and hold a message from the Messages list,  
then select Delete thread  
message  
.
.
4. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit.  
3. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit.  
Deleting multiple message bubbles  
Deleting multiple message threads  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Open a message to reveal the message string.  
3. Press and then tap Delete messages  
4. Place a check mark on the individual bubbles targeted  
for deletion or choose Select all  
5. Tap Delete to erase or Cancel to exit.  
2. Press  
and then tap Delete threads.  
.
3. Tap each message thread you want to delete. A check  
mark displays beside each selected message.  
.
4. Tap Delete  
.
5. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the  
process.  
Messages  
125  
             
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how  
many multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation.  
Message Search  
You can search through your messages by using the  
Message Search feature.  
Text message (SMS) settings  
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Search  
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in  
which to search, then tap  
.
informs you whether or not your message was delivered.  
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the  
messages stored on the SIM card.  
.
.
• Message center: allows you to enter the number of your  
message center where your messages reside while the system  
is attempting to deliver them.  
4. All messages that contain the entered search string  
display.  
Messaging Settings  
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia  
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.  
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text  
messages. Choose from: GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or  
Automatic.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Settings  
.
Multimedia message (MMS) settings  
.
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network  
informs you whether or not your message was delivered.  
The following Messaging settings are available:  
General settings  
• Read reports: when this option is activated, your phone  
receives a request for a read reply along with your message to  
the recipient.  
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is  
reached, rather than overwriting them.  
Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text  
messages are allowed in one conversation.  
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to automatically  
retrieve messages.  
126  
         
• Roaming auto-retrieve: allows the message system to  
automatically retrieve while roaming.  
Push message settings  
• Push messages: allows you to receive push messages from  
the network.  
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode: Free,  
Restricted, or Warning.  
• Service loading: allows you to set the type of service loading  
notification. Choose from: Always, Prompt, or Never.  
Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with  
content belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.  
Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that  
you are creating a multimedia message which does not fit the  
Core MM Content Domain.  
Notification settings  
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your  
status bar.  
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your  
message notifications.  
Free: you may add any content to the message.  
• Vibrate: allows you to configure the vibration mode associated  
with message alerts.  
• MMS alert: alerts you when the messaging modes changes  
from an SMS (text) to MMS (multimedia) mode.  
• Message alert repetition: allows you to set the interval for new  
message alerts. Choose from: Once, Every 2 minutes, or  
Every 10 minutes.  
Display  
• Bubble style: allows you to choose from several bubble styles  
for your messages. Bubbles are the rounded boxes that  
surround each message.  
• Preview message: when enabled, allows you to view a brief  
preview of new message text on the Status bar.  
• Background style: allows you to choose from several  
background styles for your messages.  
• Use the volume key: allows you to change the text size by  
using the up or down volume keys.  
Messages  
127  
Emergency message settings  
Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks  
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked  
numbers.  
• Emergency alerts: allows you to configure emergency alert  
settings. You can enable/disable those alert categories you  
wish to receive. Choose from: Imminent extreme alert,  
Imminent severe alert, and AMBER alerts.  
Emergency Alert Configuration  
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts  
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System (CMAS); which  
may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting  
Network (PLAN). If your wireless provider has chosen to  
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the  
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's  
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be  
available. For more information, please contact your wireless  
provider.  
Note: The Presidential alert can not be disabled.  
• Emergency notification preview: allows you to play a sample  
emergency alert tone. Tap Stop to cancel the playback.  
Signature settings  
• Add signature: when enabled, this feature allows you to create  
a signature at the end of your outgoing text messages.  
• Signature text: allows you to enter a desired signature for your  
message.  
Emergency Alerts allows customers to receive  
geographically-targeted messages. Alert messages are  
provided by the US Department of Homeland Security and  
will alert customers of imminent threats to their safety within  
their area. There is no charge for receiving an Emergency  
Alert message.  
Spam message settings  
• Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure  
available spam settings such as:  
Add to spam numbers: allows you to manually enter and  
assign a phone number as being sent from a spam source.  
Add to spam phrases: allows you to assign a specific text  
phrase as belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.  
128  
                                   
There are three types of Emergency Alerts:  
Assigning Messages as Spam  
You can now assign either a phone number as spam or use a  
key term or phrase. Any message assigned as spam is  
automatically placed with your Spam messages folder.  
Alerts issued by the President  
Alerts involving imminent threats to safety of life  
AMBER Alerts (missing child alert)  
To assign a phone number from Messages list as spam:  
Customers may choose not to receive Extreme Alerts, Severe  
Alerts, and AMBER Alerts.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Touch and hold a message from a phone number.  
Important! Alerts issued by the President can not be disabled.  
3. Select Add to spam numbers and tap OK  
.
To disable Extreme, Severe, and AMBER Alerts:  
To assign a phone number manually as spam:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Settings  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Settings  
.
.
.
3. Scroll to the bottom and select Emergency alerts. All  
alerts are enabled by default (check mark showing).  
4. Tap on an alert option to disable the alert and remove  
the check mark.  
3. Locate and activate the Spam settings option.  
• Spam settings: when enabled, allows you to configure  
available spam settings such as:  
4. Tap Add to spam numbers  
This function allows you to manually enter and assign a phone  
number as being sent from a spam source.  
(Add).  
Messages  
129  
               
5. Tap the Number field to manually enter phone number.  
4. Tap Add to spam phrases  
This function allows you to assign a specific text phrase as  
belonging to a spam message. Ex: Dear friend.  
(Add).  
– or –  
Tap  
to select from either your existing Logs or  
5. Enter a term or word into the field.  
Contacts.  
– or –  
Note: The term is case sensitive. Ex: “Act Now” is not the  
Tap Match criteria and select a parameter that must  
match for the spam action to take effect. Choose from:  
Same as, Starts with (ex: 800 or 888), Ends with, or  
includes.  
same as “act now”.  
6. Tap Save  
.
To register unknown numbers as spam:  
Some incoming messages might not be associated with  
either a phone number or email address. These incoming  
messages contain no information as their info is blocked by  
the sender.  
6. Tap Save  
.
To register text phrases as spam:  
Some incoming messages might not be associated with a  
phone number but rather an email address. In these cases,  
the only way to block those messages, would be assign a  
key used term or phrase to activate the Spam block. Ex:  
“Dear friend”, “Stock Alert”, or “Act Now”.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press and then tap Settings  
.
.
3. Locate and activate the Spam settings option.  
4. Tap Block unknown senders. A green check mark  
indicates the feature is active.  
.
.
• Block unknown senders: when active, automatically blocks  
incoming messages from unknown sources or blocked  
numbers.  
3. Locate and activate the Spam settings option.  
130  
             
If an incoming message is designated in coming from an  
unknown sender, it is automatically assigned as spam and is  
now located in your Spam folder.  
To create your own text template:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. From the Messaging list, press  
.
and then tap  
Accessing Your Spam Folder  
Text templates  
.
Any message assigned as spam is automatically placed with  
your Spam messages folder.  
3. Tap Create text template).  
(
4. Enter a new text string and tap Save  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
Using Email  
2. Press and then tap Spam messages  
.
Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create  
email using several email services. You can also receive text  
message alerts when you receive an important email. Your  
phone’s Email application lets you access and manage  
multiple email accounts simultaneously in one convenient  
location.  
Text Templates  
This screen displays your available text message reply  
templates. This is a readily accessible list of both default and  
user-defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply  
to incoming messages.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
There are currently three main types of email accounts on  
your phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..),  
and Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook®).  
2. From the Messaging list, press  
and then tap  
Text templates  
.
To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet  
Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device  
to access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private  
Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP  
account.  
3. Tap a message to immediately insert it into your  
current message conversation.  
Messages  
131  
                     
IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is  
frequently used in large networks and commercial settings.  
IMAP4 is the current standard.  
Creating an Internet Email Account  
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps) ➔  
Email).  
2. If you already have other email account setup:  
(
(
POP3 (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most  
ISPs (Internet service providers) and common among consumer  
applications. POP3 is the current standard.  
Open an existing email account, press  
Settings Add account).  
and then tap  
(
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync - This protocol is frequently  
used with a large corporate email server system and provides  
access to email, contact, and calendar synchronization.  
Account name  
Access available  
accounts and  
folders  
Email functions  
– or –  
Enter your Email address and Password information.  
• Email address: your Internet email address.  
• Password: typically your network access password  
(case-sensitive).  
132  
   
3. Tap Show password to display the password as you  
6. At the Set up email screen, name the account and enter  
enter it in the associated field.  
a screen name to identify yourself on this account.  
Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings  
manually (POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and  
enter the information specific to your email provider.  
The unique account name is used to differentiate this account  
from other email accounts accessed by your device.  
7. Tap Done to store the new account.  
Tap Send email from this account by default to assign this  
email account as your default account for all outgoing emails.  
Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You can  
also view Personal information for this account, Receipts (if  
you setup the account to return receipts), Travel information,  
and more (if available).  
4. Tap Next  
.
5. At the Account options screen, select the frequency  
Opening an Email  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
which the device should check for new email on the  
(Email).  
server and tap Next  
.
2. Tap  
(account name field upper-left) to open  
Important! The Sync Email feature must be enabled to allow  
synching between your device and the remote  
server.  
the complete email account list page.  
Selecting Combined view allows you to view all the emails for  
your current accounts, managed by the application, to be listed  
on a single screen.  
Tap the Notify me when email arrives field to receive new  
email notifications.  
3. Select an email account and tap an email message.  
Tap the Automatically download attachments when  
connected to Wi-Fi field to assist with faster access to large  
email attachments when using Wi-Fi.  
Messages  
133  
 
7. Tap the email text field and compose your email  
Refreshing Email messages  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Select an email account.  
message.  
(Email).  
To add an attachment (such as image, video, audio, etc..),  
tap Attach (from the top of the screen) and make a  
category selection.  
If you are already in an email account, tap the account name  
field (upper-left) to open the complete email account list page.  
Select an available email account.  
Tap the file you wish to attach.  
Tap to delete the attached file.  
3. Tap  
(Refresh).  
Composing Email  
Note: If you attach an image to your email, you have the option  
to resize it prior to delivery. Choose from: Original,  
Large (70%), Medium (30%), or Small (10%). Once  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Email).  
2. Tap  
the complete email account list page.  
3. Tap Inbox Compose).  
4. Enter the recipient’s email address in the To field.  
(account name field upper-left) to open  
chosen, tap either Always or Just once  
.
(
8. Tap Save) to store a draft of the current email  
(
on your device so that you can come back later and  
continue the email.  
If you are sending the email message to several recipients,  
separate the email addresses with a comma. You can add as  
many message recipients as you want.  
9. Tap  
(Delete) to discard the current email.  
10. Once complete, tap  
(
Send).  
5. Tap Add Cc/Bcc to add additional carbon copy and blind  
copy recipients.  
Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.  
Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.  
6. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.  
134  
     
• Signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the  
bottom of all outgoing emails.  
Configuring Email Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Select an account.  
(
Email).  
In a single motion touch and slide the Signature slider to the  
right to turn it on.  
3. Press  
and then tap Settings  
<Account>  
.
Tap the Signature field, change the current text, and tap OK to  
save the new signature.  
4. Alter any of the following settings:  
• Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to  
appear within the Notifications area of the status bar when a  
new email (Gmail, etc..) is received.  
• Default account: Assign this account as the default email  
account used for outgoing messages.  
• Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email  
message is received.  
• Vibrate: Activates a vibration when a new email message is  
received.  
• Sync Email: enables automatic email synching between your  
device and the remote server.  
• Sync schedule: allows you to control the email sync schedule  
on both Peak and Off-Peak times.  
• Size to retrieve emails: configures the incoming email size  
allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without  
user interaction. Emails with attachments larger than  
configured will have to be retrieved manually.  
Messages  
135  
   
5. Tap the More settings field to access additional options:  
• Account name: displays your uniquely created account display  
name.  
• Auto resend times: enables the device to resend an outgoing  
email a specified number of times if delivery fails.  
• Security options: allows you to enable several security options  
such as: Encrypt all, Sign all, Create keys, Private keys, Public  
keys, and Set default key. These security policies could restrict  
some functions from corporate servers.  
Your name: displays the name used in the From field of your  
outgoing email messages.  
• Always Cc/Bcc myself allows you to include your own email  
address in either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always  
receive a copy of outgoing emails.  
Security policy list: lists the current email’s security policy.  
These policies could restrict some functions from corporate  
servers.  
• Forward with attachments: Lets you include attachments  
when forwarding an email.  
• Incoming settings: Lets you specify incoming email settings,  
such as User name, Password, IMAP server, Security type,  
Port, and IMAP path prefix.  
• Recent messages: adjusts the number of on-screen  
messages shown in the current category list at any one time.  
• Show images: allows you to view embedded images located  
within the body of the currently displayed email.  
• Outgoing settings: Lets you specify outgoing email settings,  
such as SMTP server, Security type, Port, Require sign-in, User  
name, or Password.  
• Number of emails to load: allows you to select the number of  
on-screen emails to keep loaded on the screen by default.  
• Auto download attachments: allows the device to  
automatically download email attachments when an active  
Wi-Fi connection is detected. This process speeds up the  
process of downloading an emails attachments for offline  
review by not using a 3G or 4G network connection.  
Note: Some the above options may not be displayed when  
using some Internet account types.  
136  
 
Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)  
Note: If selected, the Manual setup button changes to read  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync. If activated, skip to  
step 6.  
Your phone also provides access to your company’s Outlook  
Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft  
Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email  
application to wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts,  
and Calendar information directly with your company’s  
Exchange server.  
5. Tap Next. Consult your Network or IT Administrator for  
further details and support.  
6. Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (from the add new  
email account screen).  
Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Email).  
Note: If prompted with an on-screen notification that the  
connection that the “Setup could not finish”, tap  
Edit details to continue with a manual update of  
necessary information.  
2. If you already have other email account setup:  
Open an existing email account, press and then tap  
Settings Add account).  
– or –  
(
Enter your Email address and Password information.  
7. When prompted to provide additional detailed  
information within the Exchange server settings  
screen, enter an updated Domain, and confirm your  
user name and Password information.  
• Email address: your Outlook work email address.  
• Password: typically your network access password  
(case-sensitive).  
3. Tap Show password to display the password as you  
enter it in the associated field.  
4. Tap Send email from this account by default, to make  
this your default email account for outbound emails.  
Messages  
137  
     
Important! Remember to manually place the cursor in the  
Important! If your Exchange server requires this feature,  
leaving this field unchecked can prevent  
connection.  
correct spot and enter a Domain name before the  
[Domain]\[user name]” entry. Most servers only  
provide a username.  
9. Consult your IT Administrator if it is necessary to  
enable the Use client certification option.  
8. Update or re-enter your Exchange server information  
within the appropriate field. This field can often be  
populated with incorrect or out of date information  
provided by your server.  
10. With the new server information entered, tap Next  
.
11. Read the on-screen Activation disclaimer and, when  
prompted, tap OK. The device then verifies your  
incoming server settings.  
• Exchange Server: your exchange server remote email  
address. Typically starts with mail.XXX.com. Obtain this  
information from your company network administrator.  
12. If prompted, read the Remote security administration  
information and tap OK to accept the service and  
continue.  
Important! Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess  
13. Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and  
tap Next. It may take a few seconds for the next screen  
to load.  
based on returned information.  
If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the Use secure  
connection (SSL) field to place a check mark in the box and  
activate this additional level. Most often, this option should be  
enabled.  
Enabling the Automatically download attachments when  
connected to Wi-Fi option decreases the wait time to access  
large email attachments.  
138  
14. If prompted, read the Activate device administrator?  
screen and tap Activate to complete the email setup  
process.  
Opening an Exchange Email  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Email).  
2. Tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the  
complete email account list page.  
Note: This process can take a few minutes. If the previous  
setup screen re-appears, ignore it and do not alter any  
fields during this process.  
3. Select an exchange email account and tap an email  
message.  
Refreshing Exchange Email  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
15. Identify your new work email account with a unique  
(Email).  
name (Ex: Work), then tap Done  
.
2. Select an email account.  
If you are already in an email account, tap the account name  
field (upper-left) to open the complete email account list page.  
Select an available email account.  
3. Tap  
(Refresh).  
Composing Exchange Email  
Messages  
139  
     
• Vibrate: Activates a vibration when a new email message is  
received.  
Deleting an Exchange Email Message  
Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and  
select Delete from the on-screen context menu.  
– or –  
• Sync Email: enables automatic email synching between your  
device and the remote server.  
• Sync schedule: allows you to control the email sync schedule  
on both Peak and Off-Peak times.  
With the email message displayed, tap  
Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings  
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap  
(Delete).  
• Period to sync email to assign the sync range for your  
incoming and outgoing email messages between your phone  
and your external exchange server. How many days worth of  
email messages should the phone and server synchronize.  
Settings and then navigate to the Accounts area.  
2. Tap the Microsoft Exchange account and Settings  
<
Exchange email account>  
.
Choose from: Automatic, All, 1 day  
,
3 days, 1 week,  
– or –  
2 weeks, or 1 month  
.
From the Home screen, tap  
select an account, and press  
(
Email),  
• Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size  
allowed to pass through to your phone automatically without  
user interaction. Emails with attachments larger than  
configured will have to be retrieved manually.  
and then tap  
Settings  
<Account>.  
3. Alter any of the following settings:  
• Signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the  
bottom of all outgoing emails.  
• Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to  
appear within the Notifications area of the status bar when a  
new email is received.  
In a single motion touch and slide to the right to turn it on.  
Tap the Signature field, change the current text, and tap Done  
to save the new signature.  
• Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email  
message is received.  
140  
     
• Default account: Assign this account as the default email  
account used for outgoing messages.  
• Auto resend times enables the phone to resend an outgoing  
email a specified number of times if delivery fails.  
The default is 3 auto resends.  
• Out of office settings allows you to both activate/deactivate  
your email’s out of office settings, and configure both the start/  
end dates and your outgoing message.  
• Folder sync settings allows you to configure the sync settings  
for various folders such as Inbox, Drafts, Outbox, etc..  
• Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to  
4. Tap the More settings field to access additional options:  
• Account name displays the name used by the device to track  
the account.  
sync calendar events. Choose from: 2 weeks, 1 month  
,
3 months 6 months, or All calendar  
,
.
• Always Cc/Bcc myself allows you to include your own email  
address in either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always  
receive a copy of outgoing emails.  
• Empty server trash: allows you to delete your email account’s  
trash bin remotely.  
• Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between your device  
and the remote exchange server.  
• Forward with attachments: Lets you include attachments  
when forwarding an email.  
• Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries  
between your device and the remote exchange server.  
• Sync Task synchronizes your exchange tasks entries between  
your device and the remote exchange server.  
• Show images: allows you to view embedded images located  
within the body of the currently displayed email.  
• Auto download attachments: allows the device to  
automatically download email attachments when an active  
Wi-Fi connection is detected. This process speeds up the  
process of downloading an emails attachments for offline  
review by not using a 3G or 4G/LTE network connection.  
Messages  
141  
     
• In case of sync conflict allows you to assign the master  
source on emails. If there is a conflict with the current email  
sync you can assign the server as the main source for all  
emails (Server has priority) or assign the phone to be the main  
source and update the server accordingly (Device has  
priority).  
Using Google Mail  
Google Mail (Gmail) is Google’s web-based email. When you  
first setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the  
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized  
with your Gmail account.  
Signing into Google Mail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
• Security options: allows you to enable several security options  
such as: Encryption, Encryption algorithm, Sign, Sign  
algorithms, Email certificates, and Security policy list. These  
security policies could restrict some functions from corporate  
servers.  
(Gmail).  
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to  
access features such as Google Mail and Play Store.  
2. Tap New if you do not have a Google account.  
Security policy list: lists the current email’s security policy.  
These policies could restrict some functions from corporate  
servers.  
– or –  
Tap Existing if you have a Google account.  
The Inbox loads conversations and email.  
• Exchange server settings provides access to the  
Opening Gmail  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Domain\user name, Password, and Exchange server settings.  
(Gmail).  
5. Press  
to return to the previous page.  
2. Tap an existing email message.  
142  
             
4. Press  
blind copy.  
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or  
Refreshing Gmail Mail  
From within the Gmail message list, tap  
(Refresh)  
5. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.  
6. Tap the Compose email field and begin composing your  
message.  
at the bottom of the screen to refresh the screen, send  
and receive new emails, and synchronize your email  
with the Gmail account.  
7. Once complete tap  
(Send).  
Other Gmail Options  
Viewing a Gmail Message  
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view the  
following options located at the bottom of the screen:  
1. From the main Gmail screen, tap  
(Labels) at the  
bottom of the screen to set up and manage Labels for  
your Gmail messages.  
• Archive  
• Delete  
• Labels  
: archives the selected Email.  
2. From the main Gmail screen, tap  
(Search) at the  
bottom of the screen to search through your Gmail  
messages.  
: deletes the currently selected Email.  
: assigns a label to the current Email.  
Composing a Gmail Message  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
• Mark as Unread  
and returns you to the Google Mail Inbox.  
: tags the current message as unread  
(Gmail).  
2. From the Gmail Inbox, tap  
(Compose) at the  
• Newer: swiping to the right displays newer Emails.  
• Older: swiping to the left displays older Emails.  
bottom of the screen to create a new message.  
3. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.  
Tip: Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a  
comma.  
Messages  
143  
         
2. Press  
options:  
to select one of the following additional  
Google Talk  
Google Talk™ is a free Windows and web-based application  
for instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs  
are automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail  
account. This allows you to search a chat log and store them  
in your Gmail accounts.  
• Mark important/Mark not important: assigns the current  
email an important status.  
• Mute: mutes the conversation.  
• Report spam: reports the Email message as spam.  
• Report phishing: reports the Email message as a phishing  
email attempt.  
Note: Before using this application, you must first have an  
active Gmail account available and be currently logged  
in.  
• Settings: allows you to configure the General, or Notification  
settings.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Talk).  
• Send feedback: sends feedback to Google.  
• Help: launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help  
information.  
Note: If you are not already logged into Google, refer to the  
instructions for signing in on page 142.  
Creating an Additional Gmail Account  
2. Begin using Google Talk.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Gmail).  
2. Press  
and then tap Settings  
ADD ACCOUNT and  
Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This  
follow the same steps as referenced in the previous  
could take up to 5 minutes to complete.  
144  
     
Registering with the Service  
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung  
account.  
ChatON  
Provides a global mobile communication service where you  
can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat. Share  
things such as pictures, videos, animation messages  
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location  
information.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
ChatON).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
3. Tap Sign in to log into your Samsung account  
– or –  
Important! The Samsung account manages the access  
information (username/password) to several  
applications, such as Samsung Link, ChatON, and  
Media Hub.  
Tap Skip to continue without logging in.  
4. Read the on-screen notification about data charges  
and tap OK  
.
5. Select a country code, enter your current phone  
For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com  
.
number to register with the service, and tap Done  
.
6. Select either the Terms and conditions or Privacy policy  
and read the on-screen information. Tap Accept to  
continue.  
7. Choose to receive the verification code via either SMS  
(text message) or Voice (answering machine call) to  
your device.  
Messages  
145  
       
Note: If you opt to receive the verification code via SMS, this  
information is sent directly to your device. Once  
Note: For more information, press  
General Help  
(Settings) and tap  
.
received, the Verification field is automatically filled in.  
Using ChatON for Chatting  
8. Enter your real name and tap  
Adding Your First Chat On Buddy  
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps) ➔  
ChatON).  
Add buddy) and choose a search method.  
(OK).  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(ChatON).  
(
2. Tap the Buddies tab and select a buddy to initiate your  
(
chat.  
2. Tap  
(
3. Enter your message using the on-screen text entry  
• Phone number  
number.  
: to search by Country code and phone  
method.  
4. Tap Send  
.
• Search by ID  
account ID.  
: to search by using a known samsung  
To reply to a ChatON message:  
1. While the chat session is active, tap the Enter message  
field and then type your reply message.  
2. Compose your reply.  
3. Select a country code if it differs from yours.  
4. Enter the information and tap Search). Once the  
(
recipient is matched, their entry appears in the Results  
area.  
Your texts are colored Blue and your buddy’s messages  
are white.  
5. Tap  
(Add) and confirm your new buddy appears  
3. Tap Send to deliver your reply.  
in the Buddies tab.  
146  
       
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google+.  
Deleting a single message bubble  
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps) ➔  
ChatON).  
(
5. Visit www.google.com/mobile/+/ for more information.  
(
Messenger  
2. Launch a chat session to reveal the message string.  
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into  
a simple group conversation. When you get a new  
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your  
device.  
3. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select Delete  
.
Google +  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+.  
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Messenger).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
– or –  
1. Sign on to your Google account. For more information,  
From the Google+ application, select Messenger  
.
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Google+).  
(Apps) ➔  
Google+.  
– or –  
(
3. Select the account you want to use to sign in to  
Tap Add account to create another account.  
Google+.  
– or –  
Tap Add account to create another account.  
Messages  
147  
         
4. When prompted, configure the Sync contacts  
parameter (Sync contacts or Don’t sync) and tap  
Continue  
5. When prompted, configure the Instant Upload  
parameters as desired and tap DONE  
6. Follow any on-screen setup instructions.  
.
.
7. At the Messenger screen, tap  
to start a new  
message.  
8. In the upper text field, enter a name, email address, or  
circle.  
9. In the bottom message field, enter a message then tap  
(Send).  
10. From the Messenger screen, tap Learn more for more  
detailed information.  
148  
Section 7: Multimedia  
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of  
your device, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player,  
Samsung Link, and how to manage your photos, images and  
sounds.  
Assigning the Default Storage  
Location  
Important! Too many users can overlook this storage location  
until something goes wrong. It is recommended  
that you verify this location or change it before  
initiating the use of the camera or camcorder  
features.  
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the  
built-in camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in  
JPEG format.  
Important! Do not take photos of people without their  
permission.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Camera).  
2. Press  
and scroll up to the Storage entry.  
(Apps) ➔  
Do not take photos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
Do not take photos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
(
and then tap Settings  
(Settings)  
3. Tap this entry and select the desired default storage  
location for newly taken pictures or videos. Choose  
Note: An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot  
from: Device or Memory card  
.
video since there is already built-in storage.  
Note: It is recommended that you set the option to Memory  
card  
.
4. Press  
to return to the Home screen.  
Multimedia  
149  
           
3. Before you take a picture, use the Up and Down Volume  
keys to zoom in or out. You can magnify the picture up  
to x4 (400 percent).  
Using the Camera  
Taking Photos  
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as  
simple as choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then  
pressing the camera key.  
– or –  
Pinch the screen to zoom out or pinch outwards to  
zoom in.  
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright  
4. If desired, before taking the photo, you can tap  
on-screen icons to access various camera options and  
settings.  
conditions, shadows may appear on the photo.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Camera).  
(Apps) ➔  
5. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a  
desired area of interest.  
(
2. Using the device’s main display screen as a viewfinder,  
6. Tap  
(Camera) until the shutter sounds. (The picture  
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.  
is automatically stored within your designated storage  
location (page 149). If no microSD is installed, all  
Note: On your initial activation of the camera, firmware  
configuration can take up to 1 minute. This is a one time  
process.  
150  
       
Camera Options  
Note: Touch and hold  
to take a burst shot. These are  
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the  
screen.  
saved using a Fine image quality.  
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap the Mode button  
MODE  
to change the mode to one of the following:  
Self-portrait  
Camera mode  
Dual Camera  
Battery  
Charge  
Auto: Use this mode to automatically adjust the exposure, color,  
and brightness settings. This mode allows single image shots or  
burst shots.  
Quick Settings  
Beauty face: Use this to take photos with lightened faces for  
gentler images.  
Storage  
Best photo: Use this to take multiple photos in a short time,  
and then choose the best photos among them. Press the  
Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens, tap  
and hold thumbnails of photos to save, and then tap Done.  
Best face: Use this to take multiple group shots at the same  
time and combine them to create the best possible image. Press  
the Shutter button to take multiple photos. When Gallery opens,  
tap the yellow frame on each face, and choose the best  
individual face for the subject. After choosing a pose for each  
individual, tap Done to merge the images into a single photo,  
and tap Save.  
Take  
Picture  
Image viewer  
Viewfinder  
Effects  
Record video  
button  
Mode (Change)  
Multimedia  
151  
       
Sound & shot: Use this mode to enrich pictures by adding  
background sounds for a few seconds. The background sound  
is recorded for up to 9 seconds after taking the photo.  
Drama: Use this to take a series of photos of a moving object  
and then merge them together into one image.  
Animated photo: Use this to create a picture in which a few  
selected static objects move by animating objects detected by  
the device.  
2. From the top of the camera, the following shortcuts are  
available for the camera:  
Focusarea:displaystheareaoftheimageusedasthe  
main focus area. If the image is too close, the square  
will turn red.  
Self portrait: allows you to set the front camera so  
you can take pictures of yourself.  
Rich tone (HDR): Use this to take photos with richer colors and  
contrasts by merging images taken at different exposure levels.  
Eraser: Saves the best of 5 taken pictures and removes any  
passers by.  
Front Camera/Dual Camera: allows you to activate  
both the front and rear cameras simultaneously. For  
Panorama: Use this to take wide panoramic photos. Press the  
Shutter button to take a photo, and then move the camera in  
any direction. When the blue frame aligns with the preview  
screen, the camera automatically takes another shot in the  
panoramic sequence. To stop shooting, press the Shutter button  
again.  
Quick Settings: activates the Quick Settings menu  
bar from where you can select several additional  
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image  
viewer and the various viewing options for a  
selected picture. The last picture you took, will be  
displayed as a thumbnail in the Image viewer icon.  
Sports: Use this to take fast action photos.  
Night: Use this to take brighter, clearer pictures in low light  
settings without the use of the flash.  
152  
 
Quick Settings  
Effects/Downloads: provides access to pre-installed  
and downloaded effects. Default effects include:  
Noeffect,Vignette,Grey-scale,Sepia,Vintage,Faded  
color, Turquoise, Tint, Cartoon, Moody, Rugged, Oil  
pastel, and Fisheye.  
Tap  
at the top of the display to quickly change Camera  
settings. Not all of the following options are available in both  
still camera and video camera modes. The available options  
vary by mode.  
Camera settings  
:
configure Camera settings.  
Camcorder button: shoots a video when pressed.  
Flash activate or deactivate the flash.  
:
Night detection use this activate/deactivate night  
detection.  
:
Camera button: takes a photo when pressed in  
Camera mode.  
Voice control  
to take photos.  
:
activate or deactivate the voice control  
Mode button: allows you to select from different  
camera modes.  
MODE  
Recording mode select a resolution for videos.  
:
Choose from: Normal, Limit for MMS, Slow motion, or  
Fast motion.  
Storage location/Connection Status: indicates the  
device is connected to an adapter and the current  
storage location for images (Phone or Memory card)  
on the device.  
Share functions activate or deactivate the sharing  
:
options. Choose from Off, Share Shot, Buddy photo  
share, ChatON phot share, or Remote viewfinder.  
Multimedia  
153  
     
To resize the front camera image:  
Share shot - Shooting mode: lists the current  
shooting modes available from with the Share  
Shot mode. Choose from Easy connect, Wi-Fi  
Direct, or Cancel.  
Touch and hold the mini picture frame until the resize  
handles appear, then drag a corner to enlarge the  
image.  
To reposition the front camera image:  
Quick Settings: hide Quick settings.  
Touch and hold the mini picture frame to detach it and  
then place it in a desired location.  
Taking Dual Camera Photos  
With the Dual Camera feature, you can take a picture with  
both the front and rear cameras at the same time.  
Camera and Camcorder Settings  
This section describes the different settings that you can  
configure on your camera. Not all of the following options are  
available in both still camera and video camera modes. The  
available options vary by mode.  
To take a Dual Camera picture:  
1. From the camera viewfinder, tap  
(Dual Camera)  
located at the top left side of the screen. The camera  
viewfinder displays an image from the front-facing  
camera within a mini picture frame on top of the main  
image displayed from the rear-facing camera.  
1. From the viewfinder, tap  
Camera Settings).  
(Quick Settings) ➔  
(
2. Tap  
(Camera) until the shutter sounds.  
154  
             
2. The follow settings are located under the Camera,  
Camcorder, and General tabs. The settings that are  
displayed will depend on what camera mode you are  
in.  
• Auto night detection: activates or deactivates the night  
detection feature.  
• Save as: allows you to assign rich tone usage to an image.  
Camcorder  
:
Camera  
:
• Video size: Select a resolution for videos. Use higher resolution  
for higher quality. Higher resolution videos take up more  
memory.  
• Photo size: Select a resolution for photos. Use higher  
resolution for higher quality. Higher resolution photos take up  
more memory.  
• Video stabilization: Activate or deactivate Optical Image  
Stabilization.  
• Burst shot: allows several photographs to be captured in quick  
succession by touching and holding the Camera button.  
• Face detection: allows you to adjust the camera focus based  
on face detection technology.  
Settings  
:
• GPS tag: attach a GPS location tag to the photo. To improve  
GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may  
be obstructed, such as between buildings or in low-lying areas,  
or in poor weather conditions. Your location may appear on  
your photos when you upload them to the Internet.  
To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting.  
• Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or  
meters the light source: Center-weighted, Matrix, or Spot.  
• ISO: determines how sensitive the light meter is on your digital  
camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800. Use a  
lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light, a  
higher ISO number to take photos with less light, or Auto to let  
the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.  
• Anti-Shake: compensates for camera movement.  
• Review: set this option if you want to view each picture after  
you take it. Select a time value.  
• Volume key: assigns a function to the volume key. Choose  
from The zoom key, The camera key, or The record key.  
Multimedia  
155  
• Timer: Use this for delayed-time shots. You can set the timer to  
Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, or 10 sec.  
• Shutter sound: Turn the shutter sound on or off.  
• Reset: Reset the camera settings.  
• White balance: Select an appropriate white balance, so  
images have a true-to-life color range. The settings are  
designed for specific lighting situations. These settings are  
similar to the heat range for white-balance exposure in  
professional cameras.  
Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options  
After you take a photo or record a video, you can access  
various options.  
Photo viewing options  
1. Tap a thumbnail to view the picture.  
• Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level by  
moving the slider.  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in  
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to  
display them.  
• Guidelines: Display viewfinder guides to help composition  
when selecting subjects.  
• Flash: activate or deactivate the flash.  
2. The following options are available at the top of the  
• Voice control: activates/deactivates voice control feature that  
allows you to verbally take a photo.  
screen:  
• Share via  
: allows you to share the picture via ChatON,  
• Contextual filename: allows you to have your location added  
as part of the filename. You must first activate GPS tag  
described above.  
Group Play, Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Flipboard, Gmail,  
Google+, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, and Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Edit  
: allows you to edit the current image. Launches the  
• Save as flipped: when set to On, this option allows you to take  
and save a mirror-image video when using self-recording  
mode.  
• Delete  
: allows you to delete the current picture.  
• Storage: Select the memory location for storage.  
156  
     
3. Press  
for additional options such as:  
Crop: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the  
current picture. Tap Done to update the image with the new  
dimensions or tap Cancel to ignore any changes.  
Detect text: launches the Photo Reader application that can  
then detect text within the new photo.  
Favorite: allows you to assign the current image as a favorite.  
Slideshow: allows you to see your photos in a slideshow.  
Photo frame: takes the current image and creates a  
surrounding photo frame that can be edited with edited text or  
drawn object, then saved.  
Scan for nearby devices: scans for nearby DLNA-compliant  
devices that can receive or display the current image.  
Details: files details such as Title, Time, Width, Height,  
Orientation, File Size, and Path.  
Photo note: allows you to write notes on your current image  
and then save it.  
Copy to clipboard allows you to copy one or more pictures to a  
different folder.  
Settings: provides access to the Gallery options menu. Choose  
from SNS data management, Cloud sync, and Tags.  
Print: allows you to print the current image on a compatible  
Samsung printer.  
Video viewing options  
Rename: allows you to rename the current file.  
Set as: allows you to assign the current image as a Contact  
photo, Home screen, Lock screen, or Home and lock screens.  
Buddy photo share: allows you to share the current image  
with active ChatON buddies.  
Note: If no control icons are displayed on the screen in  
addition to the picture, tap anywhere on the screen to  
display them.  
1. Tap a video to select it.  
Rotate left: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in  
a counterclockwise direction.  
2. Tap  
to play the video.  
• Share via  
: allows you to share the video via ChatON,  
Rotate right: allows you to rotate the view of the current image  
in a clockwise direction.  
Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, Google+, Messaging,  
Picassa, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.  
Multimedia  
157  
           
Trim  
length of the current video.  
: activates the Trim feature so that you can edit the  
: allows you to delete the current video.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Camera) to activate the camera mode.  
• Delete  
Choose either OK or Cancel  
2. Using the camera’s main display screen as a  
viewfinder, adjust the image by aiming the camcorder  
at the subject.  
.
3. Press  
for additional options.  
3. Before you take a video, use the Volume control  
buttons to zoom in or out. You can magnify the video up  
to x4 (400 percent).  
Using the Camcorder  
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a  
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send  
high definition videos.  
Note: Use either the Up and Down volume keys or spread/  
pinch the screen to zoom in or out. For more  
Shooting Video  
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright  
conditions, it is recommended that you provide your  
subject with sufficient light by having the light source  
behind you.  
4. Tap the Video key (  
) to begin shooting video. The  
red light will blink while recording.  
5. Tap anywhere on the screen to re-focus the camera on  
that object. The camcorder auto-focuses on the new  
target area.  
Note: The camera may not be able to properly record videos to  
a memory card with a slow transfer speed.  
6. To capture an image from the video while recording,  
tap  
. This feature is not available while the  
anti-shake feature is activated.  
158  
       
7. Tap the Stop key (  
) to stop the recording and save  
Accessing Videos  
When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera  
folder. You can view your videos immediately or view them  
anytime in the Camera folder.  
the video file to your Camera folder.  
– or –  
Tap the Pause key (  
) to pause the recording.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(Apps) ➔  
8. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer,  
(
then tap  
9. Press  
(
Play) to playback your video for review.  
2. Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin  
to return to the viewer.  
video playback.  
3. Tap  
– or –  
(Play) to begin video playback.  
Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to  
select the video (indicated by a colored border) and  
display the following video menu context options:  
• Share via  
: allows you to share the video via ChatON,  
Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, Google+, Messaging,  
Picassa, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.  
• Delete  
Choose either OK or Cancel.  
– or –  
: allows you to delete the current video.  
Multimedia  
159  
     
Touch and hold a listed video file to place a checkmark  
alongside and then press for additional options:  
allows you to see your files in a slideshow or  
Sharing Pictures  
Pictures are the best way of remembering the moment, but  
an even better treat is to share them with others.  
Slideshow:  
access the slideshow settings.  
Two new features allow you to either instantly share a series  
of pictures as they are taken or quickly share a picture  
without using email or messaging.  
Copy: allows you to create a duplicate of the currently selected  
file.  
Share Shot is a great way to instantly share a series of pictures  
among a group of users. The best example for this feature is  
having multiple users instantly sharing each others pictures at a  
company or family gathering. As each person takes a separate  
picture with their own device, they are all pooled together and  
instantly appear in each user’s Gallery.  
Move: allows you to move a selected file to a new location.  
Rename: allows you to rename the filename of the currently  
selected video.  
Details: displays video file information.  
– or –  
With the video displayed on-screen (but not playing),  
No more “Email your pictures to me later”. Each person walks out  
of the event with all the pictures taken by everyone.  
press  
for additional options:  
This method of image transfer requires that both devices have  
Wi-Fi Direct active and be paired prior to use.  
Favorite: tags the current video as a favorite file  
.
Rename: allows you to rename the filename of the currently  
selected video.  
Note: You can only share a shot with other external users who  
Details: displays video file information.  
Settings: provide access to the Galley settings page. From this  
page you can configure the SNS data management and Tag  
options.  
also have their Wi-Fi Direct feature active.  
160  
   
S Beam Transfer uses the NFC (near Field Communication)  
To enable Wi-Fi Direct:  
feature found on your device to transmit large files directly to  
Important! The target device must already be connected to the  
same Wi-Fi and have its Wi-Fi Direct feature active  
and scanning before you can your pairing.  
another compatible device by direct touch  
.
This method of image transfer requires NFC and S Beam to be  
enabled prior to use.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab.  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the  
right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the  
activation status.  
Enabling Share Shot  
Share shot is a Wi-Fi Direct group sharing feature where  
multiple users can Wi-Fi connect their devices and then all  
share each others pictures in real-time. This is really useful  
in group events (ex: family gathering or company party)  
where you don’t want to have to email everyone later and  
make sure you all can share your pics at a later date.  
3. Tap Wi-Fi Direct  
.
4. Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin  
the connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct  
compatible device.  
– or –  
Tap Multi-connect  
Scan and select all the device  
names to begin the connection process to these Wi-Fi  
Direct compatible devices.  
The general process is:  
Enable Wi-Fi Direct communication  
Pair your device with other users  
Enable Share shot  
Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service  
active and running before it can be detected by your  
device.  
Multimedia  
161  
         
5. Tap Done. The direct connection is then established.  
Confirm appears in the Status bar.  
To configure your Share Shot options:  
1. Confirm the Share Shot viewfinder is active (  
appears at the top of the screen).  
6. When prompted to complete the connection, the  
recipient should tap OK. Your status field now reads  
“Connected” and your connected device is listed within  
the Wi-Fi Direct devices listing.  
2. Tap  
(Devices for sharing with) to display list of  
current share shot participants.  
Stop sharing images with select participants by tapping their  
entry and removing the green check mark.  
7. Each partner (including yourself) must then tap Accept  
to consent to the new Wi-Fi Direct pairing.  
3. Tap  
Share menu.  
4. Tap  
(Shooting modes) to regain access to the  
To enable Share shot on Camera:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(
Camera) ➔  
Share shot).  
Off to disable share shot while  
(
Quick Settings) Share) ➔  
(
(
maintaining a Wi-Fi Direct connection.  
2. If you are prompted to activate your Wi-Fi Direct  
connection, tap OK and follow the activation  
procedures for Wi-Fi Direct.  
To take share shot images:  
1. Tap  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery) to locate your newly shot images located in  
their default storage location.  
(Camera) until the shutter sounds.  
(Apps) ➔  
(
External users will be able to locate their images in either a  
downloaded or RECV (received) folder.  
3. Confirm  
(Share shot images delivered/received)  
appears in the Notifications area of the screen.  
162  
       
7. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back  
Using S Beam to Share Pictures  
to begin.  
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam  
large files directly to another compatible device that is in  
direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD  
pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and  
videos from your gallery, music files from your music player,  
and more.  
Note: If the Touch to beam screen does not appear on the  
source device:  
- Pull them apart  
- Verify the image is visible in the preview window on  
the source device (providing the file)  
- Place them together again  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab.  
2. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide  
the NFC slider to the right to turn it on.  
8. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image  
preview to begin the transfer. After a few seconds  
(depending on file size) the recipient with then see the  
transferred file displayed on their screen.  
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.  
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide  
the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on.  
5. On the source device (containing the desired image or  
video), tap  
(
Apps) ➔  
(Gallery).  
6. Locate and tap the selected image to open it in the  
preview window.  
Important! Neither device must be in Lock mode or displaying  
the Lock screen. They must both be active and  
unlocked. It is recommended that the target device  
be on the Home screen.  
Multimedia  
163  
           
To share multiple pictures via S Beam:  
1. On the source device (containing the desired image or  
Camera Gallery Options  
The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored  
video), tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(Gallery).  
camera images.  
2. Locate the selected folder.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(Apps) ➔  
3. Touch and hold the first image and place a check mark  
on it and all desired images.  
(
2. Select a folder location (ex: Camera) and tap an image  
4. Place the two active NFC-enabled devices back to back  
to begin.  
to open it.  
– or –  
5. From the Touch to beam screen, tap the reduced image  
preview to begin the transfer.  
Touch and hold an image to place a box around the file  
and select multiple files.  
6. When prompted, separate the two devices.  
– or –  
Tap the upper-right camera to begin taking pictures  
that are placed in this folder.  
– or –  
3. Tap the on-screen image to use additional image menu  
options. For more information, refer to “Pictures and  
Videos Image Viewer Options” on page 156.  
164  
     
6. Confirm  
(AllShare Controller enabled) appears in  
Sharing a Gallery Image to a Target Device  
the Notification area at the top of the device to indicate  
you are using your device as the media source.  
Important! Make sure all communicating devices are  
connected to the same Wi-Fi.  
Taking a Screen Shot  
Also known as a screen capture, this feature allows you to  
mimic the print screen function on most computers.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
1. Launch Samsung Link on the target device (such as an  
Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc..).  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(Apps) ➔  
Motions and gestures  
.
(
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Palm motion  
Note: You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before  
slider to the right to turn it on.  
you can use this feature.  
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
.
3. Open a selected image.  
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Palm  
motion can be activated.  
4. Tap  
(Stream to connected devices) and select an  
available target device to begin streaming.  
5. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the  
on-screen Allow button to continue.  
4. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to  
the on position.  
5. With the current screen showing the desired image, in  
a single motion, place the side of your palm along the  
one side of the device and then slowly swipe it in the  
opposite direction over the screen.  
Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share  
media with the external source.  
Multimedia  
165  
     
Assigning an Image as a Contact Photo  
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps) ➔  
Gallery).  
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.  
3. With the image displayed, press and then tap  
Set as Contact photo  
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper  
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps) ➔  
Gallery).  
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.  
3. With the image displayed, press and then tap  
Set as  
(
(
(
(
.
.
4. Tap a contact to make a selection.  
5. Use the on-screen crop the image by dragging it  
around or out from its corners.  
4. Select one of the these options:  
• Home screen assigns the current image to the home screen  
background. This image is spread across all available screens.  
• Lock screen assigns the selected image to the background for  
the lock screen.  
6. Tap Done to store the new image.  
• Home and lock screens assigns the current image to both the  
Home screen and Lock screens.  
5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture.  
Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or  
out to create a cropped area.  
6. Tap Done to assign the wallpaper image.  
– or –  
Tap Cancel to stop without updating the wallpaper  
image.  
166  
       
4. Select an image area by touching and holding the  
image and then selecting an available option:  
• Selection mode: provides several on-screen selection options  
such as: Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size, and  
Selection mode (Select area, Inverse selection, Selection size,  
and Selection mode).  
Editing a Photo  
You can edit your photos using the built-in Photo editor  
application on your device. The photo editor application  
provides basic editing functions for pictures that you take on  
your phone. Along with basic image tuning like brightness,  
contrast, and color it also provides a wide variety of effects  
used for editing the picture.  
• Select all: select the entire area of the current image.  
• Clipboard: copies the currently selected are to your device’s  
clipboard.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.  
3. With the image displayed, press and then tap  
Edit  
(Apps) ➔  
(
5. Use the following editor controls to edit your picture:  
.
Previous: move to previous photo project.  
• Edit: allows you to edit the current image. Launches the Photo  
Editor application.  
Next: move to next photo project.  
Note: To select the picture area, touch and hold the current  
Cancel/Delete: exits the current photo editing  
session.  
picture.  
Save: stores the curerntly edited photo.  
Rotate: allows you to rotate a photo in all 4  
directions. You can also mirror image a photo.  
Multimedia  
167  
     
• Save as: allows you to rename your current image and save it  
to your gallery.  
Crop: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a  
photo.  
• Select image: allows you to select a new image for editing.  
Take picture: allows you to activate the camera and take a  
new image for editing.  
Color:allowsyoutoAutoadjustcolor, Brightness,  
Contrast, Saturation, Adjust RGB, Temperature,  
Exposure, and Hue of a photo.  
• Share via: allows you to share your saved photo via Bluetooth,  
ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google+,  
Group Play, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Set as: assigns the currently saved image as either a: Contact  
photo, Home and lock screens, Home screen, or Lock screen.  
Effects: allows you to add various effects to your  
photo.  
Portrait: allows you to apply various face  
correction effects such as: Red-eye fix, Airbrush  
face,Facebrightness,Out-of-focus,Beautyface,  
Funny face, or Spot healing.  
Sticker: allows you to place various pre-created  
on-screen stickers atop your current image.  
Drawing: allows you to add draw directly on your  
current picture by using either a brush/pen or  
eraser.  
Frame: places a pre-created border style atop  
your current image.  
6. Press  
to access the following options:  
168  
       
Viewing a Video within the Gallery  
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps) ➔  
Gallery).  
2. Locate your folder and video.  
3. Tap Play) to playback your video.  
The Gallery  
(
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.  
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and  
share as a picture message.  
(
(
For more information on using the Picture-in-Picture feature  
Note: If the phone displays a memory full message when  
accessing the Gallery, access Files and remove some of  
the media files from the folders, and then open the  
Gallery.  
Using Video  
The Video application plays video files stored on the SD card.  
This device is able to playback DivX videos.  
Opening the Gallery  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Video). A list of available videos displays in the  
(
Video list.  
2. Tap a video file to begin viewing.  
Note: If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the  
storage card, Gallery displays these folders as separate  
albums. The top left album contains all the pictures in  
the storage card.  
Sharing Videos  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Video). After a few seconds, each  
on-screen video begins to cycle through a preview of  
the first five seconds of the clip.  
2. Press  
and then tap Share via  
.
Multimedia  
169  
           
3. Select either individual videos or tap Select all  
.
Note: The Picture-In-Picture feature only works when using  
the Video player application. Other video players (ex:  
YouTube), do not support this feature.  
4. Click Done to complete the process or Cancel to quit.  
5. Select a sharing option. Choose from: Bluetooth,  
ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, Google+, Messaging,  
Picassa, Wi-Fi Direct, or YouTube.  
4. As playback is initiated, locate and tap  
(
Picture-in-Picture) from the bottom-right of the  
Using Picture-In-Picture  
This feature can be used during playback of supported video  
types via either the Gallery, Play Videos, or Video player.  
playback screen. Your current video is then sent to  
foreground of any new page and most application  
screens.  
Note: Some applications might not allow this video to remain  
active in the foreground (ex: Camera/Camcorder  
screen).  
5. The video disappears from the screen once it ends.  
DivX Overview  
This device is able to playback DivX videos. DivX Certified®  
to play DivX® video up to HD 720p, including premium  
content. If you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for  
your device, the message “Authorization Error” will be  
displayed and your content will not play. Learn more at  
This feature allows you to continue to view your video as a  
background operation while you multi-task and do other  
things, such as surf the Internet, access your Contacts list,  
look for a picture, etc..  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps).  
Your device must first be registered to playback protected or  
purchased DivX content. DRM-free or unprotected content  
does not required DivX VOD registration.  
2. Tap the desired video playback application.  
3. Tap the desired video to begin playback.  
170  
           
4. You are prompted to log in or create a DivX account if  
your account information has not already been saved in  
DivX Player.  
Locating Your VOD Registration Number  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab About  
device  
DivX® VOD  
2. Write down your Registration code.  
3. Tap OK  
Legal information  
License settings  
Register  
.
5. Follow the instructions in DivX Player to enter the  
registration code from step 2 and create a device  
nickname (ex: “Pat or Pat’s Device”).  
.
6. Select a location on your computer to download the  
DivX registration video with the same title as your  
device nickname (ex: Pat.divx).  
Register Your DivX Device for VOD Playback of  
Purchased Movies  
To play purchased DivX movies on your device, you will first  
need to complete a one-time registration using both your  
device and your computer.  
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the file  
and initiate the transfer process. You will need to place  
this video file onto your device and play it back.  
8. Connect your device to the computer via USB and  
transfer this video.  
1. Write down the DivX registration code that appears  
on-screen. Copy this 8 or 10-digit number down.  
2. Verify you have the latest DivX software running on  
your computer. Download the free player (for your  
computer) from www.divx.com  
.
3. Open the DivX Player on your computer and from  
within the VOD menu, select Register a DivX Certified  
Device.  
.
Multimedia  
171  
   
9. From the Registration screen (Transfer), click Transfer  
Video now and select the location of the microSD card  
or USB (the device) as the target destination for the  
Important! There is no special registration or configuration  
necessary to playback DRM-free DivX movies.  
Registration of your device is only required for  
playback of protected DivX material.  
registration video (created in step 6) and click Start  
.
– or –  
Locate the created file, copy and paste it into the new  
drive letter corresponding to your device’s storage  
location.  
Samsung Hub  
Samsung Hub makes it easy to find, sample, and purchase  
movies, TV shows, books, games, and music, in one user-  
friendly location. With hundreds of titles available,  
entertaining your family on-the-go has never been easier.  
You can rent or purchase your favorite content and watch  
from any location. Samsung Hub is your gateway to mobile  
entertainment.  
10. From the Home screen, tap  
My Files).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
11. Locate your registration DivX video file and tap the file  
to play it. Once you play the registration file on your  
device, your registration is complete.  
You must have an active Samsung Account to purchase and  
rent content via Samsung Hub.  
12. Return to the DivX VOD Manager screen (from within  
your computer’s DivX Player) and confirm both your  
computer and your new device appears in the list of  
registered DivX devices.  
Note: Samsung Hub usage is based on service availability.  
Important! You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G/LTE  
connection to preview and download a media file.  
The internal memory acts as a storage location for  
your downloaded rental or purchase.  
172  
   
Important! The Samsung account manages the access  
information (username/password) to several  
applications, such as Samsung Link, Chat On, and  
Samsung Hub.  
Tip: In some cases it might be necessary to sign in to your  
Samsung account via the application.  
Press  
and then select Sign in.  
Note: Your Samsung Hub account is managed by the Samsung  
account application. This application manages your user  
profile information.  
Creating a New Samsung Hub Account  
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an  
account. Enter the required information.  
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung  
account.  
Using Samsung Hub  
The main Samsung Hub screen provides an overview of all  
the available categories on one page such as: Music, Video,  
Books, and Games. The overview page also displays recently  
added media that you can rent or purchase.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Hub).  
3. When prompted to connect via mobile networks, select  
either Cancel or Connect  
(Apps) ➔  
(
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Hub).  
(Apps) ➔  
.
(
4. If notified your Samsung account is not yet active or  
verified, tap OK. You must be signed in to your  
Samsung account to use the application’s various  
features.  
The OVERVIEW screen (landing page) displays an main access  
for all available categories and recently available content for  
purchase or rental.  
Multimedia  
173  
   
2. Scroll across the screen to select from the following  
available pages:  
4. Depending on the content, you can either purchase,  
rent, or stream the content directly from the product  
detail page.  
• MUSIC: displays featured Music content available for purchase/  
stream from the Music store & Radio. This page also allows you  
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Music  
store page by clicking on the "Music” link at the top of the  
page.  
5. Choose a payment method, then follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
Samsung Hub Notices  
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after  
you create an account in Samsung Hub.  
• VIDEO: displays featured film and TV content available for  
purchase/rent from the video store. This page also allows you  
to search for new content, or navigate directly to the Movie &  
TV store page by clicking the "Video" link a the top of the page.  
• BOOKS: displays featured Book content available for purchase  
from the Book store. This page also allows you to search for  
new content, or navigate directly to the Book store page by  
clicking the "Books" link a the top of the page.  
Media Content that is purchased and downloaded may be viewed  
concurrently on up to five (5) devices with Samsung Hub (or “the  
service”) that are also registered to the same account.  
You may remove a device from your account no more than once  
every 90 days.  
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as  
you’d like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media  
Content later subject to content re-download availability and  
content provider permissions.  
• GAMES: displays featured Game content available from the  
Game store. This page also allows you to search for new  
content, or navigate directly to the Game store page by clicking  
the "Games" link a the top of the page.  
You may need network coverage to access Media Content you  
have acquired through the Service.  
3. To purchase or view featured content in more detail,  
tap on any content (Thumbnail or text) to navigate to  
the product detail page.  
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity to download Media  
Content.  
174  
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be  
viewable on only 1 device in your account at a time.  
Media Content is downloaded and saved to your authorized  
device's SD card. No SD Card included out of box.  
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks  
where there is a weak signal.  
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period  
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)  
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin  
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental  
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented  
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four  
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the  
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).  
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)  
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the  
Media Content has been buffered.  
Unless otherwise restricted by the Content Providers, you can  
download Media Content to your TV using HDMI connections;  
otherwise, you cannot play Media Content downloaded from your  
mobile device output.  
You must finish watching Media Content within the time limit set  
out for each piece of content (which may be as short as 24  
consecutive hours).  
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not  
extend the available viewing time.  
Multimedia  
175  
4. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code  
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and  
set top box.  
Using WatchON  
Important! Before initiating use, verify you have an active  
Internet connection available (either mobile  
network or Wi-Fi connection).  
5. From the Find your TV service screen, select a service  
provider from the available channel listing.  
6. From the Choose your TV Brand screen, tap your TV’s  
manufacturer name.  
Note: Before beginning your initial WatchON application setup,  
confirm your TV is turned off.  
If you have a brand of TV not listed or you are using a projector,  
select from one of the following two options. Choose from  
For more information, refer to www.samsungwatchon.com  
.
either Other TV Brands or I Have a Projector  
.
Initial Configuration  
1. Sign into your Samsung account.  
7. Aim your device at the TV and tap  
(
Power) to  
confirm the set up process completed successfully and  
the correct TV IR codes were selected.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
WatchON).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Note: The process of the initial TV activation can take up to 10  
Note: If you are not connected to an active Wi-Fi, you may be  
prompted to continue the set up process via a mobile  
network. Click Connect to proceed.  
seconds. Please do not press the button again.  
8. If the TV turned on, tap Yes  
.
– or –  
3. Select your desired country for your TV Guide’s source  
If the TV did not turn on after tapping  
and waiting 10 seconds, tap No or Retry  
(Power)  
listing and tap Next  
.
.
176  
         
9. From the Choose Your TV Tuner screen, select the entry  
that corresponds to your current channel control  
method:  
11. When prompted to Enable IR, tap More Info.. to learn  
how to configure your set top box to receive and  
respond to IR controls.  
• Cable/Satellite/STB/PVR/DVR: selected when changing  
channels is done via a receiver box. Channels are not changed  
via the TV remote but rather through the receiver/box.  
• My xxx TV: selected when a signal is fed directly into the TV  
and no box is used. Channels are changed directly on the TV by  
using the TV remote and not a box’s remote.  
12. Only after completing the IR setup process and  
programming your box, press  
(Back).  
Note: This IR programming of your set top box is a one-time  
process and once successful should not need to be  
repeated.  
13. If prompted to personalize your experience, follow the  
Note: Try matching your current channel selection method.  
on-screen instructions.  
10. Select the Satellite Box Brand from the available list.  
Using WatchON  
To change channels:  
For example, DirectTV®.  
If your brand does not appear in the list, tap Other Satellite  
1. Sign into your Samsung account.  
Box Brands and follow the on-screen instructions.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
WatchON).  
3. From the top of the main screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Important! You must configure your set top box for IR  
communication with your device. If you do not  
select More Info.. below and follow the on-screen  
instructions you may not be able to properly use  
the application.  
(Remote  
Control). This launches an on-screen set of remote  
control tabs. Choose from one of the following:  
• Easy remote: provides the most common used control  
features. Scroll down to view additional functions.  
Multimedia  
177  
   
• [Set top box]: displays customized control specific to your  
configured set top box. Ex: satellite dish remote control  
functions.  
WatchOn Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
WatchON).  
and then select an available on-screen  
• TV: provides access to control functions specific to your TV.  
4. From the top of the main screen tap  
2. Press  
option:  
(
Select Room) to choose from different receivers/boxes  
• Change Room: allows you to select a previously configured  
room.  
in different rooms. Ex: Living Room box, Bedroom box,  
etc..  
• Settings: provides access to the Samsung WatchOn settings  
menu.  
5. Press  
(Back) to return to the main menu.  
• Help: displays on-screen help information.  
• About: displays on-screen information about the application.  
Locating your favorite programming:  
1. Sign into your Samsung account.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
WatchON).  
3. From the main screen Tap  
(Combined View) to  
reveal available media categories.  
4. Select an available category.  
– or –  
Tap Guide to display on your TV an on-screen listing of  
available set top box shows.  
For additional information on the WatchON application,  
press  
and then select Help.  
178  
   
To add a new room:  
Personalize WatchON  
Your device can be used to control boxes/receivers from  
several rooms. You could go from controlling your set top box  
in your living room and then move into your bedroom to do  
the same.  
You can personalize your application to do things such as  
show content only from your selected media categories, or  
add an additional room’s set top box.  
To configure your Just for you settings:  
1. Sign into your Samsung account.  
The Just for you option displays available content matching  
your activated media categories. These categories can be  
configured during your initial set up or at any later time.  
1. Sign into your Samsung account.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
WatchON).  
3. From the On TV tab, press  
Settings Add room  
4. Name the new room and tap Next  
(
Apps) ➔  
(
and then select  
.
2. From the Home screen, tap  
WatchON).  
3. From the main screen Tap  
Just for you  
4. From the On TV tab, press  
Settings  
5. Access parameters such as Basic info  
(
Apps) ➔  
(
.
(
Combined View) ➔  
5. Enter your current zip code and tap Done. This zip code  
must correspond to the location of your desired TV and  
set top box.  
.
and then select  
.
process.  
,
Genres and  
Sports to then configure and enable those parameters  
you would like to show in the Just for you tab.  
Multimedia  
179  
     
For more information on using the Picture-in-Picture feature  
Play Movies & TV  
This application allows you to connect to the Play Store,  
download a movie and then watch it instantly.  
Play Music  
Choose from thousands of movies, including new releases and  
HD titles in the Play Store and stream them instantly on your  
Android device.  
Also known as Google Music, allows you to browse, shop,  
and playback songs purchased from the Play Store. The  
music you choose is automatically stored in your Google  
Music library and instantly ready to play or download.  
Movies, previously rented via the Play Store are automatically  
added to your My Movies library across your devices.  
Access the new music tab from within your Play Store  
application.  
Learn more about Google Play Movies at:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Movies & TV).  
.
(Apps) ➔  
The Music application contains a music player that plays  
music and other audio files that you copy from your computer.  
(
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Music).  
(Apps) ➔  
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
done so. A list of videos sorted on the SD card displays  
in the Video list.  
(
The Music app searches both your online library and  
your device’s internal storage for music and playlists;  
this can take from a few seconds to several minutes,  
depending on the amount of new music added since  
you last opened the application. It then displays a  
carousel view of your new and recent music, organized  
by album.  
3. Following the on-screen instructions for renting and  
viewing movies.  
4. Tap the MOVIES tab to view movies you have rented.  
5. Tap the TV SHOWS tab to view shows you have rented.  
6. Tap the PERSONAL VIDEOS tab to view movies you have  
on your device or memory card.  
180  
         
2. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to link  
your current account to Google Play Music.  
Changing Library View  
You can change the way you view the contents of your  
3. Tap an on-screen account to add it or select Add  
account to use a new account.  
library.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Music).  
2. While in a selection or screen, tap  
(
Apps) ➔  
(near the  
(
4. At the free songs screen, select either Get free songs or  
Skip  
.
Get free songs are downloaded via either the Internet or Play  
Store.  
top-left of the Application bar) and then scroll left or  
right to access the various tabs.  
Follow the on-screen download and installation instructions.  
3. Available tabs include: PLAYLISTS  
,
RECENT, ARTISTS,  
ALBUMS SONGS, or GENRES  
,
.
5. Swipe left or right to browse through your new and  
available music. Music, albums, and artists are  
grouped into categories.  
Note: The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid or  
list view, depending on the view.  
6. Tap an on-screen album to open it and begin playback.  
7. Return to the Library screen from most other screens  
in the Music application by tapping the Music  
application icon  
(Music notification icon) at the  
top-left of the Application bar.  
Multimedia  
181  
 
Searching for Music in Your Library  
Listening to Music  
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in  
speakers, through a wired headset, or through a wireless  
Bluetooth stereo headset.  
1. From within the Play Music application, tap  
(Search) to search through your available songs.  
2. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.  
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search  
box.  
Press the volume keys on the side of the device to activate  
on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on the scale  
to set volume.  
3. Tap a matching song to play it, tap a matching album,  
artist or playlist to view a list of its’ songs.  
Changing Music Settings  
1. From within the Play Music application, press  
then make a selection.  
and  
• Shuffle all: Play all songs in a random order.  
• Choose on device music: In addition to playing the music that  
you add to your online library, you can play music stored on  
your device’s internal storage. Then you can listen to music  
when you have no Internet connection. To do this, make some  
of your online music available offline. For more information,  
• Settings: Provides access to the Play Music settings.  
• Help: Displays application help information.  
182  
     
Playing Music  
1. From within the Play Music application, tap a song in  
Displaying the Now Playing Screen  
If you navigate away from the Now playing screen, to return  
your library to listen to it.  
– or –  
to the Now playing screen from other Music screens:  
Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing  
While viewing a list of songs, tap  
a song and tap Play  
– or –  
While viewing a list of albums, artists, playlists, or  
genres, tap Options) adjacent to the label and tap  
Play  
(
Options) next to  
bar.  
– or –  
.
In a single motion, touch and drag  
(Music  
notification icon) down from the Status bar and tap the  
song title from the Notifications area. You can also  
pause and resume playback and skip to the next song  
(
.
The Now playing screen opens and the song you  
touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts  
to play. The tracks in the current list play in order until  
you reach the end of the list (unless you choose a  
repeat option). Otherwise, playback stops only if you  
stop it, even when you switch applications.  
Tab Options  
There are various options available from the various tabs:  
1. From within the Play Music application, select one of  
the following tabs and tap  
option.  
to access an available  
Note: If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the  
Music application, the Now Playing bar appears at the  
bottom of the screen.  
• PLAYLISTS: Play, Add to queue, Rename, Delete, or Keep on  
device.  
• RECENT: to display the most recently played songs and albums  
• ARTISTS: Play, Add to queue, Add to playlist, or Shop for artist.  
Multimedia  
183  
     
• ALBUMS: Play, Add to queue, Add to playlist, More by artist, or  
Shop for artist.  
3. Tap  
– or –  
Add to playlist to add the song to a playlist.  
Add to playlist to add the song to  
• SONGS: Play, Add to queue, Add to playlist, Shop for artist, or  
Tap  
Delete.  
a playlist.  
• GENRES: Play, Add to queue, Add to playlist, More by artist, or  
Shop for artist.  
The Now playing screen contains several buttons that you  
can tap to control the playback of songs, albums, and  
playlists:  
Options While Playing a Song  
When you play a song, the Now playing screen displays.  
There are various options and controls available while a song  
is playing:  
Tap to go back to the previous song. Touch and  
hold to scan backward through the current song.  
Tap to resume playback.  
1. From within the Play Music application, tap an album or  
song.  
Tap to pause playback.  
2. From the Now playing screen, press  
(Menu) to  
display the following options:  
Taptoadvancetothenextsong.Touchandholdto  
scan forward through the current song.  
• Equalizer: applies selected equalizer features such as:  
FX booster, Bass boost, and 3D effect.  
• Clear queue: clears the current queue.  
When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options  
,
songs play in random order. When disabled  
(as shown), songs play in the order they appear  
in List view. Also visible when is tapped.  
• Save queue: stores the current queue.  
• Settings: Allows you to view and assign various music settings,  
and view different application-specific information.  
• Help: Provides an on-screen series of related help topics.  
184  
 
Adding Songs to Playlists  
When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options  
songs play in random order. When enabled,  
songs play in random order. Also visible when  
is tapped.  
,
1. From within the Play Music application, tap an album or  
song list and play a song.  
2. Tap  
adjacent to the song name and  
Tap to repeat the current song,  
select Add to playlist  
.
repeat all songs, or disable repeat mode.  
3. Select the desired target playlist.  
Also visible when  
is tapped.  
Playing a Playlist  
1. From within the Play Music application, select the  
PLAYLISTS tab.  
2. Tap  
next to a playlist title and tap Play.  
Creating a Playlist  
Deleting a Playlist  
1. From within the Play Music application, display the  
1. From within the Play Music application, tap an album or  
song list and play a song.  
PLAYLISTS library view.  
2. Tap  
adjacent to the song name and  
2. Tap  
next to a playlist title and tap Delete.  
select Add to playlist  
.
3. Tap New playlist  
Playlist name field to enter a name  
for the playlist.  
4. Tap OK to save the new playlist.  
Multimedia  
185  
       
To make your online music available offline on your device:  
1. From within the Play Music application, change your  
library view to Albums, Artists, or playlists.  
Shopping for Music at the Play Store  
To visit the Google PlayTM Store where you can find and buy  
music:  
2. Press  
and then select Choose on device music and  
From within the Play Music application, tap  
Store in the Application Bar.  
Play  
tap the album or playlist you want to make available  
offline.  
The Google Play Store music section displays.  
A blue pin  
available offline.  
indicates that the item is already  
Making Online Music Available Offline  
In addition to playing the music that you add to your online  
library, you can play music stored on your device’s internal  
storage. Then you can listen to music when you have no  
Internet connection. To do this, make some of your online  
music available offline.  
Darker pins appear next to the items you can make  
available offline. A bar at the bottom of the screen  
shows how much space is available on your device for  
music and other files.  
Dim blue pins indicate songs or albums that you copied  
directly from a computer to your device.  
Tip: You can also copy music directly from your computer to  
your device.  
3. Tap the dark pin next to each item you want to make  
available offline or tap a blue pin to stop making it  
available offline. You can switch to other views of your  
library to make other kinds of items available offline as  
well.  
4. Tap Done in the bar at the bottom of the screen.  
186  
 
5. The Music application starts downloading the items to  
4. Use any of the following Music player controls:  
your device.  
Pause the song.  
Music  
Start the song after pausing.  
The Music Player is an application that can play music files.  
The music player supports files with extensions AAC, AAC+,  
eAAC+, MP3, WMA, 3GP, MP4, and M4A. Launching the  
Music Player allows you to navigate through your music  
library, play songs, and create playlists (music files bigger  
than 300 KB are displayed).  
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to  
previous song.  
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to  
go to next song.  
Volume control.  
Playing Music  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Volume control showing volume muted.  
Plays the entire song list once.  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Music).  
2. Tap a library category tab to select the music category:  
Replays the current list when the list ends.  
Repeats the currently playing song.  
Shuffles the current list of songs randomly.  
Songs play in order and are not shuffled.  
Lists the current playlist songs.  
Songs  
,
Playlists Albums, Artists, Music square, or  
,
Folders  
.
3. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin  
playback.  
Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or  
Displays the current song in the player window.  
Assign the current song as a Favorite.  
sound is connected through the headset jack only.  
Multimedia  
187  
                     
Music Options  
Streams the current music file to another device  
via Samsung Link.  
The Music settings menu allows you to set preferences for  
the music player such as whether you want the music to play  
in the background, sound effects, and how the music menu  
displays.  
Making a Song a Phone Ringtone  
1. From within the Music application, tap the Songs tab.  
2. Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the  
on-screen context menu.  
With the application displayed and playing a song,  
press and select one of the following options:  
• Via Bluetooth: scans for devices and pairs with a Bluetooth  
headset.  
3. Tap Set as  
Phone ringtone.  
4. Choose a starting point for the ringtone to start playing  
from. Select either From the beginning or Auto  
recommendations (you can allow the application to  
choose the best part to start from).  
• Share music: allows you to share music with others via the  
Group Play application. All users must be connected to the  
• Add to playlist: allows you to add the current music file to a  
selected playlist.  
Note: Additional Set as options include Caller ringtone and  
Alarm tone  
.
• Set as: allows you to set the current song as a Phone ringtone,  
Caller ringtone, or Alarm tone. Additionally you can either  
choose to start the selected song from the beginning or allow  
the application to automatically recommend a start point.  
• Show/Hide Music view: displays an on-screen waveform  
timeline of the current song.  
188  
       
• Scan for nearby devices: allows you to look for DLNA -  
compliant devices used to control streaming media.  
• Settings: allows you to change your music player settings.  
• Details: allows you to view media info such as Artist, Title,  
Album, Track length, Genre, Track number, Format, Size, and  
Location.  
• Music menu: this menu allows you to select which categories  
you want to display. Choices are: Albums, Artists, Genres,  
Music square, Folders, Composers, Years, Most played,  
Recently played, or Recently added. Tap each item that you  
want to display in the Music menu.  
• Music auto off: when enabled, sets a timer for the Music  
application to automatically turn off after a pre-selected amount  
of time.  
• End: closes the application.  
Music Settings  
• Lyrics: when activated, the lyrics of the song are displayed if  
available.  
The settings menu allows you to set preferences for the  
music player such as whether you want the music to play in  
the background, sound effects, and how the music menu  
displays.  
• Smart volume: when activated, automatically adjusts each  
track’s volume to an equal level.  
1. From within the Music application, press  
Settings  
2. Select one of the following settings:  
• Voice control: when activated, allows you to use voice control  
commands to control the music player.  
.
• SoundAlive: set a type of equalization such as Normal, Pop,  
Rock, Jazz, Dance, Classic, etc.  
• Adapt Sound: enable or disable the adaptive sound feature to  
adjust to the sound levels of your current environment.  
• Play speed: set the play speed anywhere between 0.5X and  
2.0X using the slider.  
Multimedia  
189  
 
Adding Music to a Playlist  
Using Playlists  
1. From within the Music application, tap the Playlists tab.  
2. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.  
Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for  
playback. These Playlists can be created using the Music  
player on this device, or using a third-party application (such  
as Windows Media Player) and downloading those files to an  
SD card inserted into the device.  
3. Tap  
(Add music). This option is available within  
user-created playlists.  
Note: If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a  
song name from the main screen to open the context  
menu. Select Add to playlist and choose the playlist.  
Creating a Playlist  
1. From within the Music application, tap the Playlists tab.  
2. Press  
3. Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new  
name for this playlist, then tap OK  
and then tap Create playlist.  
4. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music  
.
tracks to this playlist then tap Done  
.
Removing Music from a Playlist  
1. From within the Music application, tap the Playlists tab.  
2. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.  
3. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context  
menu.  
4. Tap Remove  
.
190  
             
Editing a Playlist  
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you  
can also share, delete, or rename the playlist.  
Removing Music Files  
1. From within the Music application, tap the Songs tab.  
2. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen  
context menu.  
Note: Only those playlist you have created can be edited.  
3. Tap Delete  
OK. The music file(s) is deleted.  
Default playlists can not be renamed.  
Samsung Link  
1. From within the Music application, tap the Playlists tab.  
2. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen  
context menu.  
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung  
device with your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on  
who calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen  
monitoring. Samsung’s Link makes staying connected easy.  
3. Tap Edit title  
.
Allows users to share their in-device media content with  
other external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living  
Network Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also  
be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs  
via a digital multimedia streamer.  
4. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap OK  
.
Transferring Music Files  
Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two  
methods:  
1. Downloaded to the device from the Play Store.  
Music files are directly stored on your phone.  
2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection.  
Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD  
card.  
Multimedia  
191  
                 
3. If prompted with an on-screen notification about no  
Wi-Fi detected, tap Cancel (to continue by using your  
network connection) or Connect to continue.  
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating  
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an  
active/registered Samsung account prior to using  
this application.  
4. Tap Sign in  
.
5. If prompted to log into your Samsung account, tap Sign  
in and follow the on-screen instructions.  
Note: If the main screen still shows a Sign in box, close the  
application and restart it.  
Note: For more information on defining the various features  
6. Follow the on-screen prompts.  
definitions on page 234.  
7. Scroll across the application screen to view either  
MY RECENT CONTENT or DEVICES & STORAGE  
.
Important! The Samsung account manages the access  
information (username/password) to several  
applications, such as Samsung Link, Chat On, and  
Samsung Hub.  
The DEVICES & STORAGE screen contains two separate  
streaming media options:  
• Registered storage: allows you to receive and playback media  
stored externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device by  
allowing you to add a Web storage service for streaming  
content.  
1. Confirm you have already logged in to your Samsung  
account.  
• Registered devices allows you to stream/share selected  
multimedia content from your device to DLNA compliant device  
connected to the same Wireless Access Point.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Link).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
192  
• Video optimization: allows you to setup the video quality for  
streamed video content. Move the slider to the on position to  
activate the feature.  
Configuring Samsung Link Settings  
The Samsung Link™ application must first be configured  
prior to its initial use. You must setup parameters such as  
connected Wi-Fi, Items to share, source server address, and  
external device acceptance rights.  
• Password lock: allows you to restrict access to Samsung Link  
by requiring a user enter the currently active and associated  
Samsung account password. Move the slider to the on position  
to activate the feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Link) DEVICES & STORAGE  
and then tap Settings and configure the  
(Apps) ➔  
(
.
2. Press  
• My account: displays Samsung account information.  
• Customer support: allows you to contact the Samsung Link  
team via a new email from an available email account.  
• About this service: displays application information.  
following settings as desired:  
• Registered storage: allows you to add a Web storage location.  
Without a storage service/location added, you will not be able  
to use Samsung Link.  
Setting Up Web Storage  
Web storage services allow you to use storage space to store  
your files and share them on the “Cloud”.  
• My device: displays your device name as it is used with  
Samsung Link. Tap to change the device name.  
• Save to: allows you to save your media to your internal phone  
memory or to an SD card.  
Note: If you are using another Web storage service, log into  
that service first before using Samsung Link.  
• Auto upload: allows you to enable automatic upload of images  
from your device to those storage locations specified within the  
Web storage list. Move the slider to the on position to activate  
the feature.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Samsung Link) DEVICES & STORAGE  
.
Note: When adding storage, an N Drive is added.  
Multimedia  
193  
     
2. If not already signed into your Cloud storage, tap  
Register storage) Sign in to your desired service.  
To de-register Web storage service:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(
(Apps) ➔  
Choose from: SugarSync, Dropbox, or SkyDrive.  
– or –  
(
Samsung Link) DEVICES & STORAGE  
and then tap Settings Registered storage  
Deregister  
.
Press  
.
Press  
and then tap Settings  
Registered storage  
(Register storage).  
2. Select a current storage service and tap OK  
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to register or log into  
your cloud service.  
Sharing files via Web Storage  
Files can be uploaded to a Web storage location by either  
login into the service and sharing a folder on your computer  
with the storage location or sharing files, images, and videos  
from your device.  
4. Once the process is successfully completed, the Web  
storage icon or name appears in the Web storage area  
of the main screen.  
To upload an image on your device to Web storage:  
5. From the main screen, select a connected device and  
then tap on the media that you would like to share.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
A file with  
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely  
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your  
device to access the file currently stored on your services’  
servers.  
2. Select a folder location (ex: Camera) and open an  
image by tapping it once. This opens the image in the  
preview window.  
Note: To select multiple images, touch and hold an image to  
place a colored border around the selected images.  
3. Select the remote storage location (ex: Dropbox).  
194  
             
4. Select the target folder location and select Upload. The  
device then confirms the available storage locations  
and begin the process of uploading the selected  
images.  
Sharing Media via Samsung Link to a Target  
Device  
Important! Make sure all communicating devices are  
connected to the same Wi-Fi.  
To upload a video on your device to Web storage:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(Apps) ➔  
1. Launch AllShare Play/Samsung Link on the target  
(
device (such as an Internet TV, Samsung Tablet, etc..).  
2. Select a folder location (ex: Camera) and touch and  
hold a video to place a colored border around the  
selected file.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Link).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Note: You must be signed in to your Samsung Account before  
3. Tap  
Dropbox from the top of the Gallery  
you can use this feature.  
screen. The device then confirms the available storage  
locations and begin the process of uploading the  
selected video.  
3. Tap your device name from the Registered devices  
area.  
4. Tap an available category tab (Pictures, Music, Movies,  
Files, or Info) and select a file.  
A file with  
in the upper-left indicates it is stored remotely  
on a Web storage location. Selecting this media causes your  
device to access the file currently stored on your services’  
servers.  
Multimedia  
195  
   
5. Tap an available on-screen file, image, or video to  
AllShare Cast Hub  
This hardware allows you to enjoy what’s currently on your  
device directly on your TV.  
place a green check mark alongside it.  
6. Tap  
(Stream to connected devices) and select an  
available target device to begin streaming.  
7. On a target device (ex: Internet TV) select the  
on-screen Allow button to continue.  
Note: There is no need to be connected to a Wi-Fi network or  
to be logged into your Samsung Account to use this  
feature.  
AllShare Cast Hub establishes a WI-Fi Direct connection  
between the device and the hub.  
Note: At this stage your device is requesting access to share  
media with the external source.  
For more information about this device, go to:  
8. Confirm  
(Samsung Link Controller enabled)  
http://www.samsung.com/us/mobile/cell-phones-accessories/EAD-  
T10JDEGSTA  
appears in the Notification area at the top of the device  
to indicate you are using your device as the media  
source.  
196  
   
Connecting AllShare Cast Hub  
To connect your AllShare Cast Hub hardware:  
Blue - Solid  
Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is  
ready to be connected with a new  
device.  
Screen Mirroring  
(with Hub  
accessory)  
This feature functions with an  
external AllShareCast Hub to fully  
mirror what is currently displayed on  
your device to the external TV.  
2. Connect your TV to the AllShare Cast Hub via an HDMI  
cable (A-to-A cable).  
3. Change the source input on your TV to match the input  
port used by the incoming HDMI cable.  
1. Connect the AllShare Cast Hub to a power source via  
the USB Travel Adapter.  
Note: The television screen should now display an on-screen  
tutorial showing you how to configure your device’s  
AllShare Cast Hub and device settings.  
Note: The status LED begins to blink solid red to indicate  
it has begun the start up process.  
To activate Screen Mirroring on your device:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings Connections tab) Screen  
Mirroring  
and then tap  
LED Color/Patterns Description  
(
Red - Solid  
Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is  
booting or processing.  
.
2. If not already on, tap the Screen Mirroring and then  
move the slider to the right to turn it on. The slider  
color indicates the activation status.  
3.  
Red - Blinking  
Indicates the AllShare Cast Hub is in  
standby mode (ready for connection).  
Multimedia  
197  
           
4. Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30-day trial of the  
T-Mobile TV  
T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV  
and Video on Demand.  
service.  
– or –  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
Tap Continue to keep viewing the free content or  
(
T-Mobile TV). The T-Mobile Terms and Conditions  
Purchase Options to buy the paid features.  
page displays.  
5. Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing:  
Home  
,
Live TV  
,
TV Shows, Favorites, Help, Search, More  
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may  
apply. Please contact your service provider for further  
details.  
Info Browse, or Live Channels  
,
.
YouTube  
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can  
upload and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.  
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps) ➔  
YouTube).  
2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions.  
– or –  
(
(
Tap Exit to close the application.  
2. When the screen loads you can begin searching and  
Note: T-Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network  
before it can be used. During this initial registration  
process, any Wi-Fi connections must be disabled.  
viewing posted videos.  
3. Press  
Settings  
General  
High quality on  
mobile if you prefer high quality output.  
3. Tap Disable Wi-Fi if you currently have an active Wi-Fi  
connection.  
198  
       
Section 8: Applications and Development  
This section contains a description of each application that is  
Applications  
available in the Applications Menu, its function, and how to  
navigate through that particular application. If the application  
is already described in another section of this user manual,  
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.  
The Applications list provides quick access to all the  
available applications on the phone.  
Calculator  
Using this feature allows you to use your device as a  
calculator. The calculator provides the basic arithmetic  
functions; addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division.  
You can also use this as a scientific calculator.  
Note: This manual only addresses applications that have been  
loaded on your [device/computer/tablet] as of the date  
of purchase. Information concerning third party  
applications that you may choose to download from the  
Google Play Store or otherwise should be obtained from  
the application provider directly.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Calculator).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.  
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the  
Plus, Minus, Multiplication, or Division key.  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to one of the Home screens. For more  
4. Enter the next number.  
5. To view the result, tap the = (equals) key.  
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.  
You can also add an application icon as a Primary  
Shortcut that will display on all Home screens. If you add  
an application as a primary shortcut, the application icon  
will not be displayed in the Applications menu.  
Note: Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional  
scientific functions.  
Applications and Development  
199  
             
2. Tap  
event.  
– or –  
Tap Today to display the current date indicated by a  
(Create event) to create a new Calendar  
Calendar  
With this feature, you can consult the calendar by day, week,  
or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a  
reminder. Google Calendar is built into the phone and  
synchronizes both new and existing entries between your  
phone and your online Google account.  
blue box, then press  
following options:  
and select one of the  
• Go to: displays a specific date.  
Important! You should previously add an account (Facebook,  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to  
using the Calendar.  
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today,  
or an individual event.  
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.  
• Sync: synchronizes your current calendar events with your  
available accounts (such as Gmail, Microsoft Exchange  
ActiveSync, etc..).  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(Calendar). The following tabs are available on  
the right side of the display:  
Year: displays the Year view.  
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.  
• Month: displays the Month view.  
• Week: displays the Week view.  
• Day: displays the Day view.  
• List: displays the events in a List view.  
Task: allows you to search for tasks.  
200  
     
6. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your  
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone  
from within the Select time zone field.  
Creating a Calendar Event  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Calendar).  
2. Within the Year, Month, Week, and Day tabs,  
Create event) to create a new Calendar event.  
7. Tap Show week number to display the week numbers  
along the side of the week entries.  
(
8. Tap Calendars and select the type of general  
synchronization settings you want. A check mark  
indicates selection.  
Calendar Settings  
Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with  
which you want the calendar to begin. You also select how  
you want to view the calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or  
determine how to manage events, notifications, sounds, and  
defaults reminders.  
9. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event  
notification method. Choose from: Alert  
,
Status bar  
notification, and Off  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
2. Press Settings  
3. Tap View styles and select an option.  
(
Apps) ➔  
.
10. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar  
event notification.  
.
11. Tap Vibration to assign a vibration notification to this  
event.  
Tap Month view styles and select an option.  
12. Tap Quick responses to edit your default quick  
responses for outbound emails. These are default  
responses similar to those used by text templates.  
Tap Week view and select a type.  
4. Tap First day of week and select either Local default,  
Saturday, Sunday or Monday  
.
5. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check  
mark indicates selection.  
Applications and Development  
201  
   
Camera  
ChatON  
Use your 13.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos  
in a JPEG format. The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in  
an MP4 format.  
Provides a global mobile communication service where you  
can chat with more than 2 buddies via a group chat, In this  
service you can send pictures, videos, animation messages  
(Scribbles), audio, Contacts, Calendar entries, and Location  
information. Create special animated messages for your  
friends using handwritten messages, text, photos,  
background images and music.  
Note: A microSD card is no longer necessary before you take  
pictures or shoot video.  
It is recommended that you confirm your default storage  
location for images and videos.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
ChatON).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
From the Home screen, tap  
Camera).  
(Apps) ➔  
2. Log in to the service and follow the on-screen  
(
instructions.  
For more information, visit: https://web.samsungchaton.com  
.
202  
     
Chrome  
Clock  
The Google Chrome app allows you to use the Google  
Chrome Web browser on your device.  
Here you can set an Alarm, configure and view the World  
clock, use a Stopwatch, set a Timer, or use a Desk Clock.  
The applications display in a tabular format and quickly  
accessed with the touch of a finger.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Chrome).  
2. Read the Google Chrome Terms of Service and tap  
Accept and Continue  
(Apps) ➔  
(
From the Home screen, tap  
Clock).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
.
3. If you have an existing Chrome account, tap Sign in to  
bring your open tabs, bookmarks, and omnibox data  
from your computer to your phone, otherwise tap No  
Setting an Alarm  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(
Apps) ➔  
(
Clock).  
thanks  
.
2. From the Alarm tab, tap  
(Create alarm).  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Google  
3. Use the arrow symbols to enter adjust the hour, and  
minutes, then tap AM or PM (toggles depending on  
which was last selected).  
Chrome.  
4. Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of  
times you want this alarm to repeat. Selections are:  
day blocks or Repeat Weekly. Selected day blocks turn  
blue when active.  
5. Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following:  
Melody  
,
Vibration  
,
Vibration and melody, or Briefing  
.
Applications and Development  
203  
           
6. Tap More to configure additional alarm settings such as  
volume slider, Alarm tone, Location alarm, Snooze,  
Smart alarm, and assign a name.  
• Interval indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent  
between alarm notifications (snooze time).  
• Repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are  
assigned to this alarm. How many times will the snooze silence  
the alarm.  
To configure additional alarm settings:  
1. Tap More to access additional alarm settings.  
2. Tap the Alarm tone field and either select an available  
tone or select Add to use locate a sound to use as an  
alarm ringtone. Tap OK to activate the ringtone.  
3. Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field  
to decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of  
the volume level plays.  
6. Move the Smart alarm slider to the right to activate this  
feature which slowly increases screen brightness and  
the volume of nature tones to simulate dawn breaking.  
Tap the field to assign a interval time (1 minute,  
3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or  
30 minutes) and nature tone (Fairy fountain, Birdsong  
by the lake, Sparkling mist, The secret forest, Serenity,  
or Gentle spring rain).  
4. Move the Location alarm slider to the right to activate  
the feature, then follow the on-screen instructions to  
enter a location. When activated, the alarm only  
sounds when you are at a specific location.  
5. Move the Snooze slider to the right to activate the  
feature. Tap the field to assign a Interval time  
(3 minutes, 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or  
30 minutes) and Repeat (1 time, 2 times, 3 times,  
5 times, and 10 times).  
• Interval category describes the length of time the alarm will  
remain silent between alarm notifications (snooze time).  
Tone category provides one of several nature sounds that are  
used as the alarm tone.  
7. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm.  
8. Tap Save to store the new alarm event.  
204  
   
Turning Off an Alarm  
To assign DST settings:  
1. Locate a desired city from the World clock list.  
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and slide  
to any direction.  
2. Touch and hold a city and select DST settings  
.
3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, or 1 hour).  
If Daylight Savings Time is selected, a sun symbol  
appears next to the World Clock city listing.  
Setting the Snooze Feature  
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,  
touch and slide to any direction. Snooze must  
first be set in the alarm settings.  
Stopwatch  
This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the  
stopwatch keep running.  
1. From within the Clock application, tap Stopwatch tab.  
Deleting an Existing Alarm  
1. From within the Clock application, touch and hold an  
on-screen alarm event.  
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter.  
3. Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter.  
4. Tap Stop to stop the counter.  
2. Tap Delete  
.
World Clock  
This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part  
of world.  
5. Tap Restart to restart the lap counter. You can have  
multiple lap times.  
1. From within the Clock application, tap the World clock  
6. Tap Reset to reset the counter.  
tab.  
2. Tap Add city then scroll and select the desired city, or  
tap in the search field to locate a city.  
Applications and Development  
205  
           
6. To make changes, press  
and then tap Settings.  
Setting a Timer  
The following options are displayed while in full-screen  
mode:  
1. From within the Clock application, tap Timer tab.  
2. Tap the Hours Minutes, or Seconds field and use the  
,
• Calendar: when this is checked, the calendar is displayed. Tap  
to uncheck.  
on-screen keypad to enter the hour, minute, or  
seconds. The timer plays an alarm at the end of the  
countdown.  
• Weather: when this is activated, the location, temperature, and  
weather condition is displayed. Touch and slide the slider to the  
right to turn it on.  
3. Tap Start to start the timer.  
4. Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer  
and start over.  
• Dock: allows you to set your Dock settings such as Dock  
sound, Audio output mode, Desk home screen display,  
Automatic unlock, and Audio output. For more information,  
5. Tap Restart to resume the timer counter.  
Configuring a Desk Clock  
This feature lets you activate an on-screen clock that can be  
viewed when the device is docked.  
7. Tap  
to display the Desk clock in full-screen mode.  
8. To make changes in full screen mode, press  
and  
From within the Clock application, tap Desk clock tab.  
The default Desk clock is displayed.  
then tap:  
• Edit shortcuts: allows you to edit the shortcuts shown at the  
bottom of full screen mode.  
Note: You might have to scroll across the tabs to locate the  
• Hide/Show shortcuts: allows you to hide or view the current  
on-screen shortcuts located along the bottom of the full screen  
mode.  
Desk clock tab at the far right.  
206  
 
• Settings: provides access to the Desk clock settings menu  
from where you can alter the following: Hide status bar,  
Wallpaper, Calendar, Weather, and Dock.  
Dropbox  
Works to provide access to your desktop files directly from  
your device. This applications allows you to bring your files  
with you when you're on the go, edit files in your Dropbox  
from your device, upload photos and videos to Dropbox, and  
share your selected files freely with family and friends.  
• Date and time: provides access to the Date and time menu.  
Contacts  
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to  
your Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.  
The in-device application works in conjunction with a partner  
program placed on a target computer using an active Internet  
connection.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Contacts).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Dropbox creates a folder that automatically synchronizes its  
contents across all of your connected devices on your  
account. Update a file to your Dropbox on your computer, and  
its automatically updated to the same folder on your other  
devices.  
Downloads  
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current  
downloaded files (Internet and Other).  
Download the Desktop application  
1. Use your computer’s browser to navigate to:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Downloads).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
.
2. Place a checkmark on an available file to select it.  
3. Choose an available action such as Share, Delete, Sort  
by size/date, or Clear list.  
2. Follow the on-screen setup and installation instructions  
on your target computer containing the desired files.  
Applications and Development  
207  
         
4. Initially, you will need to configure your Camera Upload  
parameters. Choose from Wi-Fi only or Wi-Fi or data  
plan.  
Important! The computer application must be installed on the  
computer containing the desired files. This  
computer must have an active Internet connection.  
Tap Turn on after making your selection.  
Caution! Enabling this feature can incur data charges  
(depending on your plan) if the Wi-FI or data plan is  
selected.  
Note: It might be necessary to configure your router’s firewall  
settings to allow this application to gain access to the  
Internet.  
5. Tap  
(Access Dropbox) at the top of the application  
Accessing Dropbox on your Device  
window to access the files and folders you area  
currently sharing from your computer.  
6. Tap an item to open it.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Dropbox) Start  
.
2. Tap I’m already a Dropbox user, enter your current  
7. Tap the bottom of the image to reveal additional  
options:  
account credentials, and tap Log in  
– or –  
.
• Delete to erase the current file.  
Tap I’m new to Dropbox and follow the on-screen  
• Share via applications such as: Copy link, Bluetooth, ChatON,  
Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google, Google+, Messaging,  
S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
instructions to register for a new account.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
• Add to Favorite to assign a favorite tag to the current image.  
208  
• More to choose from options such as:  
Manually uploading a Picture to Dropbox  
1. From the Home screen, tap Apps) ➔  
Camera).  
Open with... to open the current file with the default in-device  
application.  
(
(
Export to transfer the current file to another location via:  
Save to SD card, Bluetooth, ChatON, Email, Flipboard, Gmail,  
Google+, Group Play, Messaging, Picasa, S Memo, or Wi-Fi  
Direct.  
2. After the image is taken, tap the Image Viewer box at  
the bottom right. This previews the current image.  
3. Tap the image to reveal the image options at the top of  
the screen.  
8. Tap  
(Up a Directory Level) at the top of the  
4. Tap  
(Dropbox) select a folder location  
application window to navigate up a single level with  
every tap.  
and tap Upload  
.
Note: If your share folder is located on your computer, you will  
momentarily receive an on-screen popup notifying you  
that a new image was uploaded to your shared Dropbox  
folder.  
9. Tap  
(Camera Uploads/Albums) at the top of the  
application window to access your Uploads and  
Albums tabs.  
10. Tap  
(Tag as Favorite) at the top of the application  
window to assign favorite files.  
Email  
11. Tap  
(Search) at the top of the application window  
Email enables you to review and create email using most  
email services. The device alerts you when you receive an  
email message.  
to search for files located in your Dropbox account.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Email).  
Applications and Development 209  
(Apps) ➔  
(
       
Flipboard  
Gallery  
This application creates a personalized digital magazine out  
of everything being shared with you. Access news stories,  
personal feeds and other related material. Flip through your  
Facebook newsfeed, tweets from your Twitter account,  
photos from friends and much more.  
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos.  
For photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a  
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and  
share as a picture message.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(Apps) ➔  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Flipboard).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
(
2. Swipe up to get started, select some on-screen  
categories and tap Done to create a new profile.  
– or –  
Gmail  
Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is  
configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on  
your synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically  
synchronize with your Gmail account on the Web.  
Tap Tap to sign In to log into your previously created  
profile.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Gmail).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
210  
           
Google  
Group Play  
This application lets you share documents, photos or music  
in real-time with other connected friends.  
Use Google Search to search the Web.  
From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Google) and enter the search text.  
Note: Group play is not the same as Screen mirroring which  
requires a connection to a Wi-Fi capable Samsung TV or  
via the use of the AllShare Cast Hub.  
– or –  
Tap  
information.  
on the Google Search bar and say the search  
Google +  
Google+ makes messaging and sharing with your friends a  
lot easier. You can set up Circles of friends, visit the Stream  
to get updates from your Circles, use Messenger for fast  
messaging with everyone in your Circles, or use Instant  
Upload to automatically upload videos and photos to your  
own private album on Google+.  
Important! To share a Group Play, all users must be connected  
to the same Wi-Fi access point.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Group Play).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
2. Read the various on-screen information and tap OK to  
continue.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Google+).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
3. Follow the on-screen tutorials.  
Applications and Development  
211  
         
7. Have your friends sign onto Group Play from their  
devices (see below) and they can view your media  
using you as a Mobile AP.  
Creating a group  
If you have media you want to share, create a group for other  
users to join to and then share/collaborate with what you are  
sharing.  
Joining a group  
A joiner is the participant of an already created group. You  
can only view and interact with media shared by the leader  
of an existing group.  
The creator of the group is the leader and it the source of the  
shared file. All other joined members can then interact with  
the file being shared.  
1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm  
your other participants are also connected to this same  
Wi-Fi.  
1. Connect to an active Wireless Access Point and confirm  
your connection is this same Wi-Fi as the group leader.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Group Play).  
(Apps) ➔  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Group Play).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
(
3. Tap Join group. Your device then scans for available  
groups for you to join.  
3. Tap the Set group password field to enable the function  
which requires users to enter a password prior to  
connecting to your new group.  
4. Select a group to join. Once connected, you can then  
select the shared content and interact with your  
group’s shared media.  
4. Tap Create group. If previously selected, enter your  
group password and tap OK. Mobile AP is enabled.  
5. Tap one of the media items listed under the Share and  
play content heading.  
5. Press  
and select Help for additional information.  
6. Tap to select the items you want to share (indicated by  
a checkmark), then tap Done or OK  
.
212  
       
Help  
Internet  
Provides access to built-in Help information.  
Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully  
optimizedandcomeswithadvancedfunctionalitytoenhancethe  
Internet browsing feature on your phone.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Help).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
From the Home screen, tap  
Internet).  
(Apps) ➔  
2. Select an on-screen topics for more information:  
• New features: provides help on all of the new features and  
applications such as Motion, Camera, Group Play, etc.  
• Basics: provides basic information on using your device.  
• Applications: provides information on how to use basic  
applications like Contacts, Email, S Memo, Internet, Camera,  
etc.  
(
• Settings: provides information on settings for Wi-Fi, Bluetooth,  
Ringtone, Power saving mode, NFC, Air gesture, Air view,  
Smart screen, Motion, and Screen Mirroring.  
• Online help: provides more detailed online help for additional  
questions you may have.  
• Available accessories: provides information on accessories  
for your phone that are available for purchase.  
Applications and Development  
213  
       
Local  
Lookout Security  
Local (formerly known as Google Places) displays company  
logos on a layer of Google Maps. When viewing an area you  
can quickly locate a business or person, find out more  
information about the business, see coupons, public  
responses, and more.  
Lookout Security™ provides mobile device-specific security  
features that are coupled with a minimal performance hit.  
Lookout Mobile Security provides key security options that  
are unique to the mobile market. Along with the antivirus and  
anti-malware tech, there's a lost and stolen phone locator  
service, an application privacy adviser, and a backup service.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Local).  
Search) and then use the Search Maps field  
(Apps) ➔  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Lookout Security).  
2. Tap Next  
(Apps) ➔  
(
(
2. Tap  
(
.
to manually enter a desired place or choose from  
among the various categories. Matches are filtered by  
those closest to your current location.  
3. Read the on-screen descriptions and activate those  
desired features. Tap Next to progress to the next  
screen  
3. Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants,  
Cafes, Bars, Attractions, [user added searches],  
RECOMMENDATIONS, or IN THIS AREA a list of places  
within this category displays.  
4. Tap Done to complete the setup.  
5. Create a Lookout account by entering an email address  
and account password.  
4. Tap the Maps icon to launch the related maps feature.  
6. Re-enter the password and tap Start Protecting  
.
5. Press  
and then tap Add a search. The functions  
adds additional search shortcuts to the places screen.  
214  
         
Enabling a Location source  
Maps  
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search  
for places of interest, you must enable a location source. To  
enable the location source you must enable the wireless  
network, or enable the GPS satellites.  
Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view  
real-time traffic issues, and view detailed destination  
directions. There is also a search tool included to help you  
locate places of interest or a specific address. You can view  
locations on a vector or aerial map, or you can view locations  
at the street level.  
Important! The more location determining functions are  
enabled, the more accurate the determination will  
be of your position.  
Important! Before using Google Maps you must have an active  
data (3G/4G/LTE) or Wi-Fi connection. The Maps  
application does not cover every country or city.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Location  
services  
.
From the Home screen, tap  
Maps).  
(Apps) ➔  
2. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.  
3. Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data  
from sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to  
provide a better approximation of your current location.  
4. Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite  
locations.  
(
Important! For best results, it is recommended that you enable  
all of your location services. For more information,  
Applications and Development  
215  
           
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
• Local: provides access to the places menu where you can  
quickly locate a business or person, find out more information  
about a business, see coupons, public responses, and more  
(Local). Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants,  
Cafes, Bars, Attractions, or select from available categories  
such as Entertainment, ATMs, Gas stations, Hotels, Post office,  
or Taxi.)  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
• Layers: allows you to switch map views:  
Opening Maps  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Traffic: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic  
conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each  
color represents how fast the traffic is moving.  
Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth.  
Satellite images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the  
best imagery available, most of which is approximately one to  
three years old.  
(Apps) ➔  
(Maps).  
2. Tap the upper-right My location button to find your  
location on the map with a blinking blue dot.  
3. Locate the bottom row of the buttons to access  
additional options:  
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.  
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a  
starting point.  
Terrain: combines a topographical view of the area’s terrain  
with the current map location.  
Transit Lines: displays the overlapping transit lines on your  
map.  
Latitude: allows you to see your friend's locations and share  
your location with them.  
216  
   
My Maps: displays a list of your preferred maps.  
Bicycling: displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map.  
Wikipedia: displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your  
map.  
Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that  
aren’t ready for primetime. They may change, break or  
disappear at any time. Click on a Lab to enable or disable it.  
What’s New: provides access to the Play Store from where you  
can update the application manually.  
4. Press  
and select one of the following options:  
About: displays general information about Google maps such  
as Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received,  
Free memory, etc.  
• Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from  
the map.  
• Make available offline: allows you to store map-related  
information locally on your device and access it even when the  
device is offline.  
Feedback: allows you to provide application feedback.  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions,  
Privacy Policy, or Legal Notices information. Select the desired  
information from the pop-up menu.  
• Settings: allows you to select the following additional options:  
Display: allows you to enable/disable the Zoom Buttons, Scale  
Bar, and Bubble action.  
• Help: provides help information.  
Offline and cache: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map  
tiles when not using Wi-Fi and to clear the cache that holds the  
map tiles. Choose from: Automatic caching, Clear all map titles,  
or Clear My Places cache.  
Location settings: lets you access and configure the location  
settings.  
Sign in: allows you to sign into your current Google account.  
Applications and Development  
217  
 
Messaging  
This application allows you to use the Short Message Service  
(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from  
other mobile phones.  
Mobile HotSpot  
Provides access to the Tethering and Mobile HotSpot menu  
where you can use either the USB tethering or portable  
HotSpot functionality.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mobile HotSpot).  
(Apps) ➔  
You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create  
multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile  
phones.  
(
2. Activate the desired connection method.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Messaging).  
(Apps) ➔  
For more information see either"USB Tethering"on page 259  
(
Music  
Messenger  
This application allows you to play music files that you have  
stored on your microSD card. You can also create playlists.  
Messenger allows you to bring groups of friends together into  
a simple group conversation. When you get a new  
conversation in Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your  
device.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Music).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
From the Home screen, tap  
Messenger).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
218  
           
Opening and Navigating within Files  
DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the  
device. These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder  
location.  
My Files  
This application allows you to manage your sounds, images,  
videos, bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card  
data in one convenient location. This application allows you  
to launch a file if the associated application is already on  
your phone (ex: MP4).  
To open files:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My Files).  
(Apps) ➔  
From the Home screen, tap  
My Files).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
(
2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your  
selected file.  
Note: Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure  
• Home tab  
allows you to back up to the root directory.  
allows you to back up into a higher directory.  
and then tap View by to change the way the files  
with folders, subfolders, etc.  
• Up tab  
Press  
Note: The application lets you view supported image files and  
text files on both your internal storage and microSD  
card.  
are displayed on-screen. Choose from: List  
or Thumbnail  
Press for these additional options: Select all  
Create folder Search View by  
,
List and details,  
.
,
,
,
,
Sort by, and Settings  
.
Applications and Development  
219  
 
To navigate:  
1. Tap All files  
• Ringtones: this folder contains any ringtones you have  
purchased.  
Device storage/SD memory card to see  
the contents of either device or your internal SD card.  
2. The following folders may display:  
• S Memo: this folder contains all the S Memos you have written.  
Note: Different folders may appear depending on how your  
• ShareShot: displays the files shared via a group share shot  
session.  
phone is configured.  
• Alarms: this folder contains any alarm files you may have.  
• Android: the Android folder stores files that are used in Android  
applications.  
3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to  
launch the associated application.  
• Application: this folder contains app info for S Memo.  
• Bluetooth: this folder stores files sent via a Bluetooth device.  
• DCIM: this is the default location for pictures and videos taken  
by the device. Tap DCIM  
Camera to view the picture or  
video files.  
• Download: this folder contains downloads you have made.  
• Movies: this folder contains your Video and Movie files.  
• Music: this folder contains your Music files.  
• Notifications: this folder contains all of the notifications you  
have received.  
• Pictures: this folder contains your photos.  
• Podcasts: this folder contains all of your podcasts.  
220  
Enabling Location  
Navigation  
Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected  
turn-by-turn, GPS navigation system with voice guidance.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Location  
services  
.
2. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.  
3. Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data  
from sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to  
provide a better approximation of your current location.  
4. Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite  
locations.  
Caution! Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be  
wrong, dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.  
Important! To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your  
device in the following conditions:  
- inside a building or between buildings  
- in a tunnel or underground passage  
- in poor weather  
Navigation options  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(
Apps) ➔  
(
Navigation). The navigation application can be  
- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
- in a vehicle with tinted windows  
configured from the main screen.  
2. If prompted, read the on-screen disclaimer and tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Navigation).  
(Apps) ➔  
Accept  
3. Choose from the following on-screen options:  
• Driving/Walking/Bicycling : tap to configure the  
.
(
2. Read the on-screen disclaimer regarding the current  
release status of the Navigation app and tap Accept.  
method of travel. Selection of Walking would negate the need  
to track traffic jams and obstructions.  
• Speak destination: allows you to use the voice recognition  
feature to search for matching locations in your area.  
Applications and Development  
221  
           
• Type destination: allows you to manually enter a destination  
address (via the on-screen keypad).  
• Parking: displays parking information relative to your current  
location.  
• Go home: allows you to return to a designated “Home”  
location.  
• Gas stations: displays gas station location relative to your  
current location.  
When prompted initially to setup a home address, enter the  
• ATMs & banks: displays ATM and Bank locations relative to  
your current location.  
location into the Enter an address field and tap Save.  
• Map: enables the on-screen real-time map functionality.  
• Restaurants: displays restaurant and eatery locations relative  
to your current location.  
Navigation Map options  
Once on the map screen, you can access the following  
features:  
While on the map screen, press  
options:  
to access additional  
Set destination: returns you to the navigation options screen  
Destination: returns you to the previous Navigation options  
screen.  
where you can access a destination by either Speaking, Typing, or  
selecting from a Contacts entry or Starred Place.  
Search: manually search for a destination address, place, name  
of business, or even a type of business.  
Search by voice: Speak your destination instead of typing.  
Layers: allows you to switch map views:  
Traffic view: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic  
conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each  
color represents how fast the traffic is moving.  
• Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth.  
Satellite images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the  
best imagery available, most of which is approximately one to  
three years old.  
Layers: allows you to switch map views. See previous  
description.  
Settings: provides access to both Power settings (Screen  
dimming) and Information (Terms, privacy & notices).  
Exit navigation: terminates the application.  
Help: provides on-screen help.  
222  
 
Optical Reader  
The Photo reader allows you to use your camera to identify  
text (via definitions) and extract useful information.  
Play Books  
Formerly known as Google Books, this application allows you  
to read over 3 million ebooks on the go.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Optical Reader).  
(Apps) ➔  
Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Play Books: jump  
right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free  
ebooks. Personalize the reader to your liking, pick up reading  
where you left off on your phone or computer, and settle  
down with a great book on your Android phone!  
(
2. Aim the camera at an object containing written words.  
3. ALign the on-screen box atop the target text. Once  
detected, the device shows on-screen information  
such as link and descriptions.  
Note: You must logged into your Google account prior to using  
this feature.  
Phone  
This application provides the ability to make or answering  
calls, access the Contacts list, which is used to store contact  
information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Books).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
2. If prompted, tap Turn sync on. This synchronizes your  
books you have previously selected between your  
Books account and your device.  
From the Home screen, tap  
(Phone).  
3. Tap  
ebooks.  
to begin searching for both free and paid  
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to download the ebook  
to your device.  
Applications and Development  
223  
           
Play Magazines  
With Google Play Magazines, you can subscribe to your  
favorite magazines and have them available to read on your  
device at any time or any place.  
Play Movies & TV  
This application allows you to connect to the Play Store,  
download a movie and then watch it instantly.  
Note: You must logged into your Google account prior to using  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Magazines).  
(Apps) ➔  
this feature.  
(
2. Log on to your Google account if you have not already  
Learn more about Google Play Movies at:  
From the Home screen, tap  
Play Movies & TV). A list of videos sorted on the  
SD card displays in the Video list.  
.
(Apps) ➔  
3. At the Welcome! display, tap the shop icon  
to  
(
browse the full catalog.  
4. Read the Google Play Terms of Service and tap Accept  
5. Sweep the screen to the left or right to view  
Categories, Featured, Top Selling, and New Arrivals.  
6. Tap a magazine to see more information and  
subscribe.  
.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to subscribe to a  
magazine.  
224  
   
Accessing the Play Store  
Play Music  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
Also known as Google Music, allows you to browse, shop,  
and playback songs purchased from the Play Store. The  
music you choose is automatically stored in your Google  
Music library and instantly ready to play or download.  
(
Play Store).  
2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap  
Next  
.
From the Home screen, tap  
Play Music).  
(Apps) ➔  
3. Tap Existing and enter your Google account  
information.  
(
4. Tap Accept to agree to the Play Store terms of service.  
Play Store  
Downloading a New Google  
Application  
To download a new application, you will need to use your  
Google account to sign in to the Play Store. The home page  
provides several ways to find applications. The home page  
features applications and includes a list of item applications  
by category, a list of games, a link to search, and a link to My  
apps.  
Formerly known as the “Android Market”, this application  
provides access to downloadable applications and games to  
install on your phone. The Play Store also allows you to  
provide feedback and comments about an application, or flag  
an application that might be incompatible with your phone.  
Before using the Play Store, you must have a Google  
Account.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Play Store).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
2. Browse through the categories, find an application  
you're interested in, and tap the name.  
3. Read the application descriptions.  
Applications and Development  
225  
                 
7. On the main Play Store screen, press  
tap My Apps, tap an installed application in the list, and  
then tap Open  
and then  
Important! If the selected application requires access to data  
or control of a function on your device, the Play  
Store displays the information the application will  
access.  
.
Tip: The newly downloaded applications display in the  
applications list and are shown in alphabetical order if the  
View Type is set to Alphabetical grid or Alphabetical list, or  
at the end of the list if View type is set to Customizable  
grid.  
Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the  
application. Once you tap OK on this screen you are  
responsible for using this application on the device  
and the amount of data it uses. Use this feature  
with caution.  
4. Tap Install  
Accept & download.  
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may  
apply. Please contact your service provider for further  
details.  
Note: Use caution with applications which request access to  
any personal data, functions, or significant amounts of  
data usage times.  
5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay  
for the application.  
6. Check the progress of the current download by  
opening the Notifications panel. The content download  
icon  
bar.  
appears in the notification area of the status  
226  
Manage applications  
Launching an Installed Google  
Application  
This feature allows you to manage and remove installed  
applications. You can also view the amount of memory or  
resources used as well as the remaining memory and  
resources for each of the applications on your device and  
clear the data, cache, or defaults.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps).  
2. Tap the newly installed application. This application is  
typically located on the last Applications page.  
Unknown sources  
This feature can be used for Android application  
development. The feature allows developers to install  
non-Play Store applications.  
From the main Settings page, tap More tab ➔  
Application manager  
.
Clearing application cache and data  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab ➔  
From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security  
Unknown sources  
Application manager  
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.  
3. Tap Force stop Uninstall, Clear data Clear cache, or  
Clear defaults  
Uninstalling third-party applications  
.
.
Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it  
is active.  
,
,
.
Note: If Unknown sources is disabled, those applications  
without a certificate will not be allowed to download to  
your device.  
You can uninstall any application you downloaded and  
installed from the Play Store.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab ➔  
Application manager  
2. Tap the third-party application, and from the  
Application info screen, tap Uninstall  
Downloaded.  
.
Applications and Development  
227  
         
4. On its initial launch, navigate the application to begin  
use:  
POLARIS Office 5  
Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office  
compatible office suite. This application provides a central  
place for managing your documents online or offline.  
• New: creates a new office document.  
• Recent documents: provides a scrollable list of recently  
accessed documents.  
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable  
Document Format) files.  
• Menu: provides access to Settings and Help.  
• Samples: provides access to sample Word, PowerPoint, and  
Excel files.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
POLARIS Office 5).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
2. From the Registration screen, enter your Email  
• File Browser: allows you to search on your device and SD card  
for compatible documents.  
information (if desired) and tap Register to complete  
the process.  
– or –  
• Form type: allows you to quickly access your documents  
based on file type. Each type is separated into several available  
tabs located at the bottom of the screen, such as: Word, Excel,  
PowerPoint, Other, and PDF.  
Tap Skip to ignore this registration. The main Polaris  
Office screen displays.  
• Favorites: allows you to list only those documents tagged as  
Favorite.  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use Polaris Office.  
• View Together: once connected to the same Wi-Fi, you can  
share or collaborate with other Polaris users.  
228  
   
S Health  
S Memo  
S Health is a wellness application that allows you to better  
manage your health by providing you with relevant  
information.  
The S Memo application allows you to create memos using  
the keypad, your finger, or both. You can add images, voice  
recordings, and text all in one place.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
S Health).  
2. Read the introduction and tap Next  
(
Apps) ➔  
Creating a New Memo  
(
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
.
(
S Memo). The S Memo screen is displayed.  
3. Read the Terms and conditions information, place a  
2. Tap an existing Memo to open it then tap the screen to  
checkmark in the Agree checkbox.  
enter edit mode.  
– or –  
4. Tap Next  
5. Enter your personal information, then tap Start  
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to use S Health.  
7. Press and then tap Help for more detailed  
information.  
.
.
Tap  
to start a new memo in text mode with the  
to start a new memo in  
keypad displayed or tap  
drawing mode using your finger or a compatible  
on-screen writing tool. You can change back and forth  
in a memo to add text with the keypad and the pen.  
Applications and Development  
229  
     
The icons that you see displayed on the screen are described  
in the following table:  
3. From within an active memo, press  
to access the  
following options:  
Allows you to add free-format drawing.  
Displays the keypad to you can add text.  
Eraser tool allows you to erase marks and drawings.  
Undo the last action.  
Note: Depending on whether you have saved the memo, are in  
keypad mode, or in handwriting mode, the options will  
appear differently. The following is a list of the options  
you may see.  
• Share via: allows you to share your memo as either an Image  
file (.jpg), PDF file (.pdf), Plain text, or S Memo file (.snb) via  
Group Play, Wi-Fi Direct, Bluetooth, ChatON, Dropbox,  
Flipboard, Picasa, Google+, Messaging, Gmail, or Email.  
• Delete: allows you to delete the S Memo.  
Redo the last action that was undone.  
SAVE Saves the current memo and creates a new one.  
Changes the view mode.  
• Export: allows you to save the memo to your Gallery as either  
an Image file or PDF file.  
Providesaccesstoaquickselectionbar. Choosefrom:  
Takepicture, Images, Clipboard, Maps, Clipart. These  
elements can be used within the memo.  
• Save as: allows you to save the memo with a different name.  
• Add tag: allows you to set tags to add in searches.  
• Add as favorite: allows you to tag the current memo as a  
favorite.  
Make a voice recording to add to the memo.  
Add an additional page to the memo.  
• Change background: allows you to set the background for  
your memo. Swipe the screen to the left or right to select a  
background and then tap Done  
.
230  
 
• Edit pages: allows you to edit existing memo pages.  
• Create event: allows you to link the memo to your Calendar  
events.  
S Translator  
Allows you can easily translate words and phrases (verbal or  
text messages) into many different languages.  
• Set as: allows you to set a memo as a Contact icon, Home  
screen wallpaper, Lock screen wallpaper, or Home and lock  
screens.  
Note: Access to this feature requires that you already be  
logged in to your Samsung account application. For  
• Print: allows you to print the screen or Web page on a  
Samsung printer using Wi-Fi.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
S Translator).  
(Apps) ➔  
When you are finished creating your memo, tap Save on the  
top menu bar.  
(
2. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to log  
into your Samsung account.  
To translate text:  
1. At the S Translator screen, tap the top language bar to  
select your target/source language. Default is Spanish.  
2. Tap the bottom language bar to select the destination  
language that you would like to translate to. Default is  
English (US).  
3. Enter text into the top box and it will automatically be  
translated into the lower box.  
Applications and Development  
231  
   
4. Tap the selected  
(Translate) button within the  
4. Tap the selected  
(Speak) button to translate  
bottom field. The top target language field is then  
updated with the new translation.  
using your selected input language and voice.  
Example, if trying to speak in English and get a Spanish  
translation, tap the Speak (English (US)) button and wait for  
the text to appear on-screen.  
To translate using your voice:  
Important! The two on-screen buttons at the bottom of the  
application correspond to the two currently  
selected languages.  
5. Press  
for additional options. Choose from: History,  
Favorite, Preset phrases, TTS speech rate, and Help  
S Voice  
Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition system that  
allows you to initiate several common tasks without having  
to touch the phone. Features include: Call, Text, Navigate,  
Play music, Memo, and Driving mode.  
1. At the S Translator screen, tap the left voice button to  
verbally speak the selected language (corresponds to  
top field).  
2. Wait a few seconds until the on-screen notification  
shows “Speak in...” then speak using the selected  
language.  
From the Home screen, tap  
S Voice).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
3. Within a few seconds, confirm the translated text now  
appears in the other translation field.  
232  
     
Samsung Apps  
Samsung Hub  
Allows you to easily download an abundance of applications  
that are directly compatible with your device. This includes  
games, news, reference, social networking, navigation, and  
more. Samsung Apps makes your Smartphone smarter.  
Samsung Hub is Samsung’s integrated store for media  
content that offers a comprehensive and consistent media  
service experience. You can browse and purchase all media  
content within a single store front.  
Note: Access to this feature requires that you already be  
logged in to your Samsung account application. For  
Note: Access to this feature requires that you already be  
logged in to your Samsung account application. For  
1. Confirm you are currently signed into your Samsung  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
account.  
(
2. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Apps).  
3. If prompted, read the Disclaimer, Terms and conditions,  
and Privacy policy and tap Accept  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
(Apps) ➔  
(
2. If a Wi-Fi connection is not detected, tap Connect to  
use your current mobile network.  
.
Note: Using your mobile network may result in additional  
charges depending on your payment plan.  
Applications and Development  
233  
   
3. Use your fingers to scroll across the available Samsung  
AllShare/Samsung Link Definitions:  
Hub screen. You can select Combined view (Music,  
Samsung Link/  
AllShare Play  
This new feature builds on the  
previous AllShare Play functionality. It  
includes features such as Web storage  
integration and social networking  
integration. This is a Web service  
thatrequires usingaSamsungaccount.  
Video, Books, and Games), Music  
,
Video, Books, or  
Games  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions to browse, view, or  
purchase media.  
5. Press  
and then tap Help for additional  
Group Play  
A subset feature of Samsung Link, this  
allows you to mirror photos and  
multimedia presentations with other  
members of your current Wi-Fi  
group. Users must be on the same  
Wi-Fi and provide an access code to  
join the group.  
information.  
Samsung Link  
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung  
mobile phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps  
tabs on who calls or sends text messages with real-time,  
on-screen monitoring. Samsung’s Samsung Link makes  
staying connected easy.  
AllShare Cast  
(with Hub  
accessory)  
This feature functions with an  
external AllShareCast Hub to fully  
mirror what is currently displayed on  
your device to the external TV.  
Allows users to share their in-device media content with  
other external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living  
Network Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also  
be DLNA-compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs  
via a digital multimedia streamer.  
234  
       
Important! You must first connect both of your communicating  
devices to the same Wi-Fi and be using an  
active/registered Samsung account prior to using  
this application.  
Note: If the main screen still shows a Sign in box, close the  
application and restart it.  
4. Tap Start and follow the on-screen prompts.  
Settings  
This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your  
phone. It includes such settings as: display, security,  
memory, and any extra settings associated with your phone.  
Important! The Samsung account manages the access  
information (username/password) to several  
applications, such as Samsung Link.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Settings).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
– or –  
From the Home screen press  
Settings  
and then tap  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Samsung Link).  
(Apps) ➔  
.
(
2. If prompted, read the on-screen message about  
network charges and tap OK to continue and return to  
the main screen.  
3. If prompted, tap Sign in to log into your Samsung  
account.  
Applications and Development  
235  
   
Story Album  
With Story Album, you can create a digital Album of your  
story in media. Special moments will be on a timeline, and if  
you wish, you can have your album published as a hard copy.  
T-Mobile My Account  
This application provides you online access to account  
information such as your current activity, billing information,  
service plans, downloads, and other information.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Story Album).  
(Apps) ➔  
Note: Wi-Fi connection must be disabled prior to use, this  
application requires use of a T-Mobile network  
connection.  
(
2. Read the introductory information and tap Next  
3. Tap Start to begin your Story Album.  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
T-Mobile My Account).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
5. Press  
and then tap Help for additional  
2. If prompted, follow the on-screen information for  
information.  
what’s new in the app.  
Note: Some features may require you to log into your account.  
3. The application screen provides several available  
options:  
• Account Info provides access to account-specific features  
such as: Notifications.  
• Device Support provides details about your current billing  
summary.  
236  
   
• Notifications provides about both your current plan, other  
available plans and other related services.  
• MobileLife FamilyWhere provides links to other T-Mobile  
related information.  
Talk  
You can instant message with Google Talk. Google Talk  
allows you to communicate with other people who are also  
connected with Google Talk on the phone or on the web.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Talk).  
(Apps) ➔  
T-Mobile Name ID  
Allows you to modify the on-screen Caller ID information.  
Name ID identifies unknown callers by Name, City, and State.  
(
1. From the Home screen, tap  
T-Mobile Name ID).  
(Apps) ➔  
TripAdvisor  
With the TripAdvisor, you can plan and have your perfect trip.  
With over 75 million reviews and opinions by travelers, it is  
easy to find the best hotels, restaurants, and fun things to do.  
(
2. Choose an on-screen option.  
T-Mobile TV  
T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV  
and Video on Demand.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
TripAdvisor).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
2. Sign in with your Samsung Account if you have not  
already done so.  
From the Home screen, tap  
T-Mobile TV).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to use TripAdvisor.  
4. Press  
for additional options.  
Applications and Development  
237  
         
Video  
Voice Recorder  
The Video player application plays video files stored locally.  
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to  
one minute long and then immediately send it as a message.  
From the Home screen, tap  
Video).  
(Apps) ➔  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Recorder).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
(
2. Tap  
(
Record) to record an audio file.  
Visual Voicemail  
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who  
left a voicemail message, and listen to the any message they  
want without being limited to chronological order.  
3. Tap  
(Stop) to stop recording. The file  
automatically saves to the Voice list.  
4. Tap Pause) to pause the recording of an audio  
(
From the Home screen, tap  
Visual Voicemail).  
(Apps) ➔  
file.  
(
5. Tap  
(Cancel) to cancel the recording of an audio  
file.  
6. Tap  
(
List) to display a list of current recordings.  
7. Tap  
(Recording quality) to adjust the recording  
quality. Choose from: Normal or High quality recording.  
8. From the Recorded files page, press  
and then  
select one of the following:  
238  
         
• Share via and select a method in which to share this audio file.  
Selections are: Bluetooth, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, Messaging,  
or Wi-Fi Direct. Refer to each specific section, depending on  
the method you selected to send this voice recording.  
Noise reduction: allows you to activate/deactivate background  
noise suppression.  
Recording volume: allows you to assign the ambient noise  
quality of your current location so the device can better detect  
audio. Choose from High or Low.  
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more voice recordings. Tap  
the recordings to delete and tap Delete  
.
Channel: allows you to assign recording mode to either Mono  
or Stereo.  
• Settings: the following settings are available:  
Storage: allows you to choose where your recordings will be  
saved. Select between Phone or memory card.  
Recording quality: allows you to set the recording quality to  
High or Normal.  
Skip interval: allows you to assign a skip length.  
• End: allows you to exit the application.  
Voice Search  
Launches the Google Now application that is used for voice  
to text Internet searching.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Voice Search).  
Limit for MMS: allows you to select On or Off. If you Limit for  
MMS by selecting On, you will be assured that the recording can  
be sent in a message.  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Contextual filename: (requires GPS tagging) allows you to  
adjust the filename based on contextual information such as  
your current GPS location.  
2. When prompted, speak into the built-in microphone.  
3. Use the on-screen options to find a matching search  
term.  
Default name: allows you to choose the name prefix for your  
recordings. For example, if your Default name is Voice, your  
recordings would be named Voice 001, Voice 002, Voice 003,  
etc.  
Applications and Development  
239  
     
VPN Client  
This is a full-featured VPN Client that provides support for the  
latest IPSec VPN standards and provides interoperability with  
support for all major VPN Gateways.  
YouTube  
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can  
upload and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
YouTube).  
2. Tap the search field  
(Apps) ➔  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
VPN Client).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
(
to search for specific videos,  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to configure the VPN  
scroll down to browse through the main page  
thumbnails, or scroll to the bottom to explore additional  
options.  
Client.  
Options include: Add VPN Connection or My VPN Connections.  
3. To view a video, tap an available preview thumbnail or  
tap the title link.  
WatchON  
With the WatchON application, you can use your device as a  
remote control for your TV.  
To configure YouTube Settings:  
Press  
following parameters:  
• General  
and then tap Settings and configure the  
Note: Access to this feature requires that you already be  
logged in to your Samsung account application. For  
High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all  
videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile  
network.  
From the Home screen, tap  
WatchON).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by  
on-screen captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or  
Huge.  
240  
             
Uploads specifies network preferences for uploads.  
Content localization allows you to prioritize channels and  
videos from a specific country or region.  
Preload watch later allows you to enable the preload function  
on selected videos so you can watch them later. Read the data  
usage information and tap OK to accept the terms.  
Improve YouTube allows you to anonymously send YouTube  
information to help improve the application.  
Note: Preloading YouTube videos will use some of your  
device’s storage space and may result in additional  
charges if your Wi-Fi plan is not unlimited.  
• Channel Feed Content  
Sets the content that you want to appear within your channel  
feed. All activity is the default option.  
• About  
• Search  
Help provides answers to most YouTube questions.  
Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.  
Google Mobile Terms of Service  
YouTube Terms of Service  
Clear search history allows you to clear previous YouTube  
searches from showing up in the YouTube search box.  
Never remember history allows you to force YouTube to never  
store search history information.  
Google Mobile Privacy Policy  
SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for  
videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these  
videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:  
Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict.  
YouTube Privacy Policy  
Open source licenses  
App version displays the software version for the current  
YouTube application.  
• Preloading  
Preload subscriptions allows you to preload (or go get videos  
while on Wi-Fi and charging) your subscription videos.  
To watch a high quality video:  
Press and then tap Settings  
quality on mobile  
General  
High  
.
Applications and Development  
241  
 
Section 9: Connections  
Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to  
quickly connect to the Web.  
Navigating with the Browser  
1. Tap an entry to select an item.  
Internet  
2. Sweep the screen with your finger in an up or down  
motion to scroll through a website.  
Your device is equipped with a Google browser to navigate  
the mobile Web. This section explains how to navigate the  
browser and use the basic features.  
3. To return to a previous page, tap  
4. To move forward to a Web page, tap  
Browser Options  
.
.
Accessing the Internet  
To access the Browser:  
1. From the top of the browser screen, select one of the  
available options:  
From the Home screen, tap  
Internet).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
• Navigation: use the forward and back buttons to navigate  
through your browsing activity.  
Note: You must disable your Wi-Fi connection if you wish  
to view the T-Mobile home page  
• Refresh: reloads the current page.  
You may be prompted to allow your device to use your  
current location.  
• Windows: displays a list of the windows you have open.  
• Bookmarks: provides access to the Bookmarks screen.  
– or –  
From the home page, press  
following options:  
to access the  
• Homepage: displays the home Web page.  
242  
             
• New window: launches a new browser window. By default,  
this screen shows the home page.  
• Desktop view: allows you to assign the browser to display the  
current page in the desktop view (to closely mimic the display  
as it would appear on a Desktop computer).  
• Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.  
• Add shortcut: allows you to add a shortcut to your Home  
screen.  
• Brightness: allows you to assign a brightness level specifically  
for the browser window. This is independent of the brightness  
assigned within the device’s Settings menu.  
• Save page: allows you to store the current page in memory so  
that it can be read later even if you loose your Internet  
connection. It is saved in your Saved pages folder.  
• Share via: allows you to share the page using Bluetooth,  
ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google, Google+,  
Messaging, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
• Print: provides print access on compatible Samsung printers.  
• Settings: allows you to change the way you view your web  
pages by changing these options. For more information, refer  
• Help: allows you view additional information concerning the  
Internet application  
• Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.  
• Incognito mode: pages viewed in incognito mode won’t  
appear within your browser history or search history, and no  
traces (such as cookies) are left on your device. For more  
• Saved pages: contains web pages you have saved using the  
Save page option.  
• History: provides access to your History screen.  
Connections  
243  
 
Entering a URL  
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL.  
Websites are optimized for viewing on your phone.  
Adding and Deleting Windows  
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time.  
To add a new window:  
To enter a URL and go to a particular website:  
1. From your browser window, tap  
New window).  
2. A new browser window displays.  
(Windows) ➔  
(
From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the  
screen, enter the URL and tap  
Search the Internet  
.
Note: The number of currently open windows is displayed at  
To perform an Internet search using keywords:  
1. From within the Google search application, tap the  
Google search field, enter the keyword(s) to search  
using the on-screen keypad.  
the bottom of the Windows screen.  
3. Scroll across the screen to view the currently active  
windows and tap an entry to launch the selected  
Internet window.  
2. Tap the entry from the list of search results that are  
displayed.  
To delete an existing window:  
3. Tap a link to view the website.  
1. From your browser window, tap  
(Windows).  
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate your  
target window.  
3. Tap  
next to the listing to delete the window.  
244  
     
To exit from the incognito window:  
1. From your browser window, tap  
Going Incognito  
(Windows).  
The incognito feature allows you to view Internet sites  
outside of the normal browsing. Pages viewed in this  
incognito window won’t appear within your browser history  
or search history, and no traces (such as cookies) are left on  
your device.  
2. Scroll across the available windows and locate the  
incognito window. The incognito icon  
the upper-left of the new browser window while you  
are in this mode.  
appears in  
3. Tap  
window.  
next to the incognito listing to delete this  
Note: Any downloaded files will be preserved and will stay on  
your device after you exit the incognito mode.  
Using Bookmarks  
To add a new incognito window:  
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to  
quickly and easily access it at a future time. The URLs  
(website addresses) of the bookmarked sites display in the  
Bookmarks page. From the Bookmarks page you can also  
view your Most visited websites and view your History.  
1. From your browser window, press  
Incognito mode  
and select  
.
2. At the information prompt, tap OK  
.
3. A new browser window displays.  
1. From the webpage, tap  
(Bookmarks).  
The Bookmarks page displays.  
2. Press  
to display the following options:  
• List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view  
a thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select  
List view to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL  
listed.  
Connections  
245  
         
• Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new  
bookmarks.  
Adding Bookmarks  
1. From the webpage, tap  
(Add bookmark).  
• Delete: Erases selected bookmarks.  
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the  
bookmark and the URL.  
• Change order: Rearranges the current bookmarks.  
• Move to folder: Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected  
folder.  
3. Select a storage location for your new bookmark.  
4. Update the title of the Bookmark and confirm the URL.  
5. Tap Save. The new save page now appears on the  
Bookmarks page.  
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and  
hold a bookmark for the following options:  
• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.  
• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the  
Editing Bookmarks  
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the  
bookmark you want to edit.  
2. Tap Edit bookmark  
.
• Add shortcut: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked webpage to  
your phone’s Home screen.  
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the  
bookmark or the URL.  
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth,  
ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Flipboard, Gmail, Google, Google+,  
Messaging, S Memo, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
4. Tap the Location field to assign a new folder location.  
5. Tap Save or Cancel to exit the operation.  
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more  
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.  
246  
         
Deleting Bookmarks  
Using Web History  
The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed  
websites. These entries can be used to return to previously  
unmarked web pages.  
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the  
bookmark you want to delete.  
2. Tap Delete bookmark  
.
1. From an active Web page, press  
History  
2. Select a visited range category. Choose from: Today  
Last 7 days, or Most visited  
and then tap  
3. At the confirmation window, tap OK  
.
.
Emptying the Cookies  
,
A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website  
during navigation. In addition to containing some site-  
specific information, a cookie can also contain some  
personal information (such as a username and password)  
which might pose a security risk if not properly managed.  
You can clear these cookies from your device at any time.  
.
3. Tap an entry to display the webpage.  
– or –  
Press  
and then tap Clear history to delete the  
current History list.  
1. From an active Web page, press  
Settings Privacy Delete personal data  
2. Tap Cookies and site data to create a checkmark.  
3. Tap Done  
and then tap  
Saved Pages  
The Saved pages list provides you with a list of the websites  
that you have saved.  
1. From an active Web page, press  
Saved pages  
.
.
and then tap  
.
A list of your saved webpages is displayed with their  
Name. The webpages that have been visited the most  
will appear at the top.  
2. Tap any entry to display the webpage.  
Connections  
247  
         
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for  
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.  
• Delete personal data: allows you to delete all personal data  
such as Browsing history, Cache, Cookies and site data,  
Passwords, Auto-fill data, and Location access.  
Accessibility:  
Browser Settings  
To configure browser settings:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(Internet).  
2. Press  
and then tap Settings  
.
3. Choose an option from the following categories:  
Basics:  
Text scaling: allows you to preview the text size, scale the text  
size using a slider bar, set the zoom amount on double tap, and  
minimize the font size using a slider bar.  
• Force zoom: allows you to override the website’s request to  
control zoom.  
• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web  
browser.  
• Auto-fill text: Allows you to set the text used for the Web form  
auto-fill feature.  
Text encoding: adjusts the current text encoding.  
• Fullscreen: allows you to use Fullscreen mode to hide the  
status bar.  
Privacy:  
• Search and URL suggestions: displays predictions of related  
queries and popular websites in the address bar as you type.  
• Preload available links before opening: allows you improve  
performance when loading pages.  
Text booster: allows you to boost the text size on PC websites  
to make it easier to read.  
Content settings:  
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from  
any previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to  
disable this function.  
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and  
read cookies from your device.  
• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your  
location.  
248  
     
• Enable JavaScript: Enables Javascript for the current Web  
page. Without this feature, some pages may not display  
properly. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.  
• Block pop-ups: Prevents popup advertisement or windows  
from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to disable  
this function.  
Bandwidth management:  
• Preload web pages: Allows the browser to preload Web  
pages. Choose from Always, Only on Wi-Fi, or Never.  
• Load images: Allows web page images to load along with the  
other text components of a loaded website.  
• Open pages in overview: Displays an overview of newly  
opened web pages.  
• Default storage: Allows you to set your default storage to  
Device or Memory Card.  
• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual  
websites.  
• Enable notifications: Allows website notifications. Select  
Always on, On demand, or Off.  
• Clear notifications: Deletes website notification access  
information.  
• Reset settings: Restores all settings to default.  
Connections  
249  
Bluetooth  
About Bluetooth  
Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.  
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that  
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth  
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and  
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and  
wireless devices. The Bluetooth communication range is  
usually up to approximately 30 feet.  
Bluetooth Status Indicators  
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status  
at a glance:  
Displays when Bluetooth is active.  
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and  
communicating.  
Turning Bluetooth On and Off  
To turn Bluetooth on:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Bluetooth Settings  
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of  
the characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service,  
including:  
Settings Connections tab).  
(
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider  
to the right to turn it on.  
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth  
communication and description  
The slider color indicates the activation status. When  
active,  
displays in the Status area.  
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other  
Bluetooth devices  
To turn Bluetooth off:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address  
Settings  
Connections tab.  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider  
to the left to turn it off.  
250  
               
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Note: Your device visibility is based on the time set within the  
and then tap  
Visible time-out field (2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 1 Hour, or  
Settings  
2. Verify Bluetooth is active (indicated by  
3. Press and tap the Visibility timeout  
Connections tab Bluetooth.  
Never timeout). Press  
(Menu) Visibility timeout.  
ON  
).  
This value appears as a countdown within this Visibility  
timeout field.  
,
Received files  
,
and Help fields to set the options.  
To scan for Bluetooth devices:  
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.  
To change your Bluetooth name:  
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Home screen, press  
2. From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page, tap  
Scan to search for visible external  
and then tap  
Settings  
More tab About device.  
Bluetooth-compatible devices such as headsets,  
devices, printers, and computers.  
3. Tap the Device name field and use the on-screen  
keyboard to edit the current device name.  
To review your Bluetooth received files:  
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.  
4. Tap  
to erase the current device name and enter  
a new name for this device using the keyboard.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, press  
tap Received files  
and then  
5. Tap OK to confirm your setting.  
.
To set visibility:  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the top of the Bluetooth settings page, toggle the  
state of the visibility check mark. Activating this feature  
enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair  
and communicate.  
Connections  
251  
         
6. The external device must accept the connection and  
enter your device’s PIN code.  
Pairing Bluetooth Devices  
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted  
connections between your device and another Bluetooth  
device. When you pair devices, they share a passkey,  
allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the  
discovery and authentication process.  
Once successfully paired to an external device,  
displays in the Status area.  
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other  
Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations  
may be different, and functions such as transfer or  
exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth-  
compatible devices.  
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time  
process. Once pairing is established the devices  
continue to recognize their partnership and exchange  
information without entering a passcode.  
Important! If callers can not hear you during a call while using  
a paired Bluetooth headset (with built-in  
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:  
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.  
microphone), verify the Call audio option is enabled  
within the entry’s Bluetooth Settings page.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the Visibility field  
(shown by the device name).  
Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an  
external device. This is shown by a green check mark.  
3. Tap Scan. Your device displays a list of discovered in-  
range Bluetooth devices.  
4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.  
5. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK  
.
252  
 
Configuring Bluetooth Device Settings  
Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device  
Some connected Bluetooth devices are capable of more than  
just functioning as a headphone, but also have built in  
microphones for picking up voice. Although both functions  
are detected by the device and activated, there might be  
times when you need to change or update these settings for  
Phone and Media Audio:  
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection  
between the device and your phone, but retains the  
knowledge of the pairing. At a later point when you wish to  
reconnect the device, there is no need to setup the  
connection information again.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
I can hear the other person but they can’t hear me...  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously  
paired device (from the bottom of the page).  
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.  
I want to use my Bluetooth device only as a headphone  
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap  
(Settings).  
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur  
automatically if the paired device goes out of range of  
your phone or it is powered off.  
3. Toggle the Call audio field to activate/de-activate the  
Bluetooth device’s on-board microphone.  
4. Toggle the Media audio field to activate/de-activate the  
Bluetooth device’s headset functions.  
Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device  
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection  
record” and upon reconnection would require that you  
re-enter all the previous pairing information.  
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.  
Note: If callers can not hear you during a call while using a  
paired Bluetooth headset (with built-in microphone),  
verify the Call audio option is enabled within the entry’s  
Bluetooth Settings page.  
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap  
Unpair to delete the paired device.  
(
Settings)  
Connections  
253  
         
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth  
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities,  
you may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or  
other items using a Bluetooth connection.  
Enable Downloading for Web  
Applications  
Important! Before you can download a web application you  
must insert an SD into the phone and enable the  
Unknown sources feature (enables downloading).  
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be  
enabled on both your phone and the external device, and  
the recipient’s device must be visible.  
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings More tab) Security  
sources check box.  
and then tap  
visible.  
(
Unknown  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
(Contacts).  
3. Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the  
2. Tap OK to allow install of non-Play Store applications.  
Tap again to remove the check mark and disable the  
installation of non-Play Store applications.  
on-screen context menu.  
4. Tap Share namecard via  
Bluetooth and select a  
paired external Bluetooth device.  
Warning! Not all web applications are safe to download. In  
order to protect your phone and data, use the Play  
Store to install web applications. For more  
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and  
communicating for the pairing to be successful.  
5. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your  
notifications list.  
254  
       
PC Connections  
Note: If you are a Windows XP user, ensure that you have  
Windows XP Service Pack 3 or higher installed on your  
computer. Also, ensure that you have Samsung Kies 2.0  
or Windows Media Player 10 or higher installed on your  
computer.  
You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC  
data cable using various USB connection modes.  
Media device (MTP): allows you to transfer media files in  
Windows, or using an Android file transfer on a Mac.  
Camera (PTP): allows you to transfer photos using the camera  
software, and transfer any files onto a PC that does not  
support MTP.  
Connecting as a Storage Device  
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and  
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the  
device, you can also access the files directory from the  
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.  
Kies: allows you to manage music, movies and photos. You  
can also backup precious contacts and calendars, download  
apps and podcasts and automatically upgrade device  
firmware. Kies conveniently syncs your life across all your  
devices.  
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a  
removable disk, separate from the internal memory.  
Note: To sync your device to your computer it is highly  
recommended that you install Samsung Kies which is  
available at http://www.samsung.com/kies (for Windows/  
Mac).  
1. Connect the USB cable to the device and connect the  
cable to the computer. After a few seconds, a pop-up  
window displays on the PC when connected.  
2. Open the folder to view files.  
3. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.  
Connections  
255  
   
Activating Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi  
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off  
(deactivated). Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover  
and connect to compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access  
Points).  
About Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain  
types of Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi  
communication requires access to an existing and accessible  
Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can either be  
Open (unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or Secured  
(requiring knowledge of the Router name and password).  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings Connections tab).  
(
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the  
right to turn it on. The device scans for available  
in-range wireless networks and displays them under  
Wi-Fi networks on the same screen.  
Note: After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi  
network, the Wi-Fi Calling feature will automatically be  
enabled.  
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Note: For additional information on WPS Connections, refer to  
Settings  
Connections tab Wi-Fi.  
The network names and security settings (Open  
network or Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi  
networks display in the Wi-Fi networks section.  
2. Tap the network you wish to connect to.  
Note: When you select an open network you are automatically  
connected.  
256  
             
3. Enter a wireless password (if necessary).  
4. Tap Connect  
Manually Add a New Network Connection  
1. From the Wi-Fi network screen, tap Add Wi-Fi network  
2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless  
Access Point).  
.
.
Wi-Fi Status Indicators  
The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:  
3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This  
must match the current security setting on your target  
WAP.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point  
(WAP).  
4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.  
5. Tap Connect to store the new information and connect  
to the target WAP.  
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an  
available open wireless network.  
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and  
configured for a direct connection to another  
compatible device in the same direct  
communication mode.  
Note: No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the  
second time to connect to a previously accessed or  
secured wireless network. The WAP key is required  
when the device is reset using factory default settings.  
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and  
communicating  
Displays when Wi-Fi is being used as a Mobile  
HotSpot feature is active and communicating.  
Connections  
257  
   
Deactivating Wi-Fi  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings  
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up  
and then tap  
Settings  
Connections tab.  
many of the device’s Wi-Fi services, including:  
Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the  
left to turn it off.  
– or –  
Viewing the device’s MAC Address  
Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP  
Activate and Deactivate Wi-Fi from the Notification bar.  
To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:  
1. From the Home screen, press and then tap  
Settings Connections tab Wi-Fi  
2. Press and then tap Advanced  
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and  
.
Bluetooth can reduce battery life and use times.  
.
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings  
Connections tab Wi-Fi.  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the  
right to turn it on.  
3. Tap Scan  
.
258  
         
To connect using USB Tethering:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
USB Tethering  
(
Apps) ➔  
This option allows you to share your device’s mobile data  
connection via a direct USB connection between your device  
and a single computer. The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a  
wireless version of this same functionality and allows you to  
provide Internet connectivity to multiple devices.  
(Mobile HotSpot).  
– or –  
From the Home screen, press  
Settings  
networks  
and then tap  
(Connections tab) More  
Tethering and Mobile HotSpot  
.
Note: You can not mount your device’s microSD card to your  
computer while using the USB tethering feature.  
If additional software or USB drivers are required,  
2. Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your  
device.  
3. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu. This places  
a green check mark next to the entry and activates the  
feature. A Tethering or HotSpot active notification  
briefly appears on the screen.  
Look for the Tethering active icon  
bar area of the screen.  
in the Status  
4. Read the on-screen notification regarding data use and  
tap OK  
.
Connections  
259  
         
To disconnect tethering:  
To activate the Mobile HotSpot service:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Mobile HotSpot).  
(Mobile HotSpot).  
– or –  
From the Home screen, press  
Settings  
networks  
2. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove  
the check mark and deactivate the feature.  
and then tap  
Connections tab) More  
3. Remove the USB cable from the device.  
(
Tethering and Mobile HotSpot  
.
Mobile HotSpot  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Mobile HotSpot  
slider to the right to turn it on.  
This feature allows you to turn your device into a Wi-Fi  
hotspot. The feature works best when used in conjunction  
with 4G/LTE data services (although 3G service can also be  
used).  
3. Read the on-screen notification regarding data use and  
tap OK  
.
The Mobile HotSpot connectivity is a wireless version of this  
same functionality and allows you to provide Internet  
connectivity to multiple devices.  
4. Edit the Network SSID name and then write it down.  
5. Enable the Broadcast network name (SSID) field if you  
would like to broadcast your SSID name to nearby  
devices.  
Important! The Mobile HotSpot service cannot be active when  
device is connected to Wi-Fi. Please disconnect  
6. Verify the Security field is set to WPA2 PSK  
.
your Wi-Fi connection prior to active this service.  
7. Enter a new password then write it down.  
Additional options include SHow password and Show advanced  
options.  
8. Tap Save to store the new settings.  
Note: You must have a tethering plan on your account in order  
to use the Mobile HotSpot. You cannot use data on the  
device while using Mobile HotSpot.  
260  
         
9. Confirm the Mobile HotSpot active icon  
appears  
4. Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an  
at the top of the screen.  
Internet connection.  
To change the Portable HotSpot password:  
Note: By default, the connection is not secured.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mobile HotSpot).  
2. Tap Mobile HotSpot Configure  
3. Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Note: Using your Mobile HotSpot drains your device’s battery  
much faster. The best way to keep using the device as a  
HotSpot is by connecting to a Charger.  
.
.
4. With security enabled, delete the previous password  
and enter a new one into the Password field.  
To connect to the HotSpot:  
1. Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target  
device (laptop, media device, etc.).  
Important! The more complex the password, the harder it will  
be for intruders to break your security. It is  
recommended that you not use names, birthdays,  
or other personal information.  
2. Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the external device and  
select your device’s Mobile HotSpot name from the  
network list.  
The SSID name for your device’s hotspot is determined by what  
5. Tap Save to store the new settings.  
you entered into the Network SSID field.  
You can change the name by tapping Configure  
Network  
SSID and changing the entry.  
3. Select this HotSpot and follow your on-screen  
instructions to complete the connection.  
Connections  
261  
     
To mange connected devices:  
This feature allows you to provide MAC filtering on your  
device. This is similar to a “VIP list” where only device on the  
list are allowed access.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Mobile HotSpot).  
2. Tap Mobile HotSpot Allowed devices  
3. Tap Add new device) to add devices to the  
(Apps) ➔  
(
.
(
allowed for connection list.  
4. Enter the Device name and Mac address.  
5. Tap OK to save the new device.  
262  
   
Section 10: Changing Your Settings  
This section explains the device settings for your device. It  
includes such settings as: display, security, memory, and any  
extra settings associated with your device.  
Connections  
:
This tab allows you to see all of settings related  
to the connection of your device to external  
sources. Features include: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data  
usage, More networks (Airplane mode, Mobile  
networks, Tethering and Mobile HotSpot, VPN, and  
Wi-Fi Calling), NFC, S Beam, Nearby devices,  
Screen Mirroring, and Kies via Wi-Fi.  
Accessing the Settings Tabs  
From the Home screen, tap  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Settings).  
– or –  
Press  
and then tap Settings.  
The four available tabs are then displayed. The  
previous Settings list is now broken down into four  
available tabs described below.  
My device  
:
My device  
This tab provides access to device configuration  
and customization features. Features include:  
Lock screen, Display, LED indicator, Sound, Home  
screen mode, Call, Blocking mode, Power saving  
mode, Accessory, Accessibility, Language and  
input, Motions and gestures, Smart screen, Air  
view, and Voice control.  
Settings Tabs - Overview  
The Settings are divided into 4 main groups. When the  
Settings screen displays, the following 4 tabs are located at  
the top of the screen:  
Changing Your Settings  
263  
             
Wi-Fi Settings  
Accounts  
:
This section describes the Wi-Fi settings. For more  
This tab provides both the ability to create and  
modify your accounts (ex: Samsung account,  
Email, etc.), configure Cloud functionality, and  
access Backup and reset features.  
Activating Wi-Fi  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Connections tab).  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the  
Settings  
(
More  
:
This tab provides access to the remaining set of  
devicesettingsnotlistedundertheotherthreetabs.  
These include Location services, Security,  
Application manager, Battery, Storage, Date and  
time, and About device.  
ON  
right to turn it on  
available in-range wireless networks and displays  
them under Wi-Fi networks on the same screen.  
. The device scans for  
Wi-Fi settings  
Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your device automatically  
uses Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile services.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Note: The settings for your device are described below using  
the order in which they appear in the Settings menu.  
Functions found under the Connections tab are listed  
first, followed by My device, Accounts, and More tabs.  
Wi-Fi  
2. Press  
settings as desired.  
.
and then tap Advanced. Configure the  
The available Wi-Fi connection are displayed with a security  
type displayed next to them.  
264  
         
Network Notification  
Passpoint  
By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the  
Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi  
network. You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to  
receive notifications.  
Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Passpoint™ allows users connect to Wi-Fi  
hotspot networks by simplifying the process of connecting to  
the correct network. In addition, this connection type  
provides WPA2™ security protection for safe data  
communication. Mobile devices, such as handsets and  
tablets, that are certified for Passpoint can still be used in  
existing hotspots. Users on passpoint-enabled hotspots, will  
also enjoy Wi-Fi roaming.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Wi-Fi  
.
2. Press  
and then tap Advanced  
.
3. Tap Network notification. A check mark displayed next  
to the feature indicates Network notification is active.  
4. Tap Network notification again to remove the check  
mark and deactivate this feature.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Wi-Fi  
.
2. Press  
and then tap Advanced  
.
3. In a single motion touch and slide the Passpoint slider  
to the right to turn it on.  
4. Tap the Passpoint field and begin the on-screen  
process of connecting to a compatible AP.  
Changing Your Settings  
265  
 
Wi-Fi During Sleep  
Check for Internet Service  
Allows you to check for Wi-Fi Internet access once connected  
to a WAP (Wireless Access Point).  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
By default, when your device enter a sleep mode, your Wi-Fi  
connection stays on all the time. If the feature is Never  
enabled during sleep that current data usage is taken over by  
your SIM and its network connection.  
Wi-Fi  
.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
2. Press  
and then tap Advanced  
.
Wi-Fi  
2. Press  
during sleep  
.
3. Tap the Check for Internet service field to activate the  
feature. A green check mark indicates the feature is  
active.  
and then tap Advanced  
.
Keep Wi-Fi on  
3. Select an available option:  
Finding your WI-Fi Address Information  
• Always: maintains your current active Wi-Fi connection even  
during sleep.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Wi-Fi  
.
• Only when plugged in: maintains the active Wi-Fi connection  
only when the device detects it is connected to a power supply.  
This reduced the drain on your device’s battery.  
• Never (increase data usage): shuts off the current Wi-Fi  
connection during sleep and diverts any current data usage to  
the cellular network connection.  
2. Press  
and then tap Advanced  
.
3. Locate the MAC Address and IP Address information at  
the bottom of the screen.  
• MAC address: view your device’s MAC address, required  
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).  
• IP address: view your device’s IP address.  
266  
   
Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network  
WPS Push Button  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) feature (sometimes  
associated with a physical or on-screen button on most  
WAPs) allows you to pair your device and WAP without the  
need for entering a passcode. This process is similar to Wi-Fi  
Direct pairing.  
Wi-Fi  
Add Wi-Fi network.  
2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless  
Access Point).  
3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This  
must match the current security setting on your target  
WAP (Wireless Access Point).  
In this case, once the WPS feature is active on your WAP,  
your device can then detect it and then immediately pair to it.  
4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.  
5. Tap Connect to store the new information and connect  
to the target WAP.  
Note: WPS-capable routers appear in the Wi-Fi list of available  
devices with the term (WPS available) below their name.  
To pair your device using WPS:  
Note: An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN.  
Its purpose is to stop other wireless equipment from  
accessing your LAN — whether accidentally or  
intentionally. To communicate, wireless devices must be  
configured with the same SSID.  
1. Follow the WPS activation instructions specific to your  
Wireless Access Point.  
2. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Wi-Fi  
.
3. Press  
then tap WPS push button  
.
4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external  
router now appears in the Wi-Fi list as connected.  
Changing Your Settings  
267  
       
WPS PIN Entry  
Wi-Fi Direct Setup and Settings  
If a WPS Push Button does not work, there is an alternative  
WPS connection method where you would use a device  
generated PIN number to establish the connection. This  
number is then entered into your WAP’s WPS client PIN field  
to complete the connection.  
You can configure your device to connect directly with other  
Wi-Fi capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data  
between devices. These devices must be enabled for Wi-Fi  
direct communication. This connection is direct and not via a  
HotSpot or WAP.  
To pair your device using WPS PIN:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and  
configured for a direct connection to another  
compatible device in the same direct  
communication mode.  
Wi-Fi  
.
2. Press  
then tap WPS PIN entry  
.
Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active and  
communicating.  
3. Write down the generate PIN number and enter it into  
your Wi-Fi Router’s client PIN field.  
4. Once the connection is complete, confirm the external  
router now appears in the Wi-Fi list as connected.  
Note: Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi  
network connection.  
268  
         
To activate your connection:  
5. Tap Done. The direct connection is then established.  
Confirm appears in the Status bar.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab.  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi slider to the  
right to turn it on. The slider color indicates the  
activation status.  
6. When prompted to complete the connection, the  
recipient should tap OK. Your status field now reads  
“Connected” and your connected device is listed within  
the Wi-Fi Direct devices listing.  
3. Tap Wi-Fi Direct  
.
4. Tap Scan and select the single device name to begin  
the connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct  
compatible device.  
Bluetooth settings  
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a  
device name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices  
can discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices  
– or –  
Tap Multi-connect  
Scan and select all the device  
names to begin the connection process to these Wi-Fi  
Direct compatible devices.  
Turning Bluetooth On and Off  
To turn Bluetooth on:  
Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service  
active and running before it can be detected by your  
device.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings Connections tab).  
(
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider  
to the right to turn it on.  
The slider color indicates the activation status. When  
active,  
displays in the Status area.  
Changing Your Settings  
269  
           
To turn Bluetooth off:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Activating Visibility  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
and then tap  
Settings  
.
Bluetooth  
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Bluetooth slider  
2. Verify your Bluetooth is active.  
to the left to turn it off.  
3. From the top of the Bluetooth settings page, toggle the  
state of the visibility check mark. Activating this feature  
enabled your device visible allows other devices to pair  
and communicate.  
Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.  
Changing the Device Name  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Scanning for Devices  
and then tap  
This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so  
you can pair with them.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Settings  
(
More tab) About device  
.
2. Tap the Device name field and use the on-screen  
keyboard to edit the current device name.  
Bluetooth  
.
3. Tap  
to erase the current device name and enter  
2. From the bottom of the Bluetooth settings page, tap  
Scan to search for visible external Bluetooth-  
compatible devices such as headsets, devices,  
printers, and computers.  
a new name for this device using the keyboard.  
4. Tap OK to confirm your setting.  
Important! Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a  
PIN number to confirm and pair with them.  
270  
       
3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required,  
and tap OK  
4. Touch and drag the far right ends of the Red or Orange  
horizontal lines to manually adjust both the Warning  
and Maximum data limits.  
.
Data Usage  
Monitor and mange your device’s data usage capabilities.  
5. Touch and drag the bottom grey vertical lines to adjust  
the time frames.  
Features include activation/deactivation or network data  
usage, set mobile data usage for a set period of time, and  
view application data usage.  
6. Tap the Data usage cycle button and select either the  
current cycle or define your own by selecting Change  
cycle  
7. Press  
screen options:  
.
From the Home screen, press  
Settings Connections tab) Data usage  
To activate/deactivate Mobile data usage:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Data usage  
and then tap  
and then select from the available on-  
(
.
• Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider’s  
partner networks and access data services when you are out of  
your service providers area of coverage. For more information,  
.
2. Tap the Mobile data field to activate the feature. A  
green check mark indicates the feature is active.  
3. Tap the Mobile data field again to deactivate the  
feature.  
• Restrict background data prevents background data usage.  
This can help prevent over usage of your data minutes.  
• Auto sync data allows the device to automatically sync  
information and updates with your various services.  
• Show Wi-Fi usage activates an additional Wi-Fi tab that shows  
you your Wi-Fi data usage.  
To set a mobile data limit:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Data usage  
2. Place a check mark in the Set mobile data limit field.  
3. Read the on-screen disclaimer info and tap OK  
.
.
Changing Your Settings  
271  
                     
• Mobile hotspots allows you to select available Wi-Fi networks  
that can service as mobile hotspots. Place a check mark on  
those entries you wish to use.  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Airplane mode  
slider to the right to turn it on.  
3. Tap OK. The Airplane mode icon  
is displayed at  
the top of your screen.  
More Networks  
Mobile networks  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find  
your location or search for places of interest, you must  
enable the Mobile networks options.  
This tab displays additional wireless and network  
information.  
From the Home screen, press  
Settings Connections tab) More  
networks  
Airplane Mode  
and then tap  
(
.
From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks Mobile networks  
.
The following options display:  
This mode allows you to use many of your device’s features,  
such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an  
airplane or in any other area where making or receiving calls  
or data is prohibited.  
Use mobile data  
Allows you to activate mobile data usage on your device.  
From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks Mobile networks Mobile data  
.
Important! When your device is in Airplane mode, it cannot  
send or receive any calls or access online  
information or applications.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks  
.
272  
           
Data Roaming  
Network mode  
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service  
provider’s partner networks and access data services when  
you are out of your service providers area of coverage.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
You can configure your device to either automatically select  
the LTE option (LTE/GSM/WCDMA (auto connect) [by default]),  
GSM/WCDMA (auto connect), GSM only, or WCDMA only.  
From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks Mobile networks Network mode  
More networks  
Mobile networks.  
.
2. Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while  
LTE/GSM/WCDMA (auto connect) is the default network  
mode option. This selection allows the device to choose the  
fastest connection from among the available connection  
speeds, including LTE.  
roaming outside your network.  
– or –  
Tap Data roaming again to remove the green check  
mark and deactivate the feature.  
• GSM/WCDMA (auto connect) allows you to exclude the LTE  
network and choose from only 4G, 3G, and 2G networks.  
• GSM only restricts your connection to only the 2G network.  
• WCDMA only restricts your connection to only the 3G network.  
Access Point Names  
To access a wireless access point:  
From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks Mobile networks Access Point  
Names. A list of the Access point names display. The  
active access point displays a bright green, filled circle  
to the right of the name.  
Changing Your Settings  
273  
         
Using the LTE Network Option  
Using the 2G - GSM Only Network  
To confirm you are always using the fastest possible  
connection, the device has an automatic detection method  
where it finds both the fastest and most stable connection/  
communication method from among this selected set  
(LTE/4G/3G/2G).  
If you are not using applications that require a faster network  
speed (any application that accesses the network or uses a  
browser), using the 2G only (WCDMA) network saves battery  
life.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks  
Mobile networks  
Network mode.  
More networks  
Mobile networks  
Network mode.  
2. Tap GSM only. A check mark displays next to this option  
to indicate that it is active. Connecting to 2G networks  
slows the data transfer speed and time.  
2. Tap LTE/GSM/WCDMA (auto connect). A selection  
indicator displays next to this option to show that it is  
active. This is the default mode for this device.  
Using the GSM/WCDMA Option  
Using the WCDMA - 3G Only Network  
This option uses a 3G connection only.  
If you wish to not use LTE but still require a fast connection  
using the standard 3G/2G network speed, follow these  
instructions to connect to these network types.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks  
Mobile networks  
Network mode.  
2. Tap WCDMA only. A check mark displays next to this  
option to indicate that it is active. Connecting to 3G  
networks slows the data transfer speed and time.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks  
Mobile networks  
Network mode.  
2. Tap GSM/WCDMA (auto connect). A selection indicator  
displays next to this option to show that it is active.  
This is the default mode for this device.  
274  
           
Network Operators  
Default Setup Options  
Using this feature you can view the current network  
connection. You can also scan and select a network operator  
manually, or set the network selection to Automatic.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically  
search for an available network. You can set this option to  
Manual to select a network each time you connect.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks  
Mobile networks  
.
More networks  
operators  
2. Tap Default setup  
Mobile networks  
Network  
.
2. Tap Network operators. The current network connection  
displays at the bottom of the list.  
.
3. Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically  
Important! You must deactivate data service prior to searching  
select a network.  
– or –  
for an available network.  
Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network  
manually.  
3. Tap Search now to manually search for a network.  
4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a  
network connection.  
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer  
speed and time.  
Changing Your Settings  
275  
Tethering and Mobile HotSpot  
VPN settings  
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage  
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).  
This option allows you to share your phone’s mobile data  
connection via a direct USB connection between your phone  
and computer. A wireless version of this same functionality  
would be the Mobile AP feature.  
Note: Before using VPN, you must first set up a screen unlock  
Note: You can not mount your device’s microSD card to your  
computer while using the USB tethering feature.  
If additional software or USB drivers are required,  
Adding a VPN  
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN  
protocol to use: PPTP, L2TP/IPSec PSK, L2TP/IPSec RSA,  
IPSec Xauth PSK, IPSec Xauth RSA, IPSec Hybrid RSA.  
From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks Tethering and Mobile HotSpot  
.
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and  
configure one.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks  
VPN.  
2. If prompted, read the screen lock information and  
follow the on-screen steps to setup an unlock PIN or  
password.  
3. Tap  
(Add VPN network).  
276  
         
4. In the form that appears, fill in the information provided  
Delete a VPN  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
by your network administrator.  
5. Tap Save  
.
More networks  
VPN.  
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete.  
Note: Similar setup process can be used for all available VPN  
3. Tap Delete network within the pop-up that opens up.  
types.  
Wi-Fi Calling  
Connecting to a VPN  
You can configure your device to make and receive calls over  
an active Wi-Fi connection. Wi-Fi Calling is an excellent  
solution for coverage issues in and around the home or  
wherever cellular coverage is limited. Minutes used while  
connected to the Wi-Fi network count against available rate  
plan minutes.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks  
VPN.  
2. Tap the VPN entry you want to connect to.  
3. Enter any requested credentials into the pop-up that  
opens.  
1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon  
4. Tap Connect  
.
displays on  
Edit a VPN  
the status bar.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
2. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
More networks  
More networks  
VPN.  
.
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit.  
3. In a single motion touch and slide the Wi-Fi Calling  
3. In the pop-up that opens, select Edit network  
.
slider to the right to turn it on.  
4. Make the desired VPN setting changes.  
5. Tap Save  
.
Changing Your Settings  
277  
   
Wi-Fi Calling Settings  
Near Field Communication  
This feature is used to read and exchange tags. When used  
in conjunction with Android Beam, your device can be used  
to beam application content when NFC-capable devices are  
touched.  
Important! A compatible SIM card must be installed within the  
device prior to using this feature. Wi-Fi must first  
be active and communicating prior to launching  
Wi-Fi Calling.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab.  
2. Tap the NFC field and verify the feature is active  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
ON  
(indicated by  
).  
More networks  
Wi-Fi Calling.  
Android Beam  
2. Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for  
use of the Wi-Fi Calling feature:  
When Android Beam is activated, you can beam app content  
to another NFC-capable device by holding the devices close  
together. You can beam browser pages, YouTube videos,  
contacts, and more.  
• Wi-Fi Preferred: Wi-Fi network is preferred over cellular  
network when making calls. Calling requires you to stay in the  
Wi-Fi range.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
• Cellular Network Preferred: The cellular network is preferred  
over a Wi-Fi network when making calls.  
NFC  
Android Beam.  
2. Tap the OFF / ON icon to turn Android Beam on.  
3. Touch the back of your device with another  
NFC-capable device and the content is transferred.  
• Never use Cellular Network: Use only Wi-Fi for calls. Do not  
use Cellular Network, even if available.  
3. Tap Help from the main Wi-Fi Calling Settings page to  
navigate through either an on-screen tutorial or review  
the top 10 Wi-Fi Calling questions.  
278  
       
S Beam  
Nearby devices  
This feature (when activated via NFC) allows you to beam  
large files directly to another compatible device that is in  
direct contact. These files can be larger, such as Videos, HD  
pictures, and other large files.You can beam images and  
videos from your gallery, music files from your music player,  
and more.  
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby  
devices using DLNA and connected to the same Wi-Fi.  
1. Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer  
2. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Nearby devices  
.
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab.  
3. Tap the File sharing field to turn File sharing on. A green  
2. Verify the NFC feature is active.  
check mark indicates the feature is active. Once active,  
3. Tap S Beam and make sure the feature is turned on.  
4. If not already active, in a single motion touch and slide  
the S Beam slider to the right to turn it on.  
(
Nearby devices) appears at the top of the screen.  
4. At the Nearby devices prompt, tap OK  
5. Tap Shared contents, then check the media you would  
like to share. Tap OK  
.
5. Complete the transfer process between the two  
NFC-enabled devices by placing them back to back.  
.
6. Tap Allowed devices list, then select the connected  
devices you would like to allow.  
This feature can come in very handy to quickly share  
pictures between users with compatible S Beam devices. For  
7. Tap Not-allowed devices list, then select the connected  
devices you would like to not allow.  
8. Tap Download to, then select the destination of any  
downloaded (shared) content. Choose from USB  
storage (Device) or SD card.  
Changing Your Settings  
279  
     
9. Tap Upload from other devices, then select the actions  
you’ll take when you upload content from other  
devices. Choose from either Always accept, Always  
ask, or Always reject.  
Note: This feature allows a connection between your device  
and the optional AllShare Cast Hub, via a shared Wi-Fi  
Direct connection. The AllShare Cast Hub then allows  
the communicating TV to mirror what is being shown on  
the device's display.  
Screen Mirroring  
With feature enabled, you can wirelessly mirror what is  
currently displayed on your device’s screen with an external  
TV via devices such as the AllShare Cast Hub®.  
Kies via Wi-Fi  
Note: Screen mirroring can only be done with a compatible  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
wireless TV or one enabled with the AllShare Cast Hub.  
More networks  
.
2. Tap Kies via Wi-Fi  
OK.  
3. Select a network connection and follow the on-screen  
connection process.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Connections tab ➔  
Screen Mirroring  
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Screen Mirroring  
slider to the right to turn it on. The slider color indicates  
the activation status.  
280  
   
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required. The screen will  
never lock.  
Lock Screen  
This menu contains features that allows you to configure the  
device’s security parameters.  
Swipe options  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Screen Unlock Pattern Overview  
Lock screen  
.
To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to  
require a screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the  
device, or every time the phone wakes up from sleep mode  
(when the screen automatically turns off).  
2. Configure one of the following options.  
• Multiple widgets allows you to display multiple widgets on  
your lock screen. Appears as an options after a lock mode is  
enabled.  
From the Home screen, press  
Settings My device tab) Lock screen  
Screen lock  
and then tap  
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are  
displayed on your home screens.  
(
My device  
.
• Shortcuts sets shortcuts to appear at the bottom of the Lock  
screen. Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on.  
• Unlock effect sets the effect you receive when unlocking the  
phone. You can select None, Ripple effect, or Light effect.  
• Help text shows help information on the Lock screen.  
• Wake up in lock screen requires that you say a command to  
wake-up your phone.  
The Screen lock menu allows to choose from a variety of  
locking features such as:  
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.  
• Face unlock: Look at your phone to unlock it.  
• Face and voice: Look at your phone and speak to unlock.  
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create  
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or  
change your screen unlock pattern.  
• Set wake-up command designates your wake-up  
commands. Tap Set wake-up command and follow the  
on-screen prompts to create a new verbal command.  
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.  
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.  
Changing Your Settings  
281  
         
Face unlock options  
Using Swipe  
Once Face unlock is enabled, additional options are  
available:  
This feature is the least secure locking method and only  
requires that a user swipe the screen to unlock the device.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are  
displayed on your home screens.  
Lock screen  
2. Tap Screen lock  
Using Face Unlock  
.
• Improve facial recognition allows you to improve your  
device’s face matching capability by capturing your face in  
different lighting, with or without glasses, and bearded or  
clean-shaven. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
• Presence check requires that you blink when using the Face  
unlock feature. This will increase the security of the feature.  
• Lock automatically locks the screen 5 seconds after the  
screen turns off.  
Swipe.  
This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone.  
This feature is less secure than PIN, Pattern, and Password  
locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks  
similar to you.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Lock screen  
2. Tap Screen lock  
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap Next  
4. From the About Face Unlock screen, tap Set it up  
Continue  
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
.
• Lock instantly with power key once enabled, instantly locks  
the screen after pressing the power key.  
Face unlock.  
.
.
6. If your face is not recognized, choose an unlocking  
method: Pattern or PIN.  
282  
         
Using Face and Voice Unlock  
Setting an Unlock Pattern  
This feature used facial recognition to unlock your phone.  
This feature is less secure than PIN, Pattern, and Password  
locks and can be bypassed by someone else who looks  
similar to you.  
Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the  
phone. When you enable the User visible pattern field, you  
will draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you  
want to unlock the phone’s buttons or touch screen. When  
you activate the User tactile feedback field, you feel vibration  
as feedback while drawing the pattern.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Lock screen  
2. Tap Screen lock  
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap Next  
4. From the About Face Unlock screen, tap Set it up  
Continue  
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
.
The feature is now paired with a backup PIN code that acts  
as a backup to the pattern lock. If you forget your pattern,  
you can regain access to the device by entering a PIN code.  
Face and voice.  
.
.
Note: Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
6. Once prompted to speak and unlock command, tap  
Lock screen  
2. Tap Screen lock  
3. Read the instructions then tap Next  
.
and repeat the phrase four times.  
Pattern.  
7. Once complete, tap Done  
.
.
4. Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen  
point. Then, without removing your finger from the  
screen, drag your finger over adjacent points until the  
gray trace line overlaps each point and they are  
highlighted with a green circle.  
Changing Your Settings  
283  
         
5. When you have connected at least four dots in a  
Deleting the Screen Lock Pattern  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
vertical, horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger  
from the screen and tap Continue  
.
Lock screen  
2. Tap Screen lock  
3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.  
4. Tap None  
.
6. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then  
.
tapping Confirm. The Unlock pattern is set.  
7. Enter the backup PIN code and tap Continue  
8. Reenter the PIN to reconfirm the previous entry and  
tap OK  
.
.
Pattern options  
Once an unlock pattern is enabled, additional options are  
available:  
.
Changing the Screen Lock Pattern  
• Lock screen widgets allows you to lock the widgets that are  
displayed on your home screens.  
This feature allows you to change the previously stored  
unlock pattern and update it if necessary. This process is  
similar to changing your password from time to time.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
• Make pattern visible allows you to see the pattern as you  
draw it.  
Lock screen  
.
• Lock automatically allows you to set a time-out for lock  
screen.  
2. Tap Screen lock  
.
3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.  
4. Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 - 7 from the previous  
section.  
• Lock instantly with power key allows you to lock the screen  
by pressing  
.
284  
   
4. If you have forgotten your current pattern, tap Pattern  
from the Screen unlock settings menu and follow the  
procedures outlined in "Setting an Unlock Pattern" on  
page 283 to create a new pattern.  
What If I Forget my Pattern?  
If you forget your device's lock pattern, you can unlock your  
device or reset it using your Google™ Account credentials.  
When you enter the wrong unlock pattern too many times,  
you should see an option at the bottom of the screen that  
says Forgot pattern? Follow these steps to use either your PIN  
or email address.  
To unlock your device using your Google account:  
1. Tap Forgot pattern? (located at the bottom of the  
screen).  
2. Tap the Username (email) and Password fields, use the  
on-screen keyboard to enter your Google Account  
credentials, and tap Sign in to complete the login  
process.  
Important! You can only enter an incorrect lock pattern 5 times  
before the device is locked.  
Important! If you are unsuccessful in retrieving your lock  
pattern or unlocking your device, please contact  
T-Mobile for assistance.  
3. If you have forgotten your Google Account credentials,  
visit the Google website to recover them. If you still  
cannot get your Google Account credentials, contact  
your wireless carrier for additional options.  
To unlock your device with a PIN code:  
1. Tap Forgot pattern? (located at the bottom of the  
screen).  
2. Scroll down and tap the Type PIN code field and use the  
on-screen keypad to enter the backup PIN code you  
setup when you created your lock pattern.  
3. Tap OK  
.
Changing Your Settings  
285  
     
PIN Lock and Unlock  
Display Settings  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display  
such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle  
lock feature, animation, brightness, and screen timeout, and  
power saving mode.  
Lock screen  
.
2. Tap Screen lock  
PIN.  
3. Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and  
touch Continue to confirm the password.  
Adjusting the Screen Display  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
4. Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm.  
Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number  
in order to unlock the phone.  
Settings  
(
My device tab) Display  
.
My device  
2. Configure the following screen display settings:  
• Wallpaper: allows you to set the Wallpaper for your Home  
screen, Lock screen, or both.  
Password Lock and Unlock  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
• Notification Panel: allows you to set the brightness of your  
notification panel and also select the quick setting buttons that  
you want to display at the top of the notification panel  
Lock screen  
2. Tap Screen lock  
3. Tap Password  
.
.
.
4. Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to  
confirm the password.  
• Multi window: tap this option to enable/disable the automatic  
Multi window feature.  
5. Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap OK to  
confirm.  
• Screen mode: allows you to select from several different color  
modes.  
286  
     
• Brightness: adjusts the on-screen brightness level. For more  
information, refer to “Adjusting Screen Brightness” on  
page 288.  
Touch key light duration: allows you to adjust the delay before  
the Touch key light automatically turns off.  
• Display battery percentage: to activate/deactivate the display  
of battery charge percentage atop the battery icon at the top of  
the screen.  
• Auto-rotate screen: when enabled, the phone automatically  
switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa.  
When this setting is disabled, the phone displays in portrait  
mode only.  
• Edit after screen capture: allows you to go edit a screen  
immediately after taking a screen capture.  
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen  
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds,  
30 seconds, 1 minute, 2 minutes, 5 minutes, and  
10 minutes.  
• Auto adjust screen tone: adjusts the phone’s LCD brightness  
level to automatically adjust and conserve battery power.  
• High touch sensitivity: allows you to adjust the touch  
sensitivity of your phone automatically depending on the type of  
material on the display.  
• Daydream: allows you to control what your screen does when  
your device is docked or sleeping. Tap the adjacent OFF / ON  
icon to turn it on. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
• Font style: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections  
are: Default font Choco cooky, Cool jazz, Rosemary,  
,
Samsung Sans or Get fonts online. Tap Get fonts online to  
download additional fonts.  
• Font size: allows you to select which size of font is displayed.  
Changing Your Settings  
287  
             
Adjusting Screen Brightness  
This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
LED Indicator  
This option allows you to turn on your LED lights for charging,  
missed events, and incoming notifications. The light will turn  
on by default unless you turn them off.  
Display  
Brightness.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
2. Tap Automatic brightness to allow the phone to  
Settings My device tab) LED indicator.  
(
self-adjust and tap OK  
.
My device  
2. Tap the following LED indicator options to turn them on  
or off:  
– or –  
Touch and slide the on-screen slider to adjust the level  
and tap OK  
• Charging: LED lights up when the device is connected to the  
charger.  
.
Assigning a Wallpaper  
The Wallpaper settings option allows you to set the Wallpaper  
for your Home screen, Lock screen, or both.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
• Low battery: LED lights up when the battery level is low.  
• Notifications: LED lights up when you have missed calls,  
messages, or application events.  
• Voice recording: LED lights up when you are recording voice.  
The LED only lights up when the screen is off.  
Display  
Wallpaper.  
2. Select an available option to change its current  
wallpaper.  
288  
   
Adjusting the Volume Settings  
The Volume menu now provides access to various volume  
settings within one on-screen popup menu.  
Sound Settings  
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as  
well as configure the display settings.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Sound  
Volume.  
Settings My device tab) Sound.  
(
My device  
2. Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the  
The following options display:  
volume settings for any of the following volume levels.  
Silent mode via Device Options Screen  
• Music, video, games, and other media  
,
Ringtone,  
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone  
from making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode  
the speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify  
you of incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a  
defined tone or sound as an alert.  
Notifications or System  
.
3. Tap OK to assign the volume levels.  
Vibration intensity  
Vibration intensity allows you to select how intense the  
1. From the Home screen, press and hold  
vibration is for different options.  
(Power/End) until the Device options screen displays.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
2. Tap either Mute Vibrate, or Sound from the Device  
,
Sound  
2. Touch and drag the slider to adjust the Vibration  
intensity for Incoming call Notification, and Haptic  
feedback  
3. Tap OK to assign the vibration levels.  
Vibration intensity.  
options screen to activate or deactivate these features  
(the current mode displays).  
,
.
Changing Your Settings  
289  
                           
Setup the Ringtones  
This option allows you to set the ringtone.  
Notifications  
This option allows you to set the ringtone that will sound for  
notifications and alarms.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Sound  
.
Sound  
2. Tap Notifications  
3. Select a ringtone and tap OK  
.
2. Tap Ringtones  
.
.
3. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone  
briefly plays when selected.  
.
4. Tap Add to locate a compatible media file that can be  
used as a ringtone.  
Setting up Vibration When Ringing  
This option allows you to enable your phone to vibrate when  
5. Tap OK to assign a ringer.  
a call is incoming.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Setup the Vibration  
This option allows you to set your device to vibrate and ring.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Sound  
.
2. Tap the Vibrate when ringing field to activate the  
feature.  
Sound  
.
2. Tap Vibrations  
.
3. Select a vibration pattern and tap OK  
.
– or –  
Tap Create to then use an on-screen touch circle to  
create your own custom vibration pattern. Tap Save to  
store the new vibration pattern.  
290  
       
Audible System Tone Settings  
Adapt sound  
The Adapt sound feature allows you to customize your call  
sounds.  
These options are used when you use the dialing pad, make  
a screen selection, lock your screen, or tap the screen. Each  
time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone  
sounds.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Sound  
Adapt Sound.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
2. Read the instructions and tap Start  
.
Sound  
.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your  
2. Tap Dialing keypad tone to activate a tone when you  
use on-screen keys. A check mark displayed next to  
these features indicates active status.  
personal call sound.  
3. Tap Touch sounds to activate a tone when you touch the  
screen. A check mark displayed next to this feature  
indicates active status.  
4. Tap Screen lock sound to activate a tone when you use  
the Lock screen. A check mark displayed next to this  
feature indicates active status.  
5. Tap Haptic feedback to activate the a vibration when  
you press soft keys on certain screens. A check mark  
displayed next to the feature indicates this feature is  
active.  
Changing Your Settings  
291  
       
Home Screen Mode  
This application allows you to set your display to the  
conventional layout of Standard mode or provide an easier  
user experience for the first-time smartphone users using  
Call Settings  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
.
2. Press  
and then tap Call settings.  
– or –  
Easy mode  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings My device tab) ➔  
screen mode).  
.
From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
and then tap  
Home  
Settings My device tab) Call.  
(
My device  
(
(
My device  
To access the Call settings menu:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Phone).  
2. Tap the pull-down Dropbox and select one of the  
following options:  
2. Press  
Configuring General Call Settings  
Configure the general call settings using this option.  
and then tap Call settings.  
• Standard mode: provides conventional layout for the apps and  
widgets on your home screens.  
• Easy mode: provides easier user experience for first-time  
smartphone users on the home screens.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
and then tap Call settings.  
(Phone). Press  
3. Tap Apply and give your device a few seconds to  
update the device with the new look and feel.  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
• Call rejection: allows you to manage your rejection mode and  
rejection list.  
Auto reject mode: sets the phone to automatically reject  
incoming calls or messages.  
Auto reject list: provides access to current rejection entries  
and numbers.  
292  
                     
• Set up call rejection messages: allows you to manage both  
existing rejection messages and create new ones.  
• Answering/ending calls: allows you to manage the settings  
for answering and ending calls.  
• Call accessories: allows you to assign headset settings during  
incoming calls.  
Automatic answering configures the device to automatically  
answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.  
Automatic answering timer configures the time delay before  
the device automatically accepts the incoming call.  
The home key answers calls allows you to press  
answer the phone.  
to  
Voice control allows you to answer incoming voice calls using  
voice.  
Outgoing call conditions configures the connected Bluetooth  
device to make outbound calls within one of two settings: Even  
when device locked or Only when device unlocked.  
The power key ends calls allows you to press the power key  
to end the current call.  
• Wi-Fi Calling: Allows you to both activate/deactivate the Wi-Fi  
Calling feature and configure its settings. For more information,  
Turn off screen during calls: allows you to force the screen to  
turn off during an active call.  
• Call alerts: allows you to assign call alert tones and activate  
call alerts and vibration.  
Note: If the Wi-Fi Calling feature is active and connected, the  
Call forwarding feature is greyed-out and inaccessible.  
Call vibrations: vibrates the phone when the called party  
answers. Choose from: Answer vibration or Call-end vibration.  
Call status tones: assigns sounds settings during the call.  
Choose from: Call connect tone, Minute minder, and Call end  
tone.  
• Additional settings: allows you to configure additional call  
Alerts on calls: selects whether alarm and message  
notification is turned off during a call.  
Changing Your Settings  
293  
                         
• Ringtones and keypad tones: allows you to manage your  
device’s ringtones and vibratory features. Choose from:  
Ringtones, Vibrations, Vibrate when ringing, and Keypad tones  
(used when the keypad is pressed).  
Call rejection  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Auto reject mode  
and tap one of the following options:  
• All numbers: to reject all calls.  
• Personalize call sound: allows you to enable the personalize  
call sound function within an active call. You can adjust the  
audio by enabling selecting an audio preset. For more  
• Auto reject numbers: to reject all calls in your Reject list.  
2. Tap Auto reject list  
.
3. Tap to manually add numbers to the Reject list.  
4. Tap Unknown to create a check mark and automatically  
reject all calls that are not in your Contacts list.  
• Noise reduction: allows you to enable suppression of  
background audio.  
Set reject messages  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Set up call  
• Increase volume in pocket: enables the ringtone volume to be  
increased when the device is in a pocket or bag.  
• Voicemail service: allows you to assign the service.  
• Voicemail settings: displays the settings for the voicemail.  
• Sound: assigns your device’s ringtone.  
rejection messages  
2. Tap to manually add a reject message.  
– or –  
.
Tap one of the pre-written messages to be displayed  
when you want the call to be rejected. You can edit the  
message if desired.  
• Vibrate: configures the vibrate settings.  
• TTY mode: allows you to configure the TTY settings. For more  
information, refer to “TTY Mode” on page 300.  
3. Tap Save to save the reject message.  
294  
     
Answering/ending calls  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Answering/  
Call alerts  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Call alerts  
2. Tap Call vibrations to enable your phone to vibrate  
when the called party answers the phone.  
.
ending calls  
.
2. Select any of the following options:  
• The home key answers calls allows you to press  
answer the phone.  
Choose from: Answer vibration or Call-end vibration.  
3. Tap Call status tones to set the sound settings during a  
call then tap OK  
to  
.
• Voice control allows you to answer incoming voice calls using  
Choose from: Call connect tone, Minute minder, and Call end  
tone.  
voice.  
• The power key ends calls allows you to press the power key  
4. Tap Alerts on calls to turn off alarm and message  
to end the current call.  
notifications during a call.  
Turn off screen during calls  
This option turns on the proximity sensor during calls so that  
your phone will know to turn the screen off to save power.  
From the main Call settings page, tap Turn off screen  
during calls to create a check mark and enable the  
feature.  
Changing Your Settings  
295  
   
Accessory settings for call  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Call accessories  
Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Additional  
.
2. The following options are available:  
settings  
.
• Automatic answering: configures the device to automatically  
answer and incoming call when a headset is detected.  
• Automatic answering timer: configures the time delay before  
the device automatically accepts the incoming call.  
• Outgoing call conditions: allows you to make calls even when  
the device is locked.  
2. Tap one of the following options:  
• Caller ID: chooses whether your number is displayed when  
someone answers your outgoing call. Choose from: Network  
default, Hide number, or Show number.  
• Call forwarding: configures the forwarding settings. For more  
information, refer to “Configuring Call Forwarding” on  
page 297.  
Wi-Fi Calling  
• Auto area code: allows you to automatically prepend a specific  
area code to all outbound calls.  
Wi-Fi Calling is a free feature for T-Mobile customers using  
this device with the new SIM card. Wi-Fi Calling is an  
excellent solution for coverage issues in and around the  
home or wherever cellular coverage is limited. Minutes used  
while connected to the Wi-Fi network count against available  
rate plan minutes.  
• Call barring: blocks specific types of calls (All outgoing calls,  
International calls, etc..).  
• Call waiting: notifies you of an incoming call while you are on  
another call.  
• Auto redial: automatically redial the dialed number if it is  
unable to connect or the call is cut off.  
• Fixed dialing Numbers: manages fixed dialing numbers. See  
description below.  
296  
                   
Configuring Call Forwarding  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Additional  
Using Auto Area Code  
This feature prepends an area code to all outbound calls.  
When enabled, the designated prefix is always added before  
your dialed numbers.  
settings  
Call forwarding.  
Important! Call Forwarding is disabled when the Wi-Fi Calling  
Ex: If you were using 999 as your area code, 555-5555  
would be dialed as 999 - 555-5555.  
feature is enabled.  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Additional  
2. Tap an available option:  
settings  
2. Tap Auto area code, enter a new prefix, and then tap  
OK  
.
• Always forward: incoming calls are re-routed to a secondary  
number that you specify.  
.
• Forward when busy: forwards all your calls to voicemail when  
your phone is busy.  
Call Barring  
Configures the device to barr (prevent) selected outbound  
calls.  
• Forward when unanswered: automatically forwards to your  
voicemail number when the phone is not answered, and  
otherwise allows you to enter a voicemail number.  
• Forward when unreachable: automatically forwards to your  
voicemail number when the phone is not in service, or is turned  
off.  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Additional  
settings  
.
2. Tap Call barring and select from the available settings.  
Choose from: All outgoing calls, International calls, Intl’  
calls except home, All incoming calls, or Incoming  
when roaming.  
Changing Your Settings  
297  
     
Changing the PIN2 Code  
Call Waiting  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Additional  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Additional  
settings  
.
settings  
Fixed dialing numbers.  
2. Tap Call waiting to enable/disable the on-screen  
2. Tap Change PIN2  
.
notification of new incoming call during an active call.  
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.  
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.  
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.  
Fixed Dialing Numbers  
Fixed Dial Number (FDN), allows you to restrict outgoing calls  
to a limited set of phone numbers.  
Enabling FDN  
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card  
does not, this menu does not display.  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Additional  
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering  
the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the  
device to lock. Contact customer service for  
assistance.  
settings  
2. Tap Enable FDN  
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
Fixed dialing numbers.  
.
.
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card  
does not, this menu does not display.  
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering  
an incorrect PIN2 code could cause the phone to  
lock. Contact customer service for assistance.  
298  
   
Managing the FDN List  
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to  
phone numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.  
Ringtones and keypad tones  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Ringtones and  
keypad tones  
2. Tap Ringtones, select a ringtone, and tap OK  
Tap Add to locate an audio file to create as a ringtone.  
3. Tap Vibrations, select a vibration type, and tap OK  
Tap Create to begin creating your own custom vibration.  
.
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Additional  
.
settings  
Fixed dialing numbers  
.
2. Tap Enable FDN  
.
.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK  
.
FDN is enabled.  
4. Tap Vibrate when ringing to create a check mark if you  
want your phone to vibrate when a call is incoming.  
5. Tap Keypad tones to create a check mark if you want  
tones to play when the keypad is pressed.  
4. Tap FDN list then press  
and then tap Add contact  
or edit the contacts that were stored.  
Important! Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card  
does not, this menu does not display.  
Personalize call sound  
This option allows you to personalize the sounds you hear  
during a call with and without earphones.  
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering  
the PIN2 incorrectly three times will cause the  
device to lock. Contact customer service for  
assistance.  
From the main Call settings page, tap Personalize call  
sound and activate the feature by selecting an available  
option.  
Changing Your Settings  
299  
 
Noise reduction  
This option allows you to suppress background noise during  
Sound - Device Ringtone  
This option allows you to assign your default device ringtone.  
a call.  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Sound  
2. Select a ringtone and tap OK  
Vibrate  
.
From the main Call settings page, tap Noise reduction  
to create a check mark and enable the feature.  
.
Increase volume in pocket  
This option allows you to activate a vibration for an incoming  
This option increases the ringtone volume when the device is  
in a pocket or a bag. It uses the proximity sensor to detect its  
location.  
call.  
From the main Call settings page, tap Vibrate field to  
toggle the feature on or off.  
From the main Call settings page, tap Increase volume  
in pocket to create a check mark and enable the  
feature.  
TTY Mode  
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a  
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,  
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities,  
to communicate by telephone.  
Voicemail  
You can view your voicemail number from this menu.  
Your device is compatible with select TTY devices. Please  
check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure  
that it is compatible with digital cell phones.  
1. From the main Call settings page, tap Voicemail service  
2. If an additional voicemail service is in use (other than  
carrier), tap Voice settings to now view your selected  
voicemail number and information.  
.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable  
that plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was  
not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device  
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.  
300  
       
1. From the main Call settings page, tap TTY mode  
.
4. Configure a timeframe for these features to be active.  
Remove the check mark from the Always field to  
configure the From and To time fields.  
2. Tap TTY Full TTY HCO, or TTY VCO to activate the  
,
feature, or TTY Off to deactivate the feature. Off is the  
default setting.  
5. Tap Allowed contacts to assign those contacts that are  
exempted from these rules. Choose from None, All  
contacts, Favorites, or Custom. Allowed contacts will  
Blocking Mode  
When Blocking mode is enabled, notifications for selected  
features will be disabled. You will only receive notifications of  
incoming calls from people on your allowed list.  
then appear in the Allowed contact list  
.
Power Saving Mode  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to  
use a power saving mode and configure additional power  
saving options manually, all in an effort to conserve battery  
power.  
Settings My device tab).  
(
My device  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Blocking mode  
slider to the right to turn it on.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Settings My device tab) Power saving  
mode  
and then tap  
Confirm the Blocking mode active icon  
the Status bar.  
appears in  
(
My device  
.
3. Place a green check mark adjacent to those features  
you would like to enable. Choose from: Disable  
incoming calls, Disable notifications, Disable alarm and  
timer, Disable LED indicator.  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the slider to the right  
to turn it on.  
3. Tap the following options to create a check mark and  
conserve power:  
• CPU power saving: allows you to limit the maximum  
performance of the CPU.  
Changing Your Settings  
301  
             
• Screen power saving: allows you to lower the screen power  
level.  
5. Tap Automatic unlock if you are using a phone cover  
and you want your phone to unlock when you open the  
cover.  
Turn off haptic feedback: allows you to turn off vibration when  
you tap or touch the screen.  
6. Tap Audio output to set your Audio output to Stereo or  
Surround.  
4. Tap Learn about Power saving mode to learn about  
various ways to conserve battery power.  
Accessibility Settings  
When the power gets low, confirm  
appears at the top of  
This service lets you enable and disable downloaded  
accessibility applications that aid in navigating your Android  
device, such as TalkBack (uses synthesized speech to  
describe the results of actions), KickBack (provides haptic  
feedback for actions), and SoundBack (plays sounds for  
various actions). Also lets you enable use of the power key to  
end calls.  
the screen. This indicates the power saving mode is active.  
Accessory  
This menu allows you to select the Audio output mode when  
using a car or desk dock.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings My device tab) Accessory.  
(
My device  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
2. Tap Dock sound to play sounds when inserting or  
removing the phone from the dock.  
Settings My device tab) Accessibility.  
(
My device  
3. Tap Audio output mode to use the external dock  
speakers when the phone is docked.  
Note: Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility  
applications from the Play Store.  
4. Tap Desk home screen display if you wish to show the  
2. Select the Auto-rotate screen field to activate this  
feature which automatically rotates an available  
screen.  
desk home screen when the device is docked.  
302  
                     
3. Tap Screen timeout to timeout the accessibility feature  
after a defined amount of time.  
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback  
to help blind and low-vision users.  
4. Tap Lock automatically to lock the screen automatically  
after a selected amount of time.  
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,  
except passwords, including personal data and  
credit card numbers. It may also log your user  
interface interactions with the device.  
Note: The Lock automatically function is only available if your  
device is already using the screen lock feature.  
5. Select the Speak passwords field to activate this  
feature which reads out password information.  
6. Select Answering/ending calls field to select the  
methods you can use to answer and end a call.  
7. Tap Show shortcut allows you to press and hold  
10. Tap the Font size field to change the size of the fonts  
used on the device within menus, options, etc..  
Choose from: Tiny, Small, Normal, Large, or Huge.  
11. Enable Magnification gestures to use exaggerated  
gestures such as triple-tapping, double pinching, and  
dragging two fingers across the screen.  
(Power/End) to use the accessibility shortcut  
under the Device options screen.  
8. Tap Manage accessibility to save and update your  
accessibility settings or share them with another  
device. You can export your settings, import a  
previously saved file, or share your file with another  
device.  
12. Tap the Negative colors field to reverse the display of  
on-screen colors from White text on a Black  
background to Black text on a White background.  
9. Tap TalkBack to activate the feature.  
Changing Your Settings  
303  
       
13. Select Color adjustment to allow you to adjust the  
display colors if you are color blind and have difficulty  
reading the display because of the colors. Touch and  
slide the slider to the right to turn it on. Follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
19. Tap the Turn off all sounds field to mute every sound  
made by the device during taps, selections,  
notifications, etc..  
20. Tap Flash notification to allows you to set your camera  
light to blink whenever you receive a notification.  
21. Enable the Assistant menu to allow you to improve the  
device accessibility for users with reduced dexterity.  
Touch and slide the slider to the right to turn it on.  
Follow the on-screen instructions.  
14. Tap Accessibility shortcut to allow you to quickly enable  
accessibility features in 2 quick steps. Touch and slide  
the slider to the right to turn it on. Follow the on-screen  
instructions.  
15. Tap the Text-to-speech options field to configure the  
text to speech configuration parameters.  
22. Tap the Tap and hold delay field to select a time interval  
for this action. Choose from: Short, Medium, or Long.  
23. Enable Interaction control to allows you to enable or  
disable motions and screen timeout. You can also block  
areas of the screen from touch interaction. Touch and  
slide the slider to the right to turn it on. Follow the  
on-screen instructions.  
16. Tap the Enhance web accessibility field to allow apps to  
install scripts from Google that make their Web content  
more accessible.  
17. Use the Sound balance field to allow you to use the  
slider to set the Left and Right balance when using a  
stereo device.  
18. Tap the Mono audio field to enable stereo audio to be  
compressed into a single mono audio stream for use  
with a single earbud/earphone.  
304  
   
Configure Google Voice Typing  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Language and Input Settings  
This setting allows you to configure the language in which to  
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard  
options.  
Language and input  
.
– or –  
From the Home screen, press  
Settings My device tab) Language and  
input  
Language Settings  
and then tap  
From a screen where you can enter text, in a single  
motion, touch and drag the Status bar down to the  
(
My device  
.
bottom of the screen, then select  
method) Set up input methods  
2. Tap (adjacent to the Google voice typing field).  
(Select input  
.
To set the language that the menus display on the phone:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
3. Select a language by tapping Choose input languages  
area.  
Language and input  
Language.  
2. Select a language and region from the list.  
4. Remove the check mark from the Automatic field. This  
allows you to select additional languages.  
5. Select the desired languages.  
Choose Input Method  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Language and input  
Default.  
6. Activate Block offensive words to block recognition of  
known offensive words or language. (A blue check  
mark indicates the feature is active).  
2. Select an input method.  
– or –  
7. Tap Download offline speech recognition to enable speech  
recognition via locally stored files so that even if you  
are not connected to a network you can still use the  
service.  
Tap Set up input methods to alter/modify the available  
input methods.  
Changing Your Settings  
305  
           
• SwiftKey Flow like using Swipe, allows you to enter text by  
sliding your fingers across the on-screen keyboard. This  
feature is optimized for use with the on-screen QWERTY  
keyboard.  
Samsung Keyboard Settings  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Language and input  
keyboard field).  
– or –  
(adjacent to the Samsung  
• Cursor control when enabled, allows you to control your  
on-screen cursor by moving your finger across the keyboard.  
• Handwriting allows you to configure the handwriting settings  
such as: Recognition type, Recognition time, Pen thickness,  
Pen color, and About.  
From within an active text entry screen, touch and hold  
Input Methods), drag across the icons, and  
Settings) to reveal the Samsung keyboard  
(
select  
(
settings screen.  
• Advanced provides access to additional settings such as:  
2. Set any of the following options:  
Auto capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of  
the first word in each sentence (standard English style).  
Auto spacing automatically inserts space between words.  
Auto-punctuate automatically inserts a full stop in a sentence  
by tapping the space bar twice when using the on-screen  
QWERTY keyboard.  
• Portrait keyboard types allows you to choose a keyboard  
configuration (Qwerty keyboard [default] or 3x4 keyboard).  
• Input language sets the input language. Tap a language from  
the available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected  
language.  
• Predictive text enables predictive text entry mode. This must  
be enabled to gain access to the advanced settings. Touch and  
hold to access the advanced settings.  
Character preview provides an automatic preview of the  
current character selection within the text string. This is helpful  
when multiple characters are available within one key.  
Key-tap vibration enables vibration feedback when you tap an  
on-screen key.  
306  
       
Key-tap sound enables auditory feedback when you tap an  
on-screen key.  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Predictive text  
slider to the right to turn it on.  
• Help launches a brief on-screen help tutorial covering the main  
concepts related to the Samsung keyboard.  
• Reset settings resets the keyboard settings back to their  
original configuration.  
3. Tap the Predictive text field and configure any of the  
following advanced options:  
• Personalized data activate this feature to use the personal  
language data that you have entered and selected to make  
your text entry prediction results better. By enabling this feature  
you can choose from the following personalization features:  
• Learn from Facebook allows you to log into your current  
Facebook account and add used text to your personal  
dictionary.  
Predictive Text - Advanced Settings  
The predictive text system provides next-letter prediction and  
regional error correction, which compensates for users  
pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.  
Note: Only available when ABC mode is selected. Predictive  
text advanced settings are available only if the Predictive  
function is enabled.  
• Learn from Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail  
account from where your style and existing contact information  
is added to your personal dictionary. Helps recognize familiar  
names.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
• Learn from Twitter allows you to sign into your existing Twitter  
account and add used text to your personal dictionary.  
• Learn from Messaging allows your device to learn your  
messaging style by using your Messaging information.  
• Learn from Contacts updates predictive style by learning your  
Contacts style.  
Language and input  
keyboard field).  
– or –  
(adjacent to the Samsung  
From within an active text entry screen, touch and hold  
Input Methods) to reveal the Samsung  
keyboard settings screen.  
(
Changing Your Settings  
307  
             
• Clear remote data allows you to delete your anonymous data  
stored on the personalization server.  
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.  
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start  
the next word.  
• Clear personal data removes all personalized data entered by  
the user.  
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of  
a sentence.  
4. Press  
to return to the previous screen.  
• Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to  
display the complete Swype path.  
Swype Settings  
To configure Swype settings:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
• Pop-up on keypress: once enabled, displays a character  
above an on-screen key while typing.  
Language and input  
(adjacent to the Swype  
• Next word prediction: once enabled, predicts the next word in  
your text string based on your current text entries.  
field).  
2. Tap How to Swype to view an on-screen manual for  
Swype.  
Note: If incorrect words are being entered as you type,  
3. Tap Gestures to view an on-screen reference page  
related to Gesture usage.  
disabled this feature.  
4. Tap Preferences to alter these settings:  
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you  
enter text using the keypad.  
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: once enabled, deletes any words  
you have added to Swype’s dictionary.  
• Version: displays the software version information.  
• Sound on keypress: turns on sounds generated by the Swype  
application.  
5. Tap Language Options to activate and select the current  
text input language. Default language is US English.  
• Living language: allows you to automatically update Swype  
with popular new words. Tap OK to continue the process.  
• Show helpful tips: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.  
308  
     
6. Tap Swype Connect to activate social media  
personalization and configure data settings.  
• Register now: allows you register for the Swype Connect  
service which allows you to backup your Swype dictionary and  
sync your Swype dictionary across multiple devices.  
7. Tap Personalization to access and manage your  
personal dictionary. Log into the available accounts to  
add help personalize your personal dictionary with  
commonly used words or names from your available  
accounts.  
• EditDictionary: allows you to edit your current personal Swype  
dictionary.  
Follow the on-screen instructions to backup and sync your  
dictionary based on an email address.  
Enter the activation code received after your email has been  
confirmed.  
• Facebook: allows you to log into your current Facebook  
account from where contact names are added to your Swype’s  
personal dictionary for later use when you enter names into text  
fields. Helps recognize familiar names.  
• Backup & Sync: when active, allows you to backup your  
Swype dictionary and sync your Swype dictionary across  
multiple devices.  
• Contribute usage data: when enabled, allows the Nuance®  
application to collect usage data for better word predictions.  
• Cellular data: when enabled, activates cellular data usage by  
the Swype application so it can receive program updates,  
language downloads, and other related features via your  
existing data connection.  
Twitter: allows you to sign into your existing Twitter account  
from where names and words are added to your personal  
dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names and words.  
• Gmail: allows you to sign in to your existing Gmail account from  
where existing contact information is added to your personal  
dictionary. Helps recognize familiar names.  
8. Tap Updates to update the application if new software  
is available.  
Changing Your Settings  
309  
                   
• Bluetooth headset: records audio through a connected  
Bluetooth headset.  
Configuring Voice Input Recognition  
This feature allows the device to correctly recognize verbal  
input.  
3. Press  
to return to the previous screen.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Configuring Text-to-speech  
Language and input.  
This feature allows the device to provide a verbal readout of  
on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller  
information. This action is called TTS (Text To Speech).  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
2. Tap Voice search to configure the following:  
• Language: choose a language for your voice input.  
• Speech output: Sets whether you will use speech output  
always or only when using hands-free.  
Language and input  
Text-to-speech options.  
• Block offensive words: enable or disable blocking of  
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input  
Google searches.  
2. Select a current Preferred TTS engine from the list of  
available options. Select Google Text-to-speech Engine  
or Samsung text-to-speech engine. The default is  
Google Text-to-speech.  
• Hotword detection: enable to being able to launch voice  
search by saying the word “Google”.  
3. Tap  
next to the preferred TTS engine configure  
the following settings:  
• Download offline speech recognition: enables voice input  
while offline.  
• Language: allows you to set the language for spoken text.  
• Settings for Google Text-to-speech Engine: allows you to  
view Open Source Licenses.  
• Personalized recognition: enables the improvement of  
speech recognition accuracy.  
• Settings for Samsung text-to-speech engine: allows you to  
configure the General settings for the Samsung TTS.  
• Google Account dashboard: allows you to manage your  
collected data.  
310  
         
• Install voice data: allows you to install voice data for speech  
synthesis.  
Motions and Gestures Settings  
This feature allows you to assign specific functions to certain  
phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer  
and gyroscope.  
4. Configure the General options to alter the settings  
associated with this feature:  
• Speech rate: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is  
Caution! Excessive shaking or impact to the device may cause  
spoken by the device. Choose from: Very slow  
,
Slow, Normal,  
unintended results. To learn how to properly control  
Fast, and Very fast  
.
motions, tap  
(
Apps) Settings  
My device tab  
• Listen to an example: plays a short example of what the text-  
to-speech feature sounds like on your device when activated.  
Motions and gestures. When tapped, each entry  
comes with an on-screen tutorial.  
Configuring the Mouse-TrackPad  
This feature allows you to configure the pointer speed for a  
connected mouse or trackpad.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
• Air gesture: Allows you to control your device by performing  
motions above the sensor (without touching the device).  
• Motion: Allows you to control your device using natural  
movements (on the screen).  
Language and input  
Pointer speed.  
• Palm motion: Allows you to control your device by touching the  
screen with your entire hand.  
2. Adjust the slider and tap OK  
.
• Gyroscope calibration: Allows you to properly calibrate your  
device’s touch screen.  
Changing Your Settings  
311  
         
To activate Air gesture:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
Air jump: Once enabled, you can move your hand over the air  
gesture sensor (up or down) and easily jump to either the top or  
bottom of a lengthy display page (ex: Internet or Email).  
Air browse: Once enabled, you can move your hand over the air  
gesture sensor (left or right) and easily move to either the  
previous or next item in a series (ex: music tracks, pictures, or  
pages).  
and then tap  
Settings  
My device tab Motions and gestures.  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Air gesture slider  
to the right to turn it on.  
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
.
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Air gesture  
Air move: Once enabled, you can move use one finger to hold  
down on an app shortcut or event entry and then swipe across the  
air gestures sensor to then move it to a new a different page.  
Air call-accept: Once enabled, you can simply wave your hand  
over the air gesture sensor to accept any incoming call.  
can be activated.  
4. Tap Learn about sensor and icon field to review  
on-screen information about the Air gestures sensor  
and related icon.  
5. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to  
the on position.  
The following is a description some of the most commonly  
used gestures:  
Quick glance: Once enabled, you can move your hand over the  
air gesture sensor (located above the on-screen clock at the  
upper-right) to temporarily activate preview window that can be  
used to display selected user-enabled information such as:  
Time & Date, Notification icons, Missed calls, etc..  
312  
             
To activate Motion:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Browse an image: Once enabled, touch and hold a desired  
on-screen image to pan around it. Move the device left or right to  
pan vertically or up and down to pan horizontally around the large  
on-screen image.  
Motions and gestures  
.
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Motion slider to  
the right to turn it on.  
Mute/pause: Once enabled, mute incoming calls and any playing  
sounds by turning the device display down on a surface. This is  
the opposite of the Pickup to be Notified Gesture.  
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
.
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Motion can  
To activate Palm Motion:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
be activated.  
Motions and gestures  
.
4. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to  
2. In a single motion touch and slide the Palm motion  
the on position.  
slider to the right to turn it on.  
The following is a description some of the most commonly  
used gestures:  
3. Read the on-screen notification and tap OK  
.
Direct call: Once enabled, the device will dial the currently  
displayed on-screen Contact entry as soon as you place the  
device to your ear.  
Note: At least one feature must be activated before Palm  
motion can be activated.  
Smart alert: Once enabled, pickup the device to be alerted and  
notified of you have missed any calls or messages.  
Zoom: Once enabled, you must be on a screen where content can  
be zoomed. In a single motion, touch and hold two points on the  
display then tilt the device back and forth to zoom in or out.  
4. In a single motion, slide a feature’s activation slider to  
the on position.  
The following is a description some of the most commonly  
used gestures:  
Changing Your Settings  
313  
                 
Capture screen: Once enabled, you can capture any  
on-screen information swiping across the screen. In a single  
motion, press the side of your hand on the screen and swipe form  
left to right. The image is then copied to the clipboard.  
Gyroscope Calibration  
Calibrate your device by using the built-in gyroscope.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Motions and gestures  
Gyroscope calibration.  
2. Place the device on a level surface and tap Calibrate  
.
The phone adjusts the level of the accelerometer.  
During the calibration process a green circle appears  
on-screen and the center circle adjusts to the center  
position.  
Palm Swipe to  
Screen Capture  
Smart screen  
The Smart screen options allow you to customize your  
screen settings to make the screen more responsive and  
easier to use.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Mute/pause: Once enabled, you can pause any  
Settings My device tab) Smart screen.  
(
My device  
on-screen video or mute any current sound by simply covering  
the screen with your hand. Once you remove your hand from the  
screen, the device goes back to normal by either continuing to  
play the current video or unmuting the current sound.  
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the features:  
• Smart stay: disables the screen timeout if your phone detects  
that your face is watching the screen.  
• Smart rotation: disables the auto screen rotation by checking  
the orientation of your face and the device.  
314  
             
• Smart pause: pauses videos when your device detects that  
your head has moved away from the screen.  
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to  
create a checkmark and activate the feature.  
• Information preview: allows you to see information previews,  
extended text, and enlarged images when you hover your  
finger over the screen.  
• Smart scroll: once your eyes have been detected, the screen  
will scroll according to your device’s tilt angle. Tap the adjacent  
field to the right of the Smart scroll field to activate the feature.  
With Smart scroll, the screen will scroll depending on the  
phone’s tilt angle once your eyes have been detected.  
Note: It is recommended that the Information preview function  
be enabled if using Air view.  
Air view  
With the Air view feature, you can hover your finger over the  
screen and Air view features will be displayed. For example,  
you can hover your finger over a scheduled item in your  
calendar to see more details.  
• Progress preview: allows you to preview a scene or show  
elapsed time when you hover your finger over the progress bar  
while watching a video.  
• Speed dial preview: allows you to see the contacts and their  
speed dial numbers when you hover your finger over them in  
your contacts list.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Air view  
.
2. Tap the ON/OFF icon at the top of your screen to  
• Webpage magnifier: allows you to see magnified links on  
webpages when you hover your finger over them.  
• Sound and haptic feedback: allows you to play sound and  
feel vibration when you hover your finger over Air view items.  
ON  
activate Air view (  
).  
Changing Your Settings  
315  
 
Voice control  
The Voice control settings allow you to set up voice  
commands to control your device.  
Note: If you set the alert type for calls or alarms to vibration,  
voice control will not be available.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap My device tab ➔  
Add Account  
Voice control  
2. Verify the feature is active by tapping  
top of your screen to activate Voice control.  
.
This menu allows you to set up, manage, and synchronize  
accounts, including your Google and email accounts.  
ON  
at the  
Adding an Account  
1. From the Home screen, press  
3. The following options are available. Tap an option to  
create a checkmark and activate the feature.  
and then tap  
(Accounts tab).  
Settings  
• Incoming calls: allows you to answer or reject calls using the  
2. Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap Add  
account and select one of the account types.  
3. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your  
credentials and set up the account.  
commands Answer and Reject  
• ChatON: allows you to answer or reject calls using the  
commands Answer and Reject  
• Alarm: allows you to stop or snooze an alarm by using the  
commands Stop and Snooze  
• Camera: allows you to take pictures using the voice  
commands Smile Cheese Capture, or Shoot  
• Music: allows you to control your Music player using the voice  
commands Next Previous Pause Play Volume Up, and  
Volume Down  
.
.
4. A green circle will appear next to the account type once  
you have created an account. Your email account will  
also be displayed in the Accounts section of the main  
Settings menu.  
.
,
,
.
,
,
,
,
.
316  
   
Removing an Account  
Synchronizing a Accounts  
By default, all managed accounts are synchronized. You can  
also manually sync all current accounts.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab.  
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its  
messages, contacts, and other data from the  
device.  
2. Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap the  
account name.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab.  
2. Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap the  
account name.  
3. Tap the account name entry.  
4. Tap Sync now to synchronize your account or tap Sync  
all to synchronize all your accounts. Tap Cancel sync to  
stop the synchronization.  
3. From the Accounts area of the screen, tap the account  
entry.  
5. Tap Settings to access your account settings.  
4. Tap Remove account, then tap Remove account at the  
prompt to remove the account and delete all its  
messages, contacts, and other data.  
Changing Your Settings  
317  
5. Tap Sync settings, select which device parameters will  
be synched, and tap Sync now. Choose from: Sync  
Calendar, Sync Contacts, Sync Internet bookmarks,  
Sync Internet opened pages, and Sync Memo.  
6. Tap Backup or Restore to launch the feature.  
• Backup: manually loads up the currently selected categories  
and backs up the data to your cloud storage location. Tap  
Backup to begin the manual backup process.  
Cloud  
This feature allows you to use your external cloud storage  
solution to both synchronize your device to your Samsung  
account and then backup that local content to the cloud.  
Your device comes with a built-in Cloud storage solution  
known as Dropbox.  
Important! This feature requires an active Wi-Fi connection  
prior to use.  
• Restore: allows you to retrieve your previously backed up data  
from your Samsung account and then download it to your  
device.  
1. Log into your Samsung account and verify it is active.  
2. Log into your external cloud storage solution. In our  
case we are using a Dropbox account. For more  
3. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings Accounts tab) Cloud.  
(
4. Confirm your Samsung account appears at the top of  
the screen.  
318  
   
5. Tap Factory data reset to reset your device and sound  
settings to the factory default settings. For more  
information, refer to “Factory Data Reset” on page  
323.  
Backup and Reset  
Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone  
to erase all personal data.  
From the Home screen, press  
Settings Accounts tab) Backup and  
reset  
and then tap  
6. Tap Collect diagnostics to collects diagnostic data for  
troubleshooting use. For more information, refer to  
“Collect Diagnostics” on page 323.  
(
.
Mobile Backup and Restore  
The device can be configured to back up your current  
settings, application data and settings.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab ➔  
Backing up Your Data Before Factory  
Reset  
Backing Up Your Contacts using an SD card  
Backup and reset  
.
Before initiating a factory reset, it is recommended that you  
backup your personal data prior to use.  
2. Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current  
phone settings and applications.  
Important! If you choose to back up contacts to your SIM card,  
all information other than name and number is lost.  
Therefore, it is recommended that you back up  
contacts to your SD card.  
3. Tap Backup account to assign the account being  
backed up.  
4. Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re-installation of  
a previously installed application (including  
preferences and data).  
Changing Your Settings  
319  
               
To export a Contact list to your microSD card:  
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts).  
2. Press  
3. Tap Export to SD card  
Backing Up Media to your PC  
(
You can back up your pictures, videos, documents, and other  
media to your PC. You can connect your device to a PC as a  
removable disk and copy files back and forth between your  
phone and PC. If you insert an SD card in the device, you can  
also access the files directory from the SD card by using your  
device as a memory card reader.  
1. Connect the USB cable to your device, then connect the  
cable to your PC USB port. After a few seconds, a  
pop-up window displays on the PC when it is  
and then tap Import/Export  
.
OK. The contacts will be stored  
in a .vcf file on your SD card.  
To copy contacts from an SD card back to your device:  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
(Contacts).  
2. Press  
and then tap Import/Export  
Import from  
connected with your device.  
USB storage  
.
2. On the PC pop-up, click Open device to view files.  
3. Verify your device appears as a removable disk on your  
PC. Once connected, you can access the Phone folder  
(internal phone memory) and the Card folder (SD card).  
4. Select the location where the files are that you would  
like to copy to your PC (Phone or Card).  
3. At the Save contact to prompt, tap Device. The contacts  
on the SD card are copied to your phone.  
5. Select the folders where the information is kept. This  
would include folders such as DCIM (camera pictures  
and videos), Pictures, Music, Playlists, Download, etc.  
320  
     
6. Select the files that you want to copy and copy them  
(Control C - copy) to a folder on your PC (Control V -  
paste).  
2. Select the folder where the files are that you would like  
to copy to the SD card. This would include folders such  
as DCIM (camera pictures and videos), Pictures, Music,  
Playlists, Download, etc. For example, tap  
My Files) Images Camera  
(Apps)  
7. Disconnect the USB cable from your phone and the PC.  
8. To copy files on your PC back to your phone, simply  
reverse the procedure.  
(
.
3. Tap the files that you want to copy to create a  
checkmark in the box next to the filename.  
Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:  
4. Tap the options icon in the top right corner of the  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gallery).  
(Apps) ➔  
display.  
(
5. Select Copy  
SD memory card.  
2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and  
videos.  
6. Go to the folder on your SD card where you would like  
to copy to files to. For example, Pictures.  
3. Remove both the back cover and remove the internal  
microSD card prior to initiating the process.  
7. Tap Paste here in the top right corner of the display.  
8. The files are copied to the folder.  
Backing Up Media to your SD card  
You can back up your pictures, videos, documents, and other  
media to your SD card.  
1. From the Home screen, tap  
My Files).  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Changing Your Settings  
321  
     
9. When you get a new phone, update your software, or  
reset your device, sign in to your Samsung account and  
the backed up bookmarks will be displayed on your  
Bookmarks page under the Samsung account heading.  
Backing Up Internet Bookmarks to your  
Samsung Account  
You can back up your Internet bookmarks by using your  
Samsung account. Only bookmarks you have added (non-  
default) can be backed up.  
Backing Up Settings to Google  
You can use your Google account to back up apps, Wi-Fi  
passwords, and other data.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab.  
2. Navigate to the My accounts area and then tap Add  
account and select Samsung account  
.
1. From the Home screen, tap  
Gmail).  
(Apps) ➔  
3. Sign in to your Samsung account or tap Create new  
account if you don't have one yet.  
(
2. Tap Existing if you have a Google account.  
The Inbox loads conversations and email.  
– or –  
Follow the on-screen instructions.  
4. From the Home screen, tap  
Internet).  
5. From the webpage, tap  
6. Press and then tap Move to folder  
7. Place a checkmark on those Bookmarks you want to  
back up, then tap Done  
(Apps) ➔  
(
Tap New if you do not have a Google account.  
(
Bookmarks).  
3. Confirm that immediately after signing in to your  
Google account, the Backup and restore screen is  
displayed.  
.
.
4. From within the Backup and restore screen, tap the  
checkbox next to Keep this phone backed up with my  
Google Account field.  
8. Select a location or folder. The Bookmarks that you  
moved are now listed under the Samsung account  
heading in your Bookmark list.  
5. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab ➔  
Backup and reset  
.
322  
     
6. Tap Back up my data to create a checkmark. This will  
back up your app data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other  
settings.  
Collect Diagnostics  
This feature only collects diagnostic data for troubleshooting  
use.  
7. Your Google account should be listed under the Backup  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab ➔  
option. If not, Tap Backup account  
Add account and  
Backup and reset  
Collect diagnostics.  
sign into your Google account.  
2. Read the on-screen System Manager Application  
8. Tap the checkbox next to Automatic restore to create a  
checkmark. This will restore the settings that were  
backed up when you re-install an application.  
information.  
Note: This software collects only diagnostic data from your  
device so that T-Mobile technicians can better  
troubleshoot issues with your device.  
Factory Data Reset  
From this menu you can reset your device and sound settings  
to the factory default settings.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap Accounts tab ➔  
3. Choose to enable or disable the feature by placing a  
check mark in the Allow diagnostics to be collected  
field.  
Backup and reset  
Factory data reset.  
2. Read the on-screen reset information.  
3. Tap Reset device.  
4. Select either More Info (to read additional information)  
or Close to close the message screen.  
4. If necessary, enter your password and tap Delete all  
The device resets to the factory default settings  
automatically and when finished displays the Home  
screen.  
.
Changing Your Settings  
323  
           
• Use GPS satellites: allows applications to use GPS to pinpoint  
your location.  
Important! Selecting Close only closes the current description  
screen and does not disable data collection.  
• Use wireless networks: allows applications to use data from  
mobile networks and Wi-Fi to help determine your location.  
• My places: allows you to add location information for your  
Home, Office, and Car.  
To disable data collection, go to Settings  
up and reset Collect diagnostics and turn off the  
Allow diagnostics to be collected feature.  
Back  
Location Services  
The Location services allows you to configure the device’s  
location services.  
Enabling the GPS Satellites  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Location  
services  
.
2. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.  
Important! The more location determining functions are  
enabled, the more accurate the determination will  
be of your position.  
Using Wireless Networks  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find  
your location or search for places of interest, you must  
enable the Use wireless networks option.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings More tab) Location services.  
(
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Location  
2. Tap any of the following options to create a checkmark  
and activate the service:  
services  
.
2. Tap Use wireless networks to allow apps to use data  
from sources such as Wi-Fi and mobile networks to  
provide a better approximation of your current location.  
• Access to my location: allows apps that have asked your  
permission to use your location information. Tap the ON/OFF  
slider to turn it on.  
324  
             
Enabling My Places  
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Location  
Encryption may take an hour or more.  
services  
.
2. Tap My places to enable the storage of your favorite  
Setting up SIM Card Lock  
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make  
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on  
your SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.  
locations.  
Security  
The Security settings allow you to determine the security  
level for your device.  
When enabled, your phone will ask for a PIN number each  
time you use the phone. Using this option you can also  
change your SIM PIN number.  
Encrypt Device  
When enabled, this feature requires a numeric PIN or  
password to decrypt your device each time you power it on  
or encrypt the data on your SD card each time it is  
connected:  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security  
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock  
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap  
OK  
.
.
.
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings More tab) Security.  
(
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change  
2. Tap Encrypt device. For more information, read the  
displayed help screen.  
your SIM PIN code.  
3. Tap Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption  
on SD card data that requires a password be entered  
each time the microSD card is connected.  
To change an existing SIM Card PIN:  
1. Tap Change SIM PIN  
2. Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK  
3. Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
Changing Your Settings  
.
.
.
325  
           
4. Re-type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK  
.
Unknown Sources  
Before you can download a web application you must enable  
the Unknown sources feature (enables downloading).  
Developers can use this option to install non-Play Store  
applications.  
Password Settings  
When you create a phone password you can also configure  
the phone to display the password as you type it instead of  
using an asterisk (*).  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security  
.
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security  
.
2. Tap Unknown sources to active this feature.  
2. Tap Make passwords visible to activate this feature.  
Verify Apps  
Allows you to block or warn yourself before installing apps  
that can cause harm.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security  
Device Administration  
Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your  
phone in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate  
PC. This would be beneficial in the case that your phone was  
lost or stolen. The phone could be “deactivated” or  
.
2. Tap Verify apps to active this feature.  
“restricted” (through administration) from a remote location.  
Note: Enabling this feature can prevent installation of some  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security  
2. Tap Device administrators to begin configuring this  
setting.  
.
applications from the Play Store.  
3. Select an administrator device and follow the prompts.  
326  
 
Credential Storage  
Application Manager  
This option allows certain applications to access secure  
certificates and other credentials. Certificates and  
credentials can be installed to the SD card and password  
protected.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Security  
2. Tap Trusted credentials to display only trusted CA  
certificates. A check mark displayed next to the feature  
indicates secure credentials.  
This device can be used for Android development. You can  
write applications in the SDK and install them on this device,  
then run the applications using the hardware, system, and  
network. This feature allows you to configure the device for  
development.  
.
Warning! Because the device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or  
any other company, end-users operate these devices  
at their own risk.  
3. Tap Install from device storage to install encrypted  
certificates from the USB Storage location.  
This menu allows you to manage installed applications. You  
can view and control currently running services, or use the  
device for application development.  
4. Tap Clear credentials to clear the device (SD card or  
phone memory) of all certificate contents and reset the  
credentials password.  
You can also view the amount of memory or resources used  
as well as the remaining memory and resources for each of  
the applications on your phone and clear the data, cache, or  
defaults.  
From the Home screen, press  
Settings More tab) Application manager  
ALL  
and then tap  
(
.
Changing Your Settings  
327  
 
Clearing Application Cache and Data  
5. Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then  
tap OK  
.
Important! You must have downloaded applications installed  
Memory Usage  
to use this feature.  
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running  
applications.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab ➔  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab ➔  
Application manager  
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.  
3. Tap Force stop Uninstall, Clear data Clear cache, or  
Clear defaults  
Uninstalling Third-party Applications  
.
Applications manager  
.
2. Tap DOWNLOADED RUNNING, or ALL to display memory  
,
,
,
usage for that category of applications.  
.
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows  
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom  
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.  
Important! You must have downloaded applications installed  
to use this feature.  
Downloaded  
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab ➔  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab ➔  
Application manager  
.
Applications manager  
.
2. Tap the DOWNLOADED tab and select your desired  
application.  
2. Tap the DOWNLOADED tab to view a list of all the  
downloaded applications on your device.  
3. Tap Uninstall (from within the top area of the  
Application info page).  
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the  
Downloaded tabs, press  
Sort by name  
and select Sort by size or  
4. At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application.  
.
328  
     
4. Tap an application to view and update information  
about the application, including memory usage, default  
settings, and permissions.  
Storage Used  
This option allows you to view a list (on the current tab) of  
current applications as sorted by size.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab ➔  
Running Services  
The Running services option allows you to view and control  
currently running services such as Backup, Google Talk, SNS  
(messaging), Swype, and more.  
Application manager  
2. Tap the ALL tab to display all available applications.  
3. Press and then tap Sort by size to change the  
.
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab ➔  
current list to show items based on the amount of  
storage they occupy.  
Application manager  
.
2. Tap the RUNNING tab to view all currently active and  
running applications. This tab also shows the total RAM  
being used by these currently active applications.  
3. Tap a process and select Stop to end the process and  
stop it from running. When you stop the process the  
service or application will no longer run until you start  
the process or application again.  
Reset App Preferences  
This feature provides you with the ability to reset all  
preferences for the following features: Disabled apps,  
Disabled app notifications, Default applications for actions,  
and Background data restrictions.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab ➔  
Applications manager  
.
4. Tap Show cached processes to view additional cached  
applications.  
2. Tap the ALL tab to display all available applications.  
3. Press  
Reset apps  
and then tap Reset app preferences  
.
Important! Stopping a process might have undesirable  
consequences on the application.  
Changing Your Settings  
329  
     
SD Card & Device Storage  
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the  
memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.  
Important! As an example, if you assigned your browser to  
always launch YouTube links and want that  
changed, you must reset the default actions.  
microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB.  
microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up to  
32GB.  
Battery Usage  
This option allows you to view a list of those components  
using battery power. The amount of time the battery was  
used also displays. Battery usage displays in percentages  
per application.  
microSDXC™ memory card types can include capacities greater  
than 32GB.  
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:  
From the Home screen, press and then tap  
Settings More tab) Storage  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings More tab) Battery. The battery  
(
(
.
level displays in percentage.  
The available memory displays under the Total space  
and SD card headings.  
2. From the upper-right tap  
(Refresh) to update the  
list.  
– or –  
Important! DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is  
accessing or transferring files. Doing so will result  
in loss or damage of data. Make sure your battery  
is fully charged before using the microSD card.  
Your data may become damaged or lost if the  
battery runs out while you are using the microSD  
card.  
Tap an entry to view more detailed information.  
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery  
use.  
330  
         
Mounting the SD Card  
Erasing Files from the SD card  
To erase files from the SD card using the device:  
1. Ensure the SD card is mounted.  
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You  
must mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the  
SD card establishes a USB connection with your computer.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Storage  
2. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Storage  
.
Mount SD card  
.
2. Tap Mount SD card  
.
3. Tap Format SD card  
Format SD card  
Delete all to  
Unmounting the SD card  
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to  
the SD card while removing it from the slot.  
format the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all  
the data stored on it.  
1. From the main Settings page, tap More tab Storage  
.
2. Tap Unmount SD card  
OK.  
3. After the “SD card will be unmounted” message  
displays and the Mount SD card now appears in the  
menu list, remove the SD card.  
Changing Your Settings  
331  
     
Date and Time  
About Device  
This menu allows you to change the current time and date  
displayed.  
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial  
information, and other phone information such as the model  
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernel version,  
and software build number.  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings More tab) Date and time.  
(
To access phone information:  
2. Tap Automatic date and time to allow the network set  
the date and time.  
From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings More tab) About device. The  
following information displays:  
• Software update: allows you to connect to the network and  
upload any new phone software directly to your device. The  
device automatically updates with the latest available software  
when you access this option.  
(
Important! Deactivate Automatic date and time to manually set  
the rest of the options.  
3. Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the  
Month  
4. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour  
and Minute. Tap PM or AM, then tap Set  
,
Day, and Year then tap Set.  
,
• Status: displays the battery status, the level of the battery  
(percentage), the Network connection, Signal strength, Mobile  
network type, Service state, Roaming status, Mobile network  
state, My phone number, IMEI number, IP address, Wi-Fi MAC  
address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, Up time, and  
Device status.  
.
5. Tap Automatic time zone to allow the network set the  
time zone information automatically.  
6. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.  
7. Tap Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the device  
automatically uses a 12-hour format.  
8. Tap Select date format and select the date format type.  
332  
             
• Legal information: This option displays information about  
Open source licenses, Google legal information, as well as  
License settings. This information clearly provides copyright  
and distribution legal information and facts as well as Google  
Terms of Service, Terms of Service for Android-powered  
Phones, and much more pertinent information as a reference.  
• Build number: displays the software, build number.  
Note: Firmware, baseband, kernel and build numbers are  
usually used for updates to the handset or support. For  
additional information please contact your T-Mobile  
service representative.  
Read the information and terms, then press  
the Settings menu.  
to return to  
• SELinux status: displays the status of SELinux. SELinux is a  
set of security policies/modules which is applied to the device  
to improve the overall security.  
Tip: To find your device’s DivX® registration code and  
Software Update  
information about registering your device to play DivX  
protected video, tap License settings  
DivX® VOD.  
The Software Update feature enables you to use your device  
to connect to the network and upload any new software  
directly to your device. The device automatically updates  
with the latest available software when you access this  
option.  
• Device name: allows you to both display and edit the device’s  
name.  
• Model number: displays the device’s model number.  
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status  
at a glance:  
• Android version: displays the firmware version loaded on this  
device.  
Displays when the Software updated feature is  
active.  
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on  
this device.  
Displays when the Software update feature is in  
progress.  
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this  
device.  
Changing Your Settings  
333  
     
To update your device:  
1. From the Home screen, press  
and then tap  
Settings  
(
More tab) About device  
Software update  
.
2. Read the Software update information screen.  
3. Select an available option:  
Note: You configure the device’s software update parameters.  
• Cancel: Tap this option to cancel the operation.  
• Wi-Fi settings: Enable this option to only download available  
updates via an active Wi-Fi connection. If disabled, the device  
will begin available downloads via its’ T-Mobile connection.  
• OK: Tap this option to connect to the remote server, detect if  
there is an available update, the begin the download over your  
existing data connection.  
Software updates can include bug fixes, enhancements to  
services, to the device or currently installed software.  
334  
 
Section 11: Health and Safety Information  
This device is capable of operating in Wi-Fi mode in the 2.4  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
and 5 GHz bands. The FCC requires that devices operating  
within 5.15-5.25 GHz may only be used indoors, not outside,  
in order to avoid interference with Mobile Satellite Services  
(MSS). Therefore, do not use this device outside as a Wi-Fi  
hotspot or in Wi-Fi Direct mode outside when using the  
5.15-5.25 GHz band.  
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will  
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of  
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health  
problems.  
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.  
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds  
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio  
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some  
researchers have reported biological changes associated  
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.  
The majority of studies published have failed to show an  
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell  
phone and health problems.  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with  
using your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone”  
are used in this section to refer to your phone. Read this  
information before using your mobile device  
.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published  
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)  
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication  
includes the following information:  
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the  
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at  
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by  
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects  
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not  
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health  
effects.  
Health and Safety Information  
335  
         
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not  
be confused with the effects from other types of  
electromagnetic energy.  
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection  
between RF and certain health problems?  
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In  
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies  
that have shown a connection have failed.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found  
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.  
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away  
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can  
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the  
genetic material.  
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the  
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association  
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones  
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community  
has supported additional research to address gaps in  
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.  
Interphone Study  
Interphone is a large international study designed to  
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and  
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal  
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for  
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and  
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.  
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,  
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great  
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.  
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.  
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,  
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic  
radiation with relatively low frequencies.  
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can  
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two  
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly  
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little  
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.  
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused  
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk  
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the  
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour  
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a  
336  
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors  
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions  
being drawn from this data. Additional information about  
Interphone can be found at  
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio  
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence  
(MOBI-KIDS)  
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the  
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy  
from communication technologies including cell phones and  
brain cancer in young people. This is an international  
multi-center study involving 14 European and non-European  
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be  
found at  
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did  
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional  
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA  
continues to monitor developments in this field.  
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users  
(COSMOS)  
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health  
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there  
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio  
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study  
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in  
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the  
COSMOS study can be found at  
http://www.creal.cat/programes-recerca/en_projectes-creal/  
view.php?ID=39.  
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)  
Program of the National Cancer Institute  
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer  
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of  
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk  
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell  
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.  
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence  
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about  
SEER can be found at  
.
.
Health and Safety Information  
337  
Cell Phone Industry Actions  
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA  
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry  
to take a number of steps, including the following:  
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy  
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency  
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not  
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are  
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take  
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.  
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF  
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;  
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to  
the user; and  
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
your head and the cell phone.  
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current  
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.  
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting  
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on  
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to  
assure that safety standards continue to adequately protect  
the public.  
Hands-Free Kits  
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets  
and various types of body-worn accessories such as  
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to  
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.  
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the  
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in  
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in  
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance  
requirements when used against the head and against the  
body.  
338  
 
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for  
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in  
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.  
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head  
from RF Radiation  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
accessories which claim to shield the head from those  
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield  
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while  
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory  
attached to the phone.  
Children and Cell Phones  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users  
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and  
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure  
apply to children and teenagers as well.  
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
the head and the cell phone.  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones  
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United  
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.  
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no  
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors  
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone  
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based  
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.  
Studies have shown that these products generally do not  
work as advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called  
“shields” may interfere with proper operation of the phone.  
The phone may be forced to boost its power to compensate,  
leading to an increase in RF absorption.  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from  
various sources can be obtained from the following  
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):  
FCC RF Safety Program:  
Health and Safety Information  
339  
 
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information  
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is  
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure  
limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal  
Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):  
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)  
.
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the  
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)  
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed  
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,  
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the  
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF  
energy.  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
Health Protection Agency:  
US Food and Drug Administration:  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile  
phones employs a unit of measurement known as the  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the  
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body  
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC  
requires wireless phones to comply with a safety limit of 1.6  
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
340  
   
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety  
to give additional protection to the public and to account for  
any variations in measurements.  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with  
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an  
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all  
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC  
RF exposure guidelines. This mobile phone has a FCC ID  
number: A3LSGHM919 [Model Number: SGH-M919] and the  
specific SAR levels for this mobile phone can be found at the  
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its  
highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.  
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified  
power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while  
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.  
This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple  
power levels so as to use only the power required to reach  
the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base  
station antenna, the lower the power output of the phone.  
following FCC website:http://www.fcc.gov/oet/ea/  
The SAR information for this device can also be found on  
Samsung’s website: http://www.samsung.com/sar  
.
.
SAR information on this and other model phones can be  
accessed online on the FCC's website through http://  
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that  
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone  
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the  
case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary to  
remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have  
the FCC ID number for a particular phone, follow the  
instructions on the website and it should provide values for  
typical or maximum SAR for a particular phone. Additional  
SAR information can also be obtained at  
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public,  
it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not  
exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for each  
model phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at  
the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC. For  
body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets  
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory  
that contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a  
minimum of 1.0cm from the body.  
.
Health and Safety Information  
341  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
FCC Part 15 Information to User  
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned  
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Commercial Mobile Alerting System  
(CMAS)  
This device is designed to receive wireless emergency alerts  
from the Commercial Mobile Alerting System ("CMAS";  
which may also be known as the Personal Localized Alerting  
Network ("PLAN")). If your wireless provider has chosen to  
participate in CMAS/PLAN, alerts are available while in the  
provider's coverage area. If you travel outside your provider's  
coverage area, wireless emergency alerts may not be  
available. For more information, please contact your wireless  
provider.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and  
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications.  
Smart Practices While Driving  
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not  
occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and  
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
On the Road - Off the Phone  
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe  
operation of his or her vehicle.  
342  
           
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task  
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,  
drinking, talking to passengers, or talking on a mobile phone  
- unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is  
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their  
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while  
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your  
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that  
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes  
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible  
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand  
and address distractions.  
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these  
tips:  
Use a hands-free device;  
Secure your phone within easy reach;  
Place calls when you are not moving;  
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;  
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are  
driving and will suspend the call if necessary;  
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;  
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in  
an automobile:  
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices  
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always  
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or  
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use  
may be permitted in certain areas.  
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or  
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law  
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in  
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or  
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in  
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could  
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.  
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the  
call go to voicemail when driving conditions require.  
Remember, driving comes first, not the call!  
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the  
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.  
Health and Safety Information  
343  
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web  
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.  
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.  
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion.  
Even when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate  
normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety  
hazard. If the phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked  
by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear  
to be working properly.  
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video  
games while operating a vehicle.  
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org  
.
Battery Use and Safety  
Important! Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or  
damage. Most battery issues arise from improper  
handling of batteries and, particularly, from the  
continued use of damaged batteries.  
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive  
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the  
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery  
with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair  
dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in  
high temperatures.  
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise  
attempt to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high  
degree of pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an  
internal short-circuit, resulting in overheating.  
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone  
or the battery may explode when overheated.  
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking  
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For  
safe disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized  
service center.  
344  
   
Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the  
battery, especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause  
damage to the phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the  
phone or battery, take it to a service center for inspection.  
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers  
Some websites and second-hand dealers not associated with  
reputable manufacturers and carriers, might be selling  
incompatible or even counterfeit batteries and chargers.  
Consumers should purchase manufacturer or  
.
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way  
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental  
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key,  
jewelry, clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the +  
and - terminals of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for  
example when you carry a spare battery in a pocket or bag.  
Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the  
object causing the short-circuiting.  
.
carrier-recommended products and accessories. If unsure about  
whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible, contact  
the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and  
charging devices could result in damage to the equipment  
and a possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to  
serious injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious  
hazard  
.
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and  
recharge your battery only with  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
Samsung-approved chargers which are  
specifically designed for your phone.  
WARNING!  
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not  
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.  
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.  
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may  
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard  
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone  
caused by nonSamsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.  
.
Health and Safety Information  
345  
   
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and  
accessories may not be available in your area.  
Mail It In  
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide  
Samsung customers with a free recycling mailing label.  
Just go to  
A_recyle_your_phone_page and follow the instructions to  
print out a free pre-paid postage label and then send your  
old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via U.S.  
Mail, for recycling.  
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung  
mobile device by working with respected take-back  
companies in every state in the country.  
Drop It Off  
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device  
and batteries for recycling at one of our numerous  
Samsung Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these  
locations may be found at:  
http://pages.samsung.com/us/recyclingdirect/  
usactivities_environment_samsungrecyclingdirect_locations.  
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved  
recycler.  
jsp.  
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:  
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted  
at these locations for no fee.  
Or call, (877) 278-0799.  
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile  
devices and batteries  
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance  
with local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these  
items in household or business trash may be prohibited. Help  
us protect the environment - recycle!  
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or  
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations  
where mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional  
information regarding specific locations may be found at:  
.
346  
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE  
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR  
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.  
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may  
explode.  
Display / Touch-Screen  
UL Certified Travel Charger  
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL  
safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety  
instructions per UL guidelines:  
Please note the following information when using your  
mobile device:  
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or  
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is  
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use  
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause  
injury to you.  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY  
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE  
PROPERTY DAMAGE.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH  
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR  
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE  
POWER OUTLET.  
Health and Safety Information  
347  
       
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A  
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE  
airtime, data charges, and/or additional charges may apply in  
accordance with your service plan. Contact your wireless  
service provider for details.  
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,  
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a  
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic  
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when  
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the  
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For  
more information, please refer to the “Standard  
Limited Warranty”.  
Your Location  
Location-based information includes information that can be  
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile  
device. Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless  
network transmit location-based information. Additionally, if  
you use applications that require location-based information  
(e.g. driving directions), such applications transmit  
location-based information. The location-based information  
may be shared with third-parties, including your wireless  
service provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other  
third-parties providing services.  
GPS & AGPS  
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning  
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS  
uses satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are  
subject to changes implemented in accordance with the  
Department of Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio  
navigation Plan (FRP). Changes may affect the performance  
of location-based technology on your mobile device.  
Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls  
When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may  
activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the  
emergency responders your approximate location.  
AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area  
Therefore:  
.
Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted  
Global Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information  
from the cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS  
uses your wireless service provider's network and therefore  
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of  
your ability; and  
348  
   
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency  
responder instructs you.  
make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be  
switched on and in a service area with adequate signal  
strength.  
Navigation  
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile  
device networks or when certain network services and/or  
mobile device features are in use. Check with local service  
providers.  
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data  
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or  
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over  
time. In some areas, complete information may not be  
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that  
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see  
before following them. All users should pay attention to road  
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may  
To make an emergency call:  
1. If the mobile device is not on, switch it on.  
2. From the Home screen, tap  
.
3. Key in the emergency number for your present location  
(for example, 911 or other official emergency number).  
Emergency numbers vary by location.  
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs  
.
Emergency Calls  
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates  
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well  
as user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee  
connection in all conditions, areas, or circumstances.  
4. Tap  
.
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you  
may first need to deactivate those features before you can  
make an emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your  
local cellular service provider. When making an emergency  
call, remember to give all the necessary information as  
accurately as possible. Remember that your mobile device  
Therefore, you should never rely solely on any wireless  
mobile device for essential communications (medical  
emergencies, for example). Before traveling in remote or  
underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate method of  
contacting emergency services personnel. Remember, to  
Health and Safety Information  
349  
   
may be the only means of communication at the scene of an  
Extreme heat or cold  
accident; do not cut off the call until given permission to do  
so.  
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /  
113°F.  
Care and Maintenance  
Microwaves  
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The  
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty  
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many  
years:  
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.  
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.  
Dust and dirt  
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.  
Cleaning solutions  
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:  
Liquids of any kind  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong  
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft  
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water  
solution.  
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and  
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic  
circuits. If the mobile device does get wet, do not  
accelerate drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or  
dryer, because this may damage the mobile device and  
could cause a fire or explosion.  
Shock or vibration  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards.  
Paint  
Do not use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so  
may cause an electric shock to you or damage to the  
mobile device.  
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the  
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent  
proper operation.  
350  
   
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting  
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of  
sound, settings, and equipment.  
Responsible Listening  
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss  
.
You should follow some common sense recommendations  
when using any portable audio device:  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as  
sound is played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged  
exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the most  
common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some scientific  
research suggests that using portable audio devices, such as  
portable music players and cell phones, at high volume  
settings for long durations may lead to permanent  
noise-induced hearing loss.  
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into  
an audio source.  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest  
volume at which you can hear adequately.  
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,  
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your  
hearing.  
This includes the use of headphones (including headsets,  
earbuds, and Bluetooth® or other wireless devices).  
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in  
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),  
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential  
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound  
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the  
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot  
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to  
you can hear what you are listening to.  
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,  
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background  
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,  
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music  
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.  
Health and Safety Information  
351  
   
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less  
time is required before you hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,  
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.  
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound  
normal.  
National Institute on Deafness and Other  
Communication Disorders  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or  
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your  
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
Internet:  
National Institute for Occupational Safety  
and Health (NIOSH)  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Washington, DC 20201  
American Academy of Audiology  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH  
(1-800-356-4674)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Internet:  
352  
Implantable Medical Devices  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an  
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or  
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential  
interference with the device.  
Internet:  
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/  
default.html  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Persons who have such devices:  
Operating Environment  
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches  
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is  
turned ON;  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any  
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is  
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or  
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory  
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety  
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.  
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic  
Devices  
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any  
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;  
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of  
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about  
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical  
device, consult your health care provider.  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic  
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from  
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to  
discuss alternatives.  
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-  
.
Health and Safety Information  
353  
   
Other Medical Devices  
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are  
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling  
point (service station).  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able  
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your  
mobile device off in health care facilities when any  
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.  
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment  
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the  
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and  
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting  
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive  
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They  
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage  
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as  
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals  
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any  
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off  
your vehicle engine.  
Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with  
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle  
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You  
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that  
has been added to your vehicle.  
Posted Facilities  
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted  
notices require you to do so.  
When your Device is Wet  
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is  
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if  
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,  
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it  
to a service center.  
Potentially Explosive Environments  
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a  
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and  
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion  
354  
be able to use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out  
the mobile device with your hearing device is the best way to  
evaluate it for your personal needs.  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices  
The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has  
established requirements for digital wireless mobile devices  
to be compatible with hearing aids and other assistive  
hearing devices.  
M-Ratings: Wireless mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet  
FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference  
to hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled.  
M4 is the better/higher of the two ratings. M-ratings refer to  
enabling acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not  
operate in telecoil mode.  
When individuals employing some assistive hearing devices  
(hearing aids and cochlear implants) use wireless mobile  
devices, they may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining  
noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others  
to this interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the  
amount of interference they generate.  
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC  
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to  
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4  
is the better/higher of the two ratings. T-ratings refer to  
enabling inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in  
telecoil mode.  
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating  
system for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device  
users find mobile devices that may be compatible with their  
hearing devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated.  
Mobile devices that are rated have the rating on their box or  
a label located on the box.  
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing aid  
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you  
find this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device  
is relatively immune to interference noise.  
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending  
on the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing  
device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not  
Under the current industry standard, American National  
Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19, the hearing aid and  
wireless mobile device rating values are added together to  
indicate how usable they are together. For example, if a  
Health and Safety Information  
355  
   
hearing aid meets the M2 level rating and the wireless  
mobile device meets the M3 level rating, the sum of the two  
values equals M5.  
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in  
the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19  
standard.  
HAC for Newer Technologies  
Under the standard, this should provide the hearing aid user  
with normal use while using the hearing aid with the  
particular wireless mobile device. A sum of 6 or more would  
indicate excellent performance.  
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing  
aids for some of the wireless technologies that it uses.  
However, there may be some newer wireless technologies  
used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use with  
hearing aids.  
However, these are not guarantees that all users will be  
satisfied. T ratings work similarly.  
It is important to try the different features of this phone  
thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid  
or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering  
noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of  
this phone for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you  
have questions about return or exchange policies, consult  
your service provider or phone retailer.  
M3  
+
M2  
=
5
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device  
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play  
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,  
damage the mobile device, or make calls that increase your  
mobile device bill.  
T3  
+
T2  
=
5
356  
   
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out  
of the reach of small children.  
Although your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex  
piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping,  
hitting, bending, or sitting on it.  
FCC Notice and Cautions  
Other Important Safety Information  
FCC Notice  
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or  
install the mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service  
may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to  
the device.  
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used  
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can  
require you to stop using the mobile device if such  
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied  
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with  
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy  
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection  
Association.  
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in  
your vehicle are securely mounted.  
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your  
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.  
Cautions  
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can  
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical  
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the  
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or  
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static  
electricity before inserting the headset.  
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not  
expressly approved in this document could void your  
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to  
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,  
antennas, and chargers. The use of any unauthorized  
accessories may be dangerous and void the mobile device  
warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the  
mobile device.  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive  
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its  
parts, or accessories.  
Health and Safety Information  
357  
       
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed  
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air  
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is  
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could  
result.  
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively  
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a  
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may  
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,  
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended  
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,  
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort  
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.  
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use  
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be  
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate  
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on  
an aircraft.  
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or  
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]  
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension  
or denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or  
both.  
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do  
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.  
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing  
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended  
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device  
immediately.  
358  
Section 12: Warranty Information  
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage  
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal  
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,  
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,  
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents  
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;  
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use  
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;  
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the  
Standard Limited Warranty  
What is covered and for how long?  
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC  
(“SAMSUNG”) warrants that SAMSUNG’s handsets and  
accessories (“Products”) are free from defects in material  
and workmanship under normal use and service for the  
period commencing upon the date of purchase by the first  
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following  
specified period of time after that date:  
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,  
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;  
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in  
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or  
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by  
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper  
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or  
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;  
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as  
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,  
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,  
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;  
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception  
Phone  
1 Year  
Batteries  
1 Year  
Case/Pouch/Holster  
90 Days  
Other Phone Accessories 1 Year  
What is not covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the  
Product.  
Warranty Information  
359  
       
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems  
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased  
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers  
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated  
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does  
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a  
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for  
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are  
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has  
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for  
which it is specified.  
remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original  
Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is longer. All  
replaced Products, parts, components, boards and  
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to  
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or  
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.  
What must you do to obtain warranty service?  
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must  
return the Product to an authorized phone service facility in  
an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by the  
sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the  
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product  
and the seller’s name and address.  
What are SAMSUNG’s obligations?  
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product  
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited  
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at  
SAMSUNG’s sole option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at  
SAMSUNG’s sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new  
parts or components when repairing any Product, or may  
replace the Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new  
Product.  
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please  
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If  
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor  
charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of  
the Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for  
warranty service, as some or all of the contents may be  
deleted or reformatted during the course of warranty service.  
Repaired/replaced cases, pouches and holsters will be  
warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/  
replaced Products will be warranted for a period equal to the  
360  
What are the limits on SAMSUNG’s liability?  
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR  
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH  
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,  
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS  
SOLELY WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER  
OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT.  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF  
SAMSUNG’S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE  
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS.  
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO  
THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF  
THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR, WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF  
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL,  
PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR  
DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE  
PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT  
ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY  
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS  
AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.  
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be  
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with  
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,  
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend  
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or  
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,  
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited  
Warranty.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you  
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO  
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE  
Warranty Information  
361  
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?  
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,  
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are  
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you  
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness  
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant  
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs  
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad  
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no  
more than half of the total administrative, facility and  
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and  
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.  
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with  
a dispute involving any other person’s or entity’s Product or  
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,  
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class  
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single  
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,  
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall  
be conducted according to the American Arbitration  
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to  
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered  
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State  
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,  
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited  
Warranty.  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any  
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or  
performance.  
362  
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by  
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days  
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the  
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to  
Severability  
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or  
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall  
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited  
Warranty.  
[email protected], with the subject line: “Arbitration  
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name  
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;  
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;  
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found  
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product  
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the  
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).  
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer  
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same  
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be  
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting  
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the  
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will  
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using  
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed  
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to  
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of  
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File  
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and  
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the  
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.  
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of  
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in  
order to provide this service at no charge. If the  
warranty has expired on the device, charges may  
apply.  
Warranty Information  
363  
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC  
1301 E. Lookout Drive  
Richardson, Texas 75082  
This device requires the use of preloaded software in its  
normal operation. BY USING THE DEVICE OR ITS PRELOADED  
SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU  
DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR  
THE SOFTWARE.  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG  
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)  
©2012 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All  
rights reserved.  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following  
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions  
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run  
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other  
permanent storage media of one computer and use the  
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,  
and you may not make the Software available over a network  
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same  
time. You may make one copy of the Software in machine  
readable form for backup purposes only; provided that the  
backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary  
notices contained on the original.  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior  
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to  
change without notice. [111611]  
End User License Agreement for  
Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License  
Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you  
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. ("Samsung") for software, owned by  
Samsung and its affiliated companies and its third party  
suppliers and licensors, that accompanies this EULA, which  
includes computer software and may include associated  
media, printed materials, "online" or electronic  
documentation in connection with your use of this device  
("Software").  
Certain items of the Software may be subject to open source  
licenses. The open source license provisions may override  
some of the terms of this EULA. We make the applicable  
open source licenses available to you on the Legal Notices  
section of the Settings menu of your device.  
364  
 
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung  
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.  
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual  
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the  
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the  
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.  
services or technologies to you and will not disclose this  
information in a form that personally identifies you. At all  
times your information will be treated in accordance with  
Samsung’s Privacy Policy, which can be viewed at:  
.
5. SOFTWARE UPDATES. Samsung may provide to you or  
make available to you updates, upgrades, supplements and  
add-on components (if any) of the Software, including bug  
fixes, service upgrades (parts or whole), products or devices,  
and updates and enhancements to any software previously  
installed (including entirely new versions), (collectively  
“Update”) after the date you obtain your initial copy of the  
Software to improve the Software and ultimately enhance  
your user experience with your device. This EULA applies to  
all and any component of the Update that Samsung may  
provide to you or make available to you after the date you  
obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide  
other terms along with such Update. To use Software  
provided through Update, you must first be licensed for the  
Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the Update.  
After the Update, you may no longer use the Software that  
formed the basis for your Update eligibility. The updated  
Software version may add new functions and, in some  
limited cases, may delete existing functions.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software  
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly  
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),  
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create  
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,  
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting  
services with the Software.  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its  
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered  
as part of the product support services related to the  
Software provided to you, if any, such as IMEI (your device’s  
unique identification number), device number, model name,  
customer code, access recording, your device’s current SW  
version, MCC (Mobile Country Code), MNC (Mobile Network  
Code). Samsung and its affiliates may use this information  
solely to improve their products or to provide customized  
Warranty Information  
365  
While the Update will be generally available, in some limited  
circumstances, the Software updates will only be offered by  
your network carrier, and such Software updates will be  
governed by your contractual relationship with your network  
carrier.  
network, which may result in additional charges depending  
on your payment plan. In addition, your enjoyment of some  
features of the Software may be affected by the suitability  
and performance of your device hardware or data access.  
7. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or  
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party  
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device  
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer  
must include all of the Software (including all component  
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this  
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.  
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a  
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the  
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.  
With the “Automatic Update” function enabled (as in the  
default setting in the System Update menu in the Setting),  
your device downloads some Updates automatically from  
time to time. Your device will, however, ask for your consent  
before installing any Update If you choose to disable the  
“Automatic Update” function, then you can check the  
availability of new Updates by clicking on the “Check  
Update” menu in the Setting. We recommend that you check  
availability of any new Updates periodically for optimal use of  
your device. If you want to avoid any use of network data for  
the Update downloads, then you should choose the “Wi-Fi  
Only” option in the Setting. (Regardless of the option you  
choose, the “Automatic Update” function downloads Updates  
only through Wi-Fi connection.)  
8. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the  
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.  
You agree to comply with all applicable international and  
national laws that apply to the Software, including all the  
applicable export restriction laws and regulations.  
6. Some features of the Software may require your device to  
have access to the internet and may be subject to  
restrictions imposed by your network or internet provider.  
Unless your device is connected to the internet through Wi-Fi  
connection, the Software will access through your mobile  
9. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the  
366  
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this  
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all  
copies, full or partial, of the Software.  
SAMSUNG OR ITS AFFILIATES SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER  
THIS DISCLAIMER BY SAMSUNG OF WARRANTY REGARDING  
THE SOFTWARE, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY OF ANY  
SORT FROM SAMSUNG.  
10. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. UNLESS SEPARATELY STATED  
IN A WRITTEN EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY  
11. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third party  
ACCOMPANYING YOUR DEVICE, ALL SOFTWARE PROVIDED  
BY SAMSUNG WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE (WHETHER  
INCLUDED WITH THE DEVICE, DOWNLOADED, OR  
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this  
mobile device. Samsung makes no representations  
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since Samsung  
has no control over such applications, you acknowledge and  
agree that Samsung is not responsible for the availability of  
such applications and is not responsible or liable for any  
content, advertising, products, services, or other materials  
on or available from such applications. You expressly  
acknowledge and agree that use of third party applications is  
at your sole risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory  
quality, performance, accuracy and effort is with you. It is up  
to you to take precautions to ensure that whatever you select  
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,  
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this  
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of  
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to you,  
and do not constitute or imply an endorsement, sponsorship,  
or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third party or its  
products and services. You agree that Samsung shall not be  
OTHERWISE OBTAINED) IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN  
"AS AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND  
FROM SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE  
FULLEST EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE  
LAW, SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS,  
IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY  
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,  
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON  
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER  
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT  
ALLOW EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS  
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,  
WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY YOU FROM  
Warranty Information  
367  
responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage or  
loss, including but not limited to any damage to the mobile  
device or loss of data, caused or alleged to be caused by, or  
in connection with, use of or reliance on any such third party  
content, products, or services available on or through any  
such application. You acknowledge and agree that the use of  
any third-party application is governed by such third party  
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement,  
Privacy Policy, or other such agreement and that any  
information or personal data you provide, whether knowingly  
or unknowingly, to such third-party application provider, will  
be subject to such third party application provider's privacy  
policy, if such a policy exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR  
ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION  
PROVIDER. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY  
membership registration (“Samsung Account”), and your  
rights and obligations will be set forth in separate Samsung  
Account terms and conditions and privacy policies. There are  
non-Samsung Account applications and services that require  
your consent to their separate terms and conditions and  
privacy policies. You expressly acknowledge and agree that  
your use of such applications and services will be subject to  
the applicable terms and conditions and privacy policies.  
13. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR  
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE THE  
SOFTWARE OR ANY THIRD PARTY APPLICATION, ITS  
CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS,  
OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN  
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE  
TO CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, IN-APP PURCHASES,  
AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,  
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF  
SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH  
DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE  
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR  
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER YOUR PERSONAL  
INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD PARTY  
APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH  
PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD  
PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.  
12. SAMSUNG APPLICATIONS. Certain Samsung applications  
and services may be included with, or downloaded to, this  
mobile device. Many of them require Samsung Services  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS OR  
LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOTWITHSTANDING  
368  
THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG ELECTRONIC CO.'S TOTAL  
LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES OF  
ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON  
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF YOUR  
USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS ON  
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS  
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID  
SPECIFICALLY FOR THIS MOBILE DEVICE OR ANY SUCH  
THIRD PARTY APPLICATION THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS  
MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS,  
15. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
the jurisdiction where you are a resident or, if a resident of  
the United States, by the laws of the state of Texas, without  
regard to its conflict of law provisions. This EULA shall not be  
governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the  
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is  
expressly excluded.  
16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION  
.
(a) Non-United States residents. If a dispute, controversy or  
difference arising in any way from this EULA or your use of  
the Software is not amicably settled, it shall be subject to the  
non-exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the jurisdiction  
where you are a resident. Notwithstanding the foregoing,  
Samsung may apply for injunctive remedies (or an equivalent  
type of urgent legal relief) in any jurisdiction.  
EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING SECTIONS 10,  
11, 12 AND 13) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT  
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY  
FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
14. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS RESTRICTED RIGHTS. The  
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as  
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"  
and "commercial software documentation" with only those  
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the  
terms and conditions herein. All Products are provided only  
with "restricted rights" with only those rights as are granted  
to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions  
herein. All Software and Products are provided subject to  
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR) 52.227.19.  
(b) United States residents. ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG  
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS EULA OR YOUR USE OF THE  
SOFTWARE SHALL BE RESOLVED EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH  
FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND NOT BY A COURT OR  
JURY. Any such dispute shall not be combined or  
consolidated with any other person’s or entity’s claim or  
dispute, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,  
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class  
Warranty Information  
369  
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single  
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,  
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall  
be conducted according to the American Arbitration  
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, exceed  
$5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be determined according to  
AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the arbitrator may grant to  
the prevailing party, or apportion among the parties,  
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs.  
Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any  
court of competent jurisdiction. This arbitration provision also  
applies to claims against Samsung’s employees,  
representatives and affiliates if any such claim arises from  
the licensing or use of the Software. You may opt out of this  
dispute resolution procedure by providing notice to Samsung  
no later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first  
consumer purchaser’s purchase of this device. To opt out,  
you must send notice by e-mail to  
[email protected], with the subject line: "Arbitration  
Opt Out." You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your  
name and address; (b) the date on which the device was  
purchased; (c) the device model name or model number; and  
(d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you  
have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on  
the device box; (ii) on the device information screen, which  
can be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of  
the device beneath the battery, if the battery is removable;  
and (iv) on the outside of the device if the battery is not  
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to  
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered  
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State  
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,  
shall govern the interpretation of the EULA and all disputes  
that are subject to this arbitration provision. The arbitrator  
shall decide all issues of interpretation and application of this  
arbitration provision and the EULA. For any arbitration in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less ("Small  
Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your  
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as  
part of any award, but may not grant Samsung its attorney  
fees, expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that  
the claim was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case,  
you shall be required to pay no more than half of the total  
administrative, facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such  
fees, whichever is less, and Samsung shall pay the  
remainder of such fees. Administrative, facility and arbitrator  
fees for arbitrations in which your total damage claims,  
370  
removable). Alternatively, you may opt out by calling  
1-888-987-4357 no later than 30 calendar days from the  
date of the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the  
device and providing the same information. These are the  
only two forms of notice that will be effective to opt out of  
this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out of this dispute  
resolution procedure will not affect your use of the device or  
its preloaded Software, and you will continue to enjoy the  
benefits of this license.  
17. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the  
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the  
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral  
or written communications, proposals and representations  
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter  
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to  
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions  
shall continue in full force and effect. [050113]  
Warranty Information  
371  
Index  
Adobe PDF 228  
Air Call-Accept 66  
Air Gesture  
Activate 46, 312  
Air Browse 312  
Air Call-Accept 312  
Air Jump 312  
Alerts on Call 293  
Allow Diagnostics 18, 324  
AllShare Cast Hub 36  
Activation on Device 197  
Connecting 197  
Set Up Hardware 197  
AllShare Play  
see Samsung Link 193, 234  
AllShareCast Hub 234  
AMBER Alerts 128  
Disable 129  
Android Beam 278  
Answering  
Home Key 293, 295  
Answering a Call 65, 66  
Application cache and data  
Clearing 227  
Application Menus  
Navigating through 53  
Applications 43  
Numerics  
2G Network  
Using Only 274  
2-Sec Pause  
Adding 65  
A
ABC 87  
Accessing  
Air Move 312  
Answering a Call 66  
Recently-used applications 55  
Voice mail 23  
Accessory 302  
Audio Output 302  
Dock Sound 302  
Accounts and Sync  
Adding Contacts 111  
Add 2 Sec Pause 68, 101  
Add to Favorites 116  
Adjusting  
Quick Glance 46, 312  
Airplane Mode  
Alarm  
Deleting an Existing Alarm 205  
Setting 203  
Turning Off 205  
Alerts  
Presidential 128  
Call volume 74  
Calculator 199  
Camera 202  
372  
   
Email 209  
Audio  
Output Mode 302  
Auto Redial 296  
Battery Cover  
Removal 8  
Replace 9  
Battery Life  
Google Mail 210  
Google Maps 215  
Hide 43  
Auto Reject  
Internet 213  
Configuration 67  
Extending 15  
messaging 218  
Sharing with Others 56  
Show Hidden 43  
Shutting Down 25  
Storage Used 329  
Using the Camcorder 158  
Using the Camera 150  
Video 238  
Voice Recorder 238  
YouTube 240  
Applications and Development 199  
Apps  
Adding 42  
Reset Preferences 329  
Apps Screen  
Customizing 43  
Area Code  
Auto Assign 296  
Auto Reject List 292  
Auto Reject Mode 292  
Automatic Answering 293  
Automatic Restore 319  
B
Back up  
My Account 319  
My Data 319  
Backup and Restore 319  
Battery  
Battery Usage 330  
Battery Use & Safety 344  
Bigger Font  
Setting 303  
Blacklist  
Adding 103  
Blocking Mode 301  
Bluetooth 269  
About 250  
Change Name 251  
Changing Name 270  
Configure Device Settings 253  
Deleting a Paired Device 253  
Device Name 18  
Disconnecting a Paired Device  
Charging 13  
Display Percentage 15, 287  
Extending Life 15  
Installing 12  
Low Battery Indicator 15  
Removal 12  
Wall Charger 13  
Media Audio 253  
Microhone Function 253  
373  
Off 250, 270  
Emptying cookies 247  
Entering a URL 244  
Navigation 242  
Call Alerts 293  
Call Answering/Ending 293  
Call Barring 296, 297  
Call Duration 84  
Outgoing Headset Condition 293,  
Options 242  
Paring Devices 252  
Review Downloaded Files 251  
Scan for Devices 251  
Scanning for other Devices 270  
Sending Contact Information 254  
Sending Contacts Via 254  
Sending Namecard 108  
Set Visibility 251  
Resetting Default Actions 330  
Settings 248  
Bubble  
Options 124  
Burst Shots 151  
Resetting Times 84  
Call Forwarding 293  
Configuring 297  
Call Functions 62  
Answering 65  
Answering w Gestures 66  
Background Calling 63  
Ending 63  
C
Calculator  
Scientific Functions 199  
Calendar  
Creating an event 201  
Settings 201  
Settings 250  
Ending a Call 63  
Status indicators 250  
Switching to Headset during call  
Ending via Status Bar 63  
Making a Multi-Party Call 77  
Pause Dialing 68  
Redialing the last number 69  
Wait Dialing 68  
Call Functons  
Vibrate 294  
Call Rejection 66, 292  
Call Settings 292  
Additional Settings 296  
General 292  
Sync 200  
Turning on and off 250, 269  
Calibrate Screen 47, 314  
Visibility 270  
Call  
Visible Time-Out 251  
Bookmarks  
Backing Up 322  
Browser  
Adding bookmarks 246  
Deleting bookmarks 247  
Accessories 293  
Settings 65, 66, 292  
Call Alert  
Call Vibrations 293, 295  
374  
Call Sound  
Adding More Volume 74  
Personalize 74, 75  
Call Status Tones 293  
Call Vibration 293, 295  
Call Volume  
Settings 154  
Connections  
Accessing the Internet 242  
Contact  
Copying to microSD Card 109  
Copying to SIM Card 108  
Creating a New 95  
Joining 104  
New From Keypad 97  
Photo 166  
Taking Pictures 150  
Care and Maintenance 350  
Charging battery 13  
ChatON 145  
Adding a Buddy 146  
Adding New Buddy 146  
Buddy photo share 157  
Chatting On 146  
Adjusting 74  
Call Waiting 79, 296, 298  
Caller ID 296  
Calling  
Using Wi-Fi 71  
Calls  
Auto Reject 292  
Making a 62  
Deleting Bubble 147  
Register Service 145  
Children and Cell Phones 339  
Chrome  
Contact Entry  
Options 104  
Contact List  
Options 102  
Google 203  
Contact Menus  
Multi-party 77  
Clearing  
Options 103  
Muting 76  
Application cache and data 227  
Cloud 318  
CMAS 128  
Collect Diagnostics 18  
Commercial Mobile Alerting System  
(CMAS) 342  
Contacts  
Camcorder 158  
Accessing the Video Folder 159  
Settings 154  
Shooting Video 158  
Camera 149  
Camera Options 151  
Enabling Share Shot 161  
Quick Settings 153  
Adding a Number to Existing 100  
Adding a Pause or Wait 101  
Adding Your Facebook Friends  
Additional Options 112  
Deleting 101  
Configuration  
Initial 16  
Display Options 110, 113  
Displaying Contacts by Name 113  
375  
Export List to microSD 320  
First Name 113  
Groups 114  
Import from microSD 320  
Last Name First 113  
Merge with Samsung Account  
Reject List 103  
Sending All 107  
Setting Default Location 102  
Settings 113  
Share Namecard Via 103  
Sharing Settings 113  
Sharing/Sending 107  
Contacts List 62  
Context Menus 100, 103  
Navigation 54  
Using 54  
Cookies  
Emptying 247  
Copying Contact 108  
Create Folder  
Creating a Playlist 190  
Creating and sending  
Messages 118  
Customizing  
Home screens 55  
Deleting  
Multiple Messages 125  
Single Bubble 125  
Single Message 125  
Deleting a contact 101  
Deregister  
Web Storage 194  
Desk Clock 203  
Configuring 206  
Device  
D
Data  
Auto Sync Data 271  
Restrict Background Data 271  
Data Limit  
Calibration 47, 314  
Setting 271  
Reset 323  
Data Roaming 273  
Activate/Deactivate 271, 273  
Data Usage  
Cycle 271  
Limiting 271  
Device Name  
Edit 333  
Device Options  
Screen 289  
Display  
Icons 32  
Settings 32  
Status Bar 32  
Using Negative Colors 303  
Date  
Selecting Format 332  
Date and Time 332  
Default Storage  
Assigning 149  
Camcorder 21, 149  
Group Apps 43  
Camera 21, 149  
376  
Display / Touch-Screen 347  
Displaying your phone number 62  
DivX  
Locating VOD Number 171  
Overview 170  
Registering Your DivX Device 171  
Registration Code 333  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
Dock  
Sound 302  
Downloading  
New application 225  
Downloads 207  
Draft Messages 119  
Dropbox 194  
Uploading Picture 209  
Dual Camera 154  
Relocate 154  
Resize 154  
Dual View  
see Dual Camera 154  
Message Settings 128  
Severe 128  
Emergency Calls 349  
Making 64  
With SIM 64  
Without SIM 64  
Emoticons 120  
Ending  
A call 63  
Entering Text 85  
Using SWYPE 86  
Erasing Files  
Memory Card 331  
Exchange Email 137  
Account Setup 137  
Composing 139  
Configuring Settings 140  
Deleting Message 140  
Opening 139  
Refreshing Messages 139  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals 335  
E
Easy Mode 292  
EDGE Network 274  
Edit Page 56  
Editing a Picture 167  
Email 131  
Changing Signature 135, 140  
Composing 134  
Configuring Settings 135  
Creating an Internet Account 132  
Internet Email 132  
Opening 133  
Refreshing Messages 134  
Sending 112  
Wi-Fi Download of Attachments  
Emergency  
Alert Preview 128  
Alerts 128  
Emergency Alert  
Configuration 128  
Emergency Alerts 128  
AMBER 128  
Extra Volume 74  
Imminent Extreme 128  
377  
Extreme Alert  
Disable 129  
Font Size  
Caption 240  
Changing 303  
Forgot Pattern? 285  
G
Gallery  
Folder Options 164  
Opening 169  
Picture-In-Picture 170  
Games  
Volume 289  
Gesture  
Settings 311  
Gestures  
Overview 45  
Getting Started 7  
Battery 12  
Battery Cover 8  
Locking/Unlocking the Device 19  
microSD card 11  
SIM Card 9  
Switching Device On/Off 18  
Voice Mail 22  
Gmail 142, 210  
Composing a Message 143  
Creating an Additional Account  
F
Face Unlock 282, 283  
Opening 142  
Other Options 143  
Personalize 307  
Personalize Swype 309  
Refreshing 143  
Signing In 142  
Facebook  
Personalize 307  
Predictive Text 307  
Swpe Connect 309  
Facial Recognition 282  
Factory Data Reset 323  
Prior To 319  
Favorites Tab 116  
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)  
Regulations for Wireless Devices 355  
FCC Notice and Cautions 357  
Fixed Dialing Numbers 298  
Flipboard 210  
Viewing 143  
Google  
Backing Up Settings 322  
Create New Account 19  
Retrieving Password 20  
Signing into Your Account 20  
Voice Typing 85  
Google Books 223  
Google Mail  
see also Gmail 143  
Google Maps  
Folder  
Create 42  
Font  
Size 287  
Enabling a location source 215  
Opening a map 216  
Style 287  
378  
Google Music 180, 225  
Google Now 26, 239  
Adjust Settings 26  
Google Places  
See also Local 214  
Google Talk 237  
Google Voice Typing  
Configuring 305  
Using 94  
GPS & AGPS 348  
Group  
Joining 212  
Group Play 211  
Creating a Group 212  
Dropbox 209  
Joining a Group 212  
S Memo 230  
Deleting 115  
Home 40  
Home Key 40  
Home Screen  
Assigning a New 56  
Changing Wallpaper 60  
Menu Settings 42  
Overview 40  
Home screens  
Customizing 55  
Homepage  
Deleting a Caller Group 115  
Editing a Caller Group 115  
Removing an Entry 115  
Settings 115  
Gyroscope  
Calibration 47, 314  
H
Handwriting 91  
Settings 306  
Setting New 246  
Haptic Feedback  
Turn On/Off 302  
Vibrate 291  
Vibration Setting 289  
HDR 152  
I
Icons  
Description 32  
Indicator 32  
Status 32  
Health and Safety Information 335  
Help  
Images  
Share Music 188  
Share Pictures 156  
Sharing Pictures 212  
Groups  
Adding an Member to an Existing  
Group 114  
In-Device 213  
Hidden Applictions  
Show 43  
Assigning as a Contact icon 166  
Assigning as wallpaper 166  
Transferring 321  
Verifying 321  
Importing and Exporting  
To micro SIM card 113  
Hold  
Placing a Call on Hold 75  
Creating a new caller group 114  
379  
In Call  
Options 74  
In call  
Options 76  
Erasing 83  
J
Lookout Security 214  
Low battery indicator 15  
LTE  
Network Mode 273  
Selecting 274  
LTE Network 274  
M
Making  
Emergency Calls 64  
International Calls 67  
New call 62  
Managing Applications  
Clearing Application Cache 328  
Uninstalling Third-party  
Applications 328  
Joining  
Contact information 104  
L
Incognito 245  
Language  
Select 305  
Latitude 216  
LDAP 102  
Live Wallpaper  
Selecting 60  
Local 214  
Location  
Settings 217  
Create Window 245  
Exit Window 245  
Incoming Call  
Vibration Setting 289  
Indicator icons 32  
International Call 67  
International Calls  
Making 67  
Internet 242  
Brightness Setting 243  
Search 244  
Set Home Page 248  
Set New Homepage 246  
Internet Email 131  
IP Address 332  
IR  
Lock Pattern  
If I Forgot My Pattern 285  
Lock Screen 281  
Changing Wallpaper 61  
Say Wake-Up Command 281  
Shortcuts 281  
Market  
see Play Store 225  
Marking contact  
As a default 106  
Viewing Missed Calls 84  
Logs 81  
Media  
Smart Remote 27  
Backing Up to microSD Card 321  
Backing Up to PC 320  
Accessing 81  
Accessing from Notifications 82  
Altering Numbers 83  
380  
Memory Card  
Draft 119  
microSD Card  
Erasing Files 331  
Google Mail 142  
Insertion 11  
Merge Calls 77  
Merge with Google 102  
Message  
Icons on the Status Bar 117  
Insert Smiley 120  
Locked 119  
Removal 11  
Microsoft Exchange 96, 131  
Missed Call  
Options 119  
Read 123  
Menu Options 119  
Options 119  
Viewing from Lock Screen 84  
Mobile Data  
Register a Number as Spam 124  
Reply 123, 146  
Scheduled Messages 119  
Settings 126  
Signature 128  
Signing into Google Mail 142  
Spam 119  
Text Templates 131  
Translate Text 121  
Types of Messages 117  
Viewing new 123  
micro SIM Card 10  
Changing Exisitng PIN 325  
Importing and Exporting 113  
Insertion 10  
Activate/Deactivate 271  
Set Data Limit 271  
Usage 272  
Thread Options 124  
Threads 123  
Mobile HotSpot 260, 276  
Message Search 126  
Message threads 123  
Messaging  
Adding a Signature 128  
Adding Attachments 121  
Additional Text 122  
Block Unknown Senders 128,  
Activating 260  
Allowed Devices 262  
Changing Password 261  
Connecting 261  
MAC FIltering 262  
Mobile HotSpots  
Detect and Connect 272  
Mobile Networks 272  
Data Roaming 273  
Mobile Data 272  
Creating and sending 118  
Creating and Sending Text  
Messages 118  
Lock 325  
Removal 10  
Mobile Web 242  
Current Message Options 120  
Deleting a message 125  
Setting Up Lock 325  
Entering Text in the Mobile Web  
Browser 244  
381  
Navigating with the Mobile Web  
Removing Apps 50  
Restoring Apps 51  
Volume 289  
Music App  
Using Bookmarks 245  
Running Multiple Apps 51  
Switch Arrangement 52  
Tab Repositioning 49  
Using 48  
Multi-Party Call 77  
Dropping One Participant 79  
Private conversation 78  
Multi-party call  
Adding Songs to Playlists 185  
Changing Library View 181  
Changing Settings 182  
Creating a Playlist 185  
Deleting a Playlist 185  
Listening 182  
Music Application 180  
Now Playing Screen 183  
Options While Playing 184  
Playing 183  
Playing a Playlist 185  
Searching for Music 182  
Tab Options 183  
Music File Extensions  
3GP 187  
Mono  
Audio Setup 304  
Motion  
Activate 46, 313  
Browse Image 313  
Direct Call 313  
Mute/Pause 313  
Setting up 77  
Multi-party calls 77  
Multi-Tasking  
Overview 45  
Settings 311  
Smart Alert 313  
Zoom 313  
Mounting the SD card 331  
Multi Window  
Background Calling 63  
Watching Videos 170  
Music 187, 218  
Adding Music 190  
Activate/Deactivate 48, 286  
Creating a Playlist 190  
Editing a Playlist 191  
Making a Song a Ringtone 188  
Options 188  
Playing Music 187  
Removing Music 190, 191  
Using Playlists 190  
AAC 187  
AAC+ 187  
eAAC+ 187  
M4A 187  
MP3 187  
MP4 187  
WMA 187  
Close App 53  
Customizing 50  
Increase App Window Size 52  
Maximize App 53  
Panel Relocation 50  
Rearrange Apps 50  
382  
Music Files  
Removing 191  
New applications  
Downloading 225  
Outlook 131  
Overview  
Transferring 191  
NFC (Near Field Communication) 278  
Noise Reduction 75  
Non-Market Applications 227  
Notification  
Vibration Setting 289  
Notification Bar 38  
Using 38  
Home Screen 40  
My Places 215, 221, 325  
P
N
Namecard  
Palm Motion  
Activate 47, 313  
Capture Screen 314  
Mute/Pause 314  
Passpoint  
Sending 107  
Sending All 107  
Share Via 107  
Notifications  
Volume 289  
Navigating  
Application Menus 53  
Sub-Menus 54  
Through Screens 44  
Navigation  
Enable Location 221  
Go Home 222  
Passwords  
O
On/Off Switch 18  
Operating Environment 353  
Optical Reader 91, 223  
Organizer  
Make Visible 326  
Pause  
Adding to a Contact 101  
Pause Dialing 68  
Personal Localized Alerting Network  
(PLAN) 342  
Personalize  
Call Sound 74  
Phone  
Options 221  
Calculator 199  
Negative Colors 303  
Network connection  
Adding a new 257  
Network Mode  
2G Network 274  
GSM/WCDMA 274  
LTE 274  
World Clock 205  
Other Important Safety Information  
Out of Office  
Message 141  
Icons 32  
Switching on/off 18  
Settings 141  
383  
Phone number  
Finding 62  
Phone Ringtone 290  
Phone Vibration 290  
Photo  
Play Books 223  
Play Music 225  
Play Store 225  
Quick Access 43  
Pointer Speed  
Configuration 311  
Power  
Auto Adjust Screen Tone 287  
Power Saving  
Q
Quick Dialing 63  
Quick Messaging 119  
R
Recently-used Applications  
Accessing 55  
Editing 167  
Photo Reader  
Red Eye  
Correction 168  
Detect Text 157  
Photos  
Options 156, 157, 159  
Sharing 156, 157, 159  
Picture  
Color Correction 168  
Face Corrections 168  
Frame 168  
Redialing the last number 69  
Reducing Exposure  
Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories 338  
Reject Call  
CPU Power 301  
Haptic Feedback 302  
LCD Adjustment 287  
Learning About 302  
Screen Power 302  
Power Saving Mode 301  
Predictive Text  
Activation 307  
Prepend  
Area Code 297  
Rejection Messages 293  
Reject Calls  
Set As 166  
Managing 66  
Reject List  
Add To 67  
Streaming from Gallery 165  
Picture-In-Picture 170  
Pictures  
Instant Sharing 161  
Sharing 160, 163  
Add to 82, 83  
Primary Shortcuts 42  
Adding and Deleting 58  
Customizing 58  
Adding 103  
Auto Reject 67  
Removing 103  
Rejection List  
Replacing 58  
Assigning Multiple Numbers 67  
384  
Assigning Single Numbers 67  
Rejection Messages  
Set Up 293  
S Memo  
Creating a New Memo 229  
S Translator  
Translate Text 231  
Translate Using Voice 232  
S Voice 232  
Set Wake-Up Command 281  
Using 80  
Samsung Account  
Backing Up Bookmarks 322  
Creating 21  
Merge Contacts 102  
Samsung Hub  
Creating a New Account 173  
Using 173  
Samsung Keyboard 90  
ABC Mode 92  
Symbol/Numeric Mode 93  
Samsung Link  
Configuring Settings 193  
Definitions 234  
Deregister Storage 194  
Sharing Files 194  
Sharing Media 195  
Uploading Images to Web 194  
Uploading Video to Web 195  
Web Storage Setup 193  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling 345  
Save a Number  
From Keypad 97  
Scan for Nearby Devices 189  
Screen  
Home 40  
Reset 323  
Reset App Preferences 329  
Reset Device 323  
Responsible Listening 351  
Restarting  
Device 19  
Restore 319  
Restrict  
Background Data 271  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile device 356  
Ringtone  
Assigning 294, 300  
Device 290  
Volume 289  
rvice 194  
S
S Beam 279  
Changing the Input Type 91  
Enabling 90  
Navigation 44  
Screen Capture 314  
Taking a Screen Shot 165  
Screen Lock  
Set Up 283  
Sounds 291  
Entering Symbols 93  
Handwriting Settings 306  
Predictive Text Settings 307  
Reset Settings 307  
Settings 306  
Sharing Multiple Pictures 164  
Sharing Pictures 163  
385  
Screen Lock Pattern  
Changing 284  
Creating 283  
SD card  
Mounting the 331  
Unmounting 331  
Sending a Namecard 107  
Setting an alarm 203  
Setting up  
Share Applications 56  
Share Shot 161  
Activate 153  
Configuring 162  
Enabling 162  
Stop Sharing 162  
Taking Images 162  
Shortcuts  
Adding from Application Screen  
Adding from Home Screen 57  
Deleting from a Screen 58  
Managing 57  
Primary 42  
SIM  
Deleting 284  
Forgot My Pattern 285  
Screen Mirroring  
Activate on Device 197  
Activation 280  
Voicemail 22  
Settings 154, 263  
Accessing 263  
Using AllShare Cast Hub 197  
Screen Mirroringt  
Screen Rotation  
Auto-Rotate 287  
Screen Timeout 287  
Screen Unlock  
Face and Voice Unlock 283  
Face Unlock 282  
Swipe 282  
Browser 248  
Call 65  
Contact list 113  
Display 32  
Enabling the GPS Satellites 324  
Enabling Wireless Locations 324  
Messaging 126  
Tab Overview 263  
Wallpaper 60, 61  
Setup  
Micro 7, 10  
see also micro SIM 10  
SkyDrive 194  
Smart Alarm 204  
Smart Practices While Driving 342  
Smart Switch 27  
Snooze 205  
Screens  
Initial 16  
Severe Alert  
Disable 129  
Adding and Deleting 56  
Customizing 55  
Rearranging 56  
Repeat 204  
386  
SNS 111  
Social Network  
Match Criteria 130  
Registering a Phrase as Spam 130  
Settings 128, 129  
Swpe Connect  
Backup and Sync 309  
Swype 85  
123ABC Mode 88  
ABC Mode 87  
Cellular Data 309  
Connect 309  
Connect Registration 309  
Contribute Usage Data 309  
Entering Numbers 89  
Entering Symbols 89  
Entering Text 86  
Keyboard Mode 87  
Personal Dictionary 309  
Preferences 308  
Reset Dictionary 308  
Select Text Input Mode 87  
Settings 308  
Adding Facebook Contacts 111  
Resync 112  
Social Networking  
Adding Contacts From 111  
Software Update 332  
Wi-Fi 334  
Song  
Set As 188  
Sound  
Adapt Sound 291  
Sounds  
Spam Messages 119  
Assigning 119  
Speakerphone  
Turning on and off 76  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information 340  
Speed Dial  
Changing an entry 70  
Making a call 70  
Removing an entry 70  
Setting up entries 69  
Standard Limited Warranty 359  
Standard Mode 292  
Status Bar 32  
Sub-Menus  
Navigation 54  
SugarSync 194  
SwiftKeyFlow  
Samsung Keyboard 306  
Switching to a Bluetooth  
During a call 76  
Turn Off All 304  
Spam 131  
Accessing Your Spam Folder 131  
Add a Phrase 128, 130  
Add Number 120, 121, 124  
Assigning Manually 129  
Assigning Phone Numbers 129  
Block Unknown Numbers 130  
Block Unknown Senders 128,  
SYM mode 87  
Updates 309  
System  
Volume 289  
Manually Add a Number 128, 129  
387  
System Manager 323  
System Tone  
Settings 291  
Timer  
Automatic Answering 293, 296  
Tools  
Camera 150  
TrackPad  
Configure 311  
Transferring Large Files 163, 279  
Transferring Music Files 191  
Translate 121  
TranslateMessage Bubble 124  
Travel Wallpaper  
Lock Screen 61  
TTS 310  
TTY Mode 300  
Home 40  
Side Views 31  
Uninstalling  
Third-party applications 227  
Unknown Numbers  
Blocking Messages 130  
Unknown Sources 227  
Unlock  
Using Face 282  
Using Voice 283  
Unmounting  
SD card 331  
Usage  
Battery 330  
USB Connections  
As Storage Device 255  
USB Settings  
As Storage Device 255  
USB Tethering 259  
Activating 259, 276  
Use GPS Satellites 215, 221, 324  
Use Wireless Networks 215, 221,  
T
Task Manger  
Overview 25  
Tethering 276  
Active Icon 259  
Disconnecting 260  
see USB Tethering 259  
Text Input  
Methods 85  
Text Input Method  
Selecting 85  
Text Templates 131  
Create Your Own 131  
Text To Speech 310  
Text-to-speech  
Configuration 310  
Third-Party Applications 328  
Uninstalling 227  
Time Zone  
Twitter  
Personalize Swype 309  
Predictive Text 307  
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 347  
Understanding Your Device 27  
Back View 30  
Display 32  
Features 27  
Selecting 332  
Front View 28  
388  
Using Favorites  
Adding Favorites 246  
Using 94  
Voicemail 300  
Volume Settings  
Adjusting 289  
VPN  
Adding 276  
Settings 276  
VPN Client 240  
Changing Channels 177  
Configure Just For You 179  
Initial Configuration 176  
Locating Programs 178  
Personalize 179  
Settings 178  
Using 177  
Web 242  
History 247  
Web applications  
enable downloading 254  
Widget  
Adding Widgets 42  
Widgets  
V
Vibrate 294  
Activate/Deactivate 300  
Vibration  
Create 299  
Device 290  
Intensity Setup 289  
Video  
Picture-In-Picture 170  
Sharing Videos 169  
Volume 289  
W
Wait 68, 101  
Adding to a Contact 101  
Wait dialing 68  
Wallpaper  
Assign Home 42  
Videos  
Adding and Removing 59  
Moving to a Different Screen 59  
Settings 235  
Stopwatch 205  
Wi-Fi  
Options 157  
Voice Input  
Recognition 310  
Voice mail  
Accessing 23  
Accessing from another phone 23  
Setting up 22  
Voice Search 239, 310  
Voice Typing 85  
Configuring 305  
Home and Lock Screens 60  
Wallpapers  
Assigning from Gallery 157  
Changing Home Screen 60  
Changing Lock Screen 61  
Changing via Settings Menu 60  
Managing 60  
Warranty Information 359  
WatchON 176  
Adding a New Room 179  
About 256  
Activating 71, 256, 264  
Advanced settings 258  
Calling 71  
Connecting to 256  
389  
Deactivating 258  
Direct Connection 268  
During Sleep 266  
MAC Address 266  
Manually Adding Network 267  
Manually scan for network 258  
Off 258  
WPA2 PSK 260, 261  
WPS PIN  
Pairing 268  
WPS Push Button  
Connect 267  
Pairing 267  
Y
YouTube  
High Quality 241  
High Qulaity 198  
Settings 240  
Settings 264  
Show Usage 271  
Status icons 257  
Wi-Fi Calling 9  
Activating 72, 277  
Connection Preferences 72, 278  
Icons 73  
Launching 73  
Settings 72, 278  
Wi-Fi Direct 268  
Activate and Connect 269  
Device Name 18  
World Clock  
DST Settings 205  
390  

Tripp Lite NB1005BK User Manual
Toshiba 2 Tb 35 HDD2J93 User Manual
Sprint Nextel SPH N200 User Manual
Sony ICF C760 User Manual
Snapper 1692374 User Manual
Samsung Spinpiont F3 HD164GJ User Manual
Samsung Code SCH i220 User Manual
Research In Motion Blackberry Cell Phone 8910 User Manual
RCA A180 User Manual
Nokia 6230i User Manual